12

User Guide

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The contents of this user guide and the associated Corel DESIGNER software are the
property of Corel Corporation and its respective licensors, and are protected by
copyright. For more complete copyright information about Corel DESIGNER, please
refer to the About Corel DESIGNER section in the Help menu of the software.
Copyright 2000 2005 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Corel, the Corel logo, Corel DESIGNER, ActiveCGM, CorelDRAW, CorelTUTOR,
Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, CAPTURE, Grammar As-You-Go, Micrografx,
Natural-Media, Painter, Paint Shop, Perfect Shapes, PowerClip, Quattro Pro,
QuickCorrect, Scrapbook, Support Services, and WordPerfect are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the U.S.
and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, Illustrator, Reader, Photoshop, PostScript, and Reader are registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac, Macintosh, QuickTime, and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. AutoCAD is a
registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. Creo and Color Central are registered
trademarks of Creo Inc. in Canada. InstallShield is a registered trademark of
InstallShield Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Kodak
is a registered trademark of Eastman Kodak Company. Macromedia Flash is a
trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Microsoft, Visio, Visual Basic, Windows, and Windows
NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries. Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape
Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. PANTONE and other
Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. JavaScript is a registered
trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. TRUMATCH is
a registered trademark of Trumatch, Inc. Other product, font, and company names and
logos may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Table of Contents
Welcome to Corel DESIGNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Whats new in Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Installing Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Changing the language of the user interface and Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Activating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Updating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Documentation conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
VBA Programming Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Customer feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Other resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About Corel Corporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Workspace tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Corel DESIGNER terminology and concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Corel DESIGNER application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Corel DESIGNER workspace tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Starting and opening drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Finding and inserting drawing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming and panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Previewing a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backing up and recovering files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing drawing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing drawings and quitting Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of contents

27
29
30
32
34
36
38
40
41
42
43

Working with precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Gravity snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Using constrain keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Setting default property values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Drawing lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Closing multiple line segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Drawing flow lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Drawing dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Drawing callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Formatting lines and outlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Applying linear pattern brush strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Spraying linear patterns along a line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Drawing shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Drawing rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Drawing polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Drawing predefined shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Understanding projected drawing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Using projected drawing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Customizing drawing profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Working with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Selecting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Changing object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Copying object properties, transformations, and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Moving objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Sizing and scaling objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rotating objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Flipping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ii

Table of contents

Skewing objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning and distributing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the order of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combining objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing and displaying geometric information about objects . . . . . . . . . . . .

109
110
113
114
116
116

Shaping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Working with curve objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shaping curve objects by using Reflect Nodes mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaping objects by using envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Splitting and erasing portions of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trimming objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding and intersecting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating new objects from boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blending objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference: Shaping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119
124
125
128
131
133
136
137
138
142
144

Working with symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Using symbols in drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Managing collections and libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating, editing, and deleting symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing symbols between drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference: Working with symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145
149
150
153
154

Filling objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Applying uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Applying fountain fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying hatch fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying pattern fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying texture fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying PostScript texture fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents

157
158
160
165
169
171
171
173
iii

Working with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Creating custom color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Opening and editing custom color palettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setting color palette properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Understanding color models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Managing color for display, input, and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Understanding the Color management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Working with color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Choosing advanced color management settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Correcting colors for display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Working with color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Creating and applying color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Editing and sorting color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Moving and copying color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Adding three-dimensional effects to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Contouring objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Applying perspective to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Creating vector extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Creating drop shadows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing the transparency of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Applying transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Applying merge modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Using lenses with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Applying lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Editing lenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Working with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Creating layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Changing layer properties and stacking order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Moving and copying objects between layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Printing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
iv

Table of contents

Working with pages and layout tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Specifying the page layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Choosing a page background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding, renaming, and deleting pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the rulers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the rulers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the drawing scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231
234
235
237
238
239
240
242

Adding and formatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Adding and selecting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Encoding text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the appearance of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding, editing, and converting text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning and spacing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting and rotating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting text to a path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combining and linking paragraph text frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Embedding graphics and adding special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting special characters and spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying nonprinting characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

245
248
249
251
253
257
258
259
261
264
267
268
269
270

Working with Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Formatting Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Using Asian line-breaking rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Managing fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Substituting unavailable fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Working with bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

Converting vector graphics to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Adding bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Table of contents

Cropping and editing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Working with colors in bitmaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Applying special effects to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Applying color and tone effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Transforming color and tone effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Changing the color mode of bitmaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

Changing the color mode of bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Changing bitmaps to black-and-white images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Changing bitmaps to duotones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Creating Web-enabled objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Creating rollovers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Creating Web-compatible text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Publishing to the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Publishing to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Working with object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Setting up the project database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Managing object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Applying CGM data to objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Printing your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Laying out print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Previewing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Applying print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Fine-tuning print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Printing colors accurately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Printing to a PostScript printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

vi

Table of contents

Commercial printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

Working with imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing printers marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining OPI links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Preflight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343
344
347
347

Publishing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Saving documents as PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing PDF file size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with fonts in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the encoding format for PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an EPS file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting objects in PDF files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing PDF files for a service bureau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

349
351
352
353
355
355
356
356
357
358
358

Object linking and embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

Inserting linked or embedded objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Editing linked or embedded objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Importing and exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Importing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Customizing your application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Saving defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using multiple workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing feedback sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents

373
374
376
379
381
384
386
387
vii

Customizing filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Customizing file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Automating application tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

Automating by using VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Using VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Working in the Visual Basic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Installing add-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

viii

Table of contents

Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

Corel DESIGNER 12 is a precision graphics application created for the technical
illustrator. Its intuitive user interface lets you get started quickly to produce
professional results whether you are creating a new illustration or repurposing a
legacy graphic.
In this section, youll learn about
whats new in Corel DESIGNER
installing Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 applications
changing the language of the user interface and Help
activating Corel products
registering Corel products
updating Corel products
customer support services
getting help
documentation conventions
VBA programming guide
customer feedback
other resources
Corel Corporation

Whats new in Corel DESIGNER

Corel DESIGNER 12 includes new features and enhancements to boost your
productivity.
Complete graphics solution
Corel DESIGNER is now a part of Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12, which
includes the following applications and utilities to offer you a complete graphics
solution.
Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

 Corel PHOTO-PAINT a complete image-editing application that lets you

retouch and enhance photos as well as create original graphics
CorelTRACE an application for converting bitmaps to vector graphics. It is
especially useful when you need to recreate scanned drawings.
Corel CAPTURE an application for capturing images from your computer
screen
Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (6.3) an application for developing
custom solutions. It is available in Corel DESIGNER and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.
Writing Tools multilingual utilities that let you correct errors in spelling and
grammar and help to refine your writing style
Projected drawing
The new drawing profiles let you project objects onto drawing planes and create the
illusion of a three-dimensional graphic. You can choose from among 10 preset drawing
profiles, or you can create custom drawing profiles. You can then choose a drawing plane
and draw objects on projected planes, using a projected drawing mode. For information
about projected drawing, see Projecting objects on page 89.
Precision
The enhanced gravity snapping and dynamic guides let you draw and edit objects with
even greater precision.
Gravity snapping lets you snap the pointer to various points in objects, making it
easy to create and position objects accurately. You can now snap the pointer to
perpendicular and text baseline points as well. For more information, see Gravity
snapping on page 45.
Dynamic guides are temporary guidelines you can pull from the following snap
points in objects center, node, quadrant, and text baseline. For more
information, see Using dynamic guides on page 49.
You can display dynamic guides that are tangent, perpendicular, or parallel to
objects. For more information, see To display dynamic guides on page 52.
With the help of parallel dynamic guides, you can easily draw parallel lines. For
more information, see To draw parallel lines on page 54.
Drawing tools
The B-spline tool lets you draw curved lines by setting control points that shape
the curve without breaking it into segments. For more information, see To draw a
B-spline on page 63.
2

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Corel DESIGNER introduces three new types of dimension lines segment,

radial, and diameter dimension lines. Segment dimension lines let you measure the
distance between nodes in single or multiple segments. Radial and diameter
dimension lines let you measure the radius and diameter of a circle. For more
information, see Drawing dimension lines on page 66.
Enhanced line styles are especially useful for illustrating stitch patterns and
drawing parallel lines. For more information, see Formatting lines and outlines
on page 73.
Hatch fills
Hatch fills consist of hatch patterns that are composed of vector-based lines and are used
for representing different types of materials in a drawing. The new hatch fill support
lets you preserve hatch fills in drawings created in Corel DESIGNER 9 and earlier
versions. You can also apply hatch fills to objects. For more information, see Applying
hatch fills on page 160.
Editing
Editing objects is made even easier by the following enhancements:
You can now use scallops, fillets, and chamfers to shape objects. For more
information, see Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners on page 133.
The improved Transformations docker lets you project and unproject objects with
precision. To access the Transformations docker, click Window >
Transformations, and choose a command.
When you are drawing non-freehand lines or curves, the status bar displays the
segment length and the total length of all segments contained in the curve.
The enhanced Eyedropper tool lets you copy color, object properties, effects, and
transformations from one object to another. For information about using the
Eyedropper tool, see Copying object properties, transformations, and effects on
page 102.
You can create object duplicates where you want in the drawing window. For more
information, see To duplicate an object on page 101. You can also move objects
while you are drawing them by using the right-mouse button. For more
information, see To move an object while drawing on page 105.
Customizing your application
To help you quickly improve your productivity, Corel DESIGNER offers additional
workspaces. For example, you can select a workspace with the look and feel of
Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

Micrografx Designer 9 or Microsoft Visio. For more information, see Starting

and opening drawings on page 27.
The multiple language packs that you can install let you use the application in more
than one language. For example, you can install English and German language packs
and change the language of the user interface and Help at any time. For more
information, see To change the language of the user interface and Help on page 7.
Text enhancements
Unicode support lets you exchange files effortlessly, regardless of the language or
operating system in which the file was created, ensuring that text is displayed
correctly.
Text encoding lets you correct the display of text created in a language that differs
from that of your operating system. For more information, see Encoding text on
page 248.
You can now apply Asian fonts to Asian and Latin text by using the property bar.
Corel DESIGNER has enhanced text alignment. You can align text objects to other
objects by using the first text baseline, the last text baseline, or the bounding box.
For more information, see To align text to an object on page 255.
The new Insert formatting codes docker lets you easily insert special characters
and spaces, such as em dashes, en dashes, and nonbreaking spaces. For more
information, see Inserting special characters and spaces on page 269.
Hotspotting
You can manage a complex project by assigning data to its objects. The Object Data
Manager lets you access and edit this object data whether its text, a number, an
action, or an event in one convenient location. Corel ActiveCGM and WebCGM
fields are provided. When you import or export files in CGM and SVG format, the
object data is maintained. For information about adding data to objects, see Working
with object data on page 315.
Importing and exporting files
Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) You can import and export to files of CGM
Version 4 profiles, such as ACGM (ActiveCGM), WebCGM, and GREX (ATA
GREXCHANGE). These profiles, subsets of the CGM standard, are suitable for
displaying two-dimensional drawings on the Internet. For more information about
CGM files, see Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) in the Help.
Corel DESIGNER (DSF) Support for files saved in Corel DESIGNER 9 and
earlier versions has been improved. Hatch fills and enhanced line styles are
4

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

preserved in the imported files. For more information, see Corel DESIGNER
(DSF) technical notes in the Help.
Export for Office This new feature lets you optimize drawings for exporting to
Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office. For more information, see To export
to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office on page 370.
AutoCAD Data Interchange Format (DXF) and AutoCAD Drawing Database
(DWG) AutoCAD 2004 files are supported.
Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) You can choose a variety of new options when
exporting a drawing to the SVG file format. For example, you can choose a
Unicode encoding method. You can also embed information in an SVG file or store
information in externally linked files. The SVG color palette available in the
application lets you choose SVG colors. For information about SVG files, see
Scalable Vector Graphics in the Help.
Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) You can now publish a drawing to a
PDF file that is compatible with Adobe Acrobat 6.0. When you import a PDF
file, all layers, fills, and text attributes, including transparency applied to text, are
preserved. The original colors of the PDF file are reproduced accurately.
Adobe Photoshop (PSD) Support for duotone images has been added. For
more information, see Adobe Photoshop (PSD) technical notes in the Help.

Installing Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 applications

The installation wizard makes it easy to install Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12
applications and components. It lets you
install any applications included in your software package. You can install multiple
language packs so that you can change the language of the user interface and Help
in the installed applications.
add and delete components in the current installation
repair the current installation by reinstalling all application features
uninstall Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12

To install Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 applications

1 Close all applications.
2 Insert the CD in the CD drive.

Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

If the installation wizard does not start automatically, click Start on the
Windows taskbar, and click Run. Type D:\Setup, where D is the letter that
corresponds to the CD drive.
3 Follow the InstallShield wizard instructions for installing the software.

To add or delete components in a Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12

installation
1 Close all applications.
2 On the Windows taskbar, click Start > Control panel.
If your operating system is Windows 2000, click Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
3 Double-click Add or remove programs.
4 In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose
Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 from the list, and click Change.
5 In the InstallShield wizard, enable the Modify option.
6 Click Next, and follow the instructions that appear.

To repair a Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 installation

1 Close all applications.
2 On the Windows taskbar, click Start > Control panel.
If your operating system is Windows 2000, click Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
3 Double-click Add or remove programs.
4 In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose
Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 from the list, and click Change.
5 In the InstallShield wizard, enable the Repair option.
6 Click Next, and follow the instructions that appear.

To uninstall Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12

1 On the Windows taskbar, click Start > Control panel.
If your operating system is Windows 2000, click Start > Settings > Control
Panel.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 Double-click Add or remove programs.

3 In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose
Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 from the list, and click Remove.
You can remove user files such as presets, user-created fills, and customized
files during the uninstall process. To do this, click Change in the Add or
remove programs dialog box, and then enable the Remove option. Click
Next, and enable the Remove user files check box.

Changing the language of the user interface and Help

If multiple language packs are installed, you can change the language of the user
interface and Help at any time.

To change the language of the user interface and Help

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, click Global.
3 Choose a language from the Select the language for the user interface list box.
If you want to be able to change the language of the user interface and Help as you
start the application, enable the Ask me the next time the software starts check
box.
4 Restart the application.

Activating Corel products

To use Corel products, you must activate them. Activating a product generates a unique
activation code for the computer by profiling the system and using the product serial
number. Activating a product helps enforce the terms of the licensing agreement.
You can activate a product online, by phone, or by using a previously attained product
activation code. When you activate a product online, the process is anonymous,
requiring no personal information.

Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

Registering Corel products

Registering Corel products is important. Registration provides you with timely access
to the latest product updates, valuable information about product releases, and access
to free downloads, articles, tips and tricks, and special offers.
You can register when you install the application, or you can choose to register at a later
date.
You can register in one of the following ways:
online You can launch online registration if you are connected to the Internet
when you install the Corel graphics application. If no Internet connection is
detected, a list of options appears in a dialog box.
by phone You can call the Corel Customer Service Center nearest you.
For more information about registering a Corel product, visit http://www.corel.com/
support/register.

Updating Corel products

You can use the InstallShield Update Manager to check for updates to Corel and other
software products online. You can choose to have product updates downloaded and
installed automatically when they become available. You can also set how often the
Update Manager checks for product updates.
You can access the Update Manager by clicking Program Updates on the Start menu
of the Windows taskbar. For information about using the Update Manager, see the
Help topics in the Update Manager dialog box.

Corel Support Services

Corel Support Services can provide you with prompt and accurate information
about product features, specifications, pricing, availability, services, and technical
support. For the most current information on support services available for your Corel
product, please visit www.corel.com/support.

Getting help
Help is available through the following tools:
8

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 User guide provides comprehensive information about product features. A

PDF file containing the user guide can be found on the
Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 CD, in the [Language]\Documentation
folder (for example, the English\Documentation folder).
Help lets you access information directly from the user interface and use the
contents list, index, and word/phrase search tool to find topics. From the Help
window, you can also access the Knowledge Base on the Corel Web site.
ToolTips let you access information about the applications icons and buttons.
To view a ToolTip, position the cursor over an icon, button, or other application
control.
CorelTUTOR provides project-based tutorials that introduce you to basic
and advanced features of Corel DESIGNER
Topics in the user guide and Help are based on the default workspace. When you
customize command bars, commands, and buttons or choose an alternate workspace,
such as Micrografx Designer 9, the topics do not reflect your changes.

To use Help
1 Click Help > Help topics.
2 Click one of the following tabs:
Contents lets you browse through topics in the Help
Index lets you use the keywords from the index to find a topic
Search lets you search the full text of the Help for a particular word or
phrase. For example, if you are looking for information about RGB color mode,
you can type RGB to display a list of relevant topics. To search for a phrase, you
need to type the phrase and enclose it with quotation marks (for example,
dynamic guides or color mode).
Favorites lets you create a list of Help topics that you can easily access. You
can remove and add Help topics at any time.
You can also
View Help for a dialog box

Click the Help button.

Print a specific Help topic

Open a Help topic, click the frame you want

to print, and click Print.

Access information and troubleshooting tips

on the Corel Web site

Click Corel Knowledge Base in the upperright corner of the Help window.

Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

To access CorelTUTOR
Click Help > CorelTUTOR.

Documentation conventions
The table below describes important conventions used in the user guide and Help.
Convention

Description

Examples

Menu > Menu command

Click the menu item

followed by the menu
command.

Click File > Open.

pointer

cursor

Move the pointer close to

where you want to snap.

list box

A list of options that drops

down when a user clicks the
down arrow button

Choose a value from the

Force field list box on the
property bar.

docker

A window containing
available commands and
settings relevant to a specific
tool or task

Double-click the name of the

group in the Shaping
docker.

Enter

Enter key

Type a value in the Eraser

thickness box on the
property bar, and press
Enter.

A note contains information

that is important to the
preceding steps. It can
describe conditions under
which the procedure cannot
be performed.

You cant copy or clone a

compound blend.
If you click the Equal
margins button, you must
specify values in the Top/left
margin boxes.

A tip contains suggestions

for performing the preceding
steps. It can present
alternatives to the steps, and
other benefits and uses of the
procedure.

You can also create a

hyperlink using the Internet
toolbar.
Trimming an object can
reduce the drawing file size.

10

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

VBA Programming Guide

The VBA Programming Guide for Corel DESIGNER can help you use Microsoft Visual
Basic for Applications to automate tasks and create custom solutions. If your
installation of Corel DESIGNER includes VBA, then the guide is accessible from a link
in the VBA Help included with Corel DESIGNER.

Customer feedback
If you have any comments or suggestions about Corel DESIGNER, you can send them
by e-mail to [email protected]. You can check the product Web site for the latest
news, tips and tricks, and product upgrade information. Go to www.corel.com, and
follow the links to the product site.

Other resources
Corel has training partnerships with other firms and provides professional services for
its software products.
Corel customized training
Once you have Corel applications running on your computers, our team of expert Corel
Training Specialists can help you make the most of them with customized training,
tailored to the specific needs of your work environment. We will help you develop a
custom curriculum which is practical and relevant to the needs of your organization. For
more information about Corel Customized Training, please visit www.corel.com/
customizedtraining.
Corel Training Partners (CTPs)
CTPs are independent, officially accredited local organizations that provide training in
using Corel products and are located worldwide for your convenience. To find a partner
near you, please visit www.corel.com/trainingpartners.
Corel Corporate Services
Corel is committed to getting you up and running quickly with time- and moneysaving workflow solutions. To simplify the process of deploying Corel applications
across your organization, our Corporate Services department offers a comprehensive
range of cost-effective services to meet your technology needs. This group brings
together highly skilled experts from across the company who are dedicated to providing
Welcome to Corel DESIGNER

11

top-notch solutions. Our knowledgeable team is ready to offer assistance through all
stages of your project, from application development and support to software systems
integration and training.
For more information on Corel Corporate Services, please contact
[email protected].

About Corel Corporation

Corel Corporation provides innovative software solutions that help millions of valueconscious businesses and consumers in over 75 countries improve their productivity. The
Company is renowned for its powerful software portfolio that combines innovative
photo-editing and graphics-creation, vector-illustration and technical-graphics
applications along with office and personal productivity solutions. Corel's flagship
products include the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite, the WordPerfect Office Suite, the
Corel Painter Natural-Media painting and illustration software and the Paint
Shop Family of digital photography and image-editing software. For more
information, please visit www.corel.com.

12

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Workspace tour
Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of Corel DESIGNER will help
you easily follow this user guides concepts and procedures.
In this section, youll learn about
Corel DESIGNER terminology and concepts
Corel DESIGNER application window
Corel DESIGNER workspace tools

Corel DESIGNER terminology and concepts

Before you get started with Corel DESIGNER, you should be familiar with the
following terms.
Term

Description

object

An element in a drawing, such as an image,

shape, line, text, curve, or symbol

drawing

The work you create in Corel DESIGNER:

for example, technical drawings, schematics,
and diagrams

vector graphic

An image generated from mathematical

descriptions that determine the position,
length, and direction in which lines are
drawn

bitmap

An image composed of grids of pixels or dots

artistic text

A type of text to which you can apply special

effects, such as shadows

Workspace tour

13

Term

Description

paragraph text

A type of text to which you can apply

formatting options, and which can be edited
in large blocks

Corel DESIGNER application window

When you launch Corel DESIGNER, the application window opens, containing a
drawing window. The rectangle in the center of the drawing window is the drawing
page where you create your drawing. Although more than one drawing window can be
opened, you can apply commands to the active drawing window only.
The Corel DESIGNER application window appears below. A description of its parts
follows.
Toolbar

Title bar

Menu bar

Property
bar

Toolbox

Docker

Ruler

Drawing
window
Drawing
page

Document
navigator

14

Color
palette

Status bar

Navigator

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Part

Description

Menu bar

The area containing pull-down menu

options

Property bar

A detachable bar that contains properties of

the active tool or object. For example, when
the text tool is active, the text property bar
displays commands that create and edit text.

Toolbar

A detachable bar that contains shortcuts to

menu and other commands

Title bar

The area displaying the title of the currently

open drawing

Rulers

Horizontal and vertical borders that are used

to determine the size and position of objects
in a drawing

Toolbox

A floating bar with tools for creating and

modifying objects in the drawing

Drawing window

The area outside the drawing page bordered

by the scroll bars and application controls

Drawing page

The rectangular area inside the drawing

window. It is the printable area of your work
area.

docker

A window containing available commands

and settings relevant to a specific tool or task

Color palette

A dockable bar that contains color swatches

Status bar

An area at the bottom of the application

window that contains information about
object properties such as type, size, and
resolution. The status bar also shows the
current mouse position.

Document navigator

The area at the bottom left of the drawing

window that contains controls for moving
between pages and adding pages

Workspace tour

15

Part

Description

Navigator

A button at the bottom-right corner of the

drawing window that opens a smaller display
to help you move around a drawing

To toggle between displaying and hiding the status bar, click View >
Toolbars > Status bar.
To toggle between displaying and hiding the rulers, see To hide or display the
rulers on page 237.

Corel DESIGNER workspace tools

Application commands are accessible through the menu bar, toolbars, toolbox, property
bar, and dockers. The property bar and dockers provide access to commands that relate
to the active tool or current task. The property bar, dockers, toolbars, and toolbox can
be opened, closed, and moved around your screen at any time.
You can customize many of these workspace tools to suit your needs. For more
information, see Customizing your application on page 373.

Standard toolbar
The standard toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts to many of the menu
commands.
The standard toolbar displays by default. For information about customizing the
position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see Customizing toolbars on page 381.
Click this button

To
Start a new drawing
Open a drawing
Save a drawing

16

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Click this button

To
Print a drawing
Cut selected objects to the Clipboard
Copy selected objects to the Clipboard
Paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing
Undo an action
Restore an action that was undone
Import a drawing
Export a drawing
Set a zoom level
Start Corel applications
Open the Web connector docker

More about toolbars

In addition to the standard toolbar, Corel DESIGNER has toolbars for specific kinds of
tasks. For example, the Text toolbar contains commands relevant to using the Text tool.
If you use a toolbar frequently, you can display it in the workspace at all times.
For information about customizing the position, contents, and appearance of toolbars,
see Customizing toolbars on page 381.
The table below describes toolbars other than the standard toolbar.

Workspace tour

17

Toolbar

Description

Drawing plane

Contains commands for choosing a drawing

plane and a drawing profile, and lets you
access the Projected axes docker. This
toolbar is displayed by default.

Text

Contains commands for formatting and

aligning text

Zoom

Contains commands for zooming in and out

of a drawing page

Internet

Contains commands for Web-related tools

for creating rollovers and publishing to the
Internet

Transform

Contains commands for skewing, rotating,

and mirroring objects

Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications

Contains commands for editing, testing, and

running VBA commands

18

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Exploring the toolbox

The Corel DESIGNER toolbox shows the active tool
and the available categories of tools in the upper area.
The options symbol indicates that there are
additional tools or options.
When you choose a tool, any additional tools or
options appear in the options area at the bottom of
the toolbox. When you choose a tool in the options
area, it becomes the active tool.
For example, if you click the Curve tools button in the
upper area, you see its associated tools in the options
area. If you click the 2-point line tool in the options
area, it becomes the active tool, and its icon appears on
the Curve tools button in the upper area.
You can use flyout menus instead of the
options area. Click Tools > Options, click
Toolbox in the Workspace list of categories,
and enable Display tool groups as flyout menus.
The following table provides descriptions of the tools in the Corel DESIGNER toolbox.
Pick tool
The Pick tool lets you select, size, skew, and
rotate objects.
Shape tool
The Shape tool lets you edit the shape of
objects.
Curve tools
The 2-point line tool lets you draw a
straight two-point line segment.

Workspace tour

19

The 3-point curve tool lets you draw a

curve by defining the start, end, and center
points.
The Multi-point line tool lets you draw
lines and curves one segment at a time in
preview mode.
The Bzier curve tool lets you draw curves
one segment at a time.
The B-spline tool lets you draw curved lines
by setting control points that shape the
curve without breaking it into segments.
The Freehand curve tool lets you draw
single line segments and curves.
The 2-point connector line tool lets you
join two objects with a straight line segment.
The Multi-point connector line tool lets
you join two objects with a multipointed
line.
Rectangle tools
The 2-point rectangle tool lets you draw a
rectangle by dragging diagonally.
The 3-point rectangle tool lets you draw a
rectangle by dragging to set the height and
width.
Circle tools
The Center-point circle tool lets you draw
a circle by specifying the center and a point
on the circumference.
The Center-radius circle tool lets you draw
a circle by specifying a value for the radius
and then clicking where you want the center
to be.

20

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The 3-point circle tool lets you draw a

circle by specifying three points on the
circumference.
Ellipse tools
The 2-point ellipse tool lets you draw an
ellipse by dragging diagonally.
The 3-point ellipse tool lets you draw an
ellipse by dragging the centerline and then
specifying the width.
Polygon tool
The Center-point polygon tool lets you
draw a polygon by dragging from the center
to a point (vertex) on the polygon.
Text tool
The Text tool lets you add a line of text,
create a paragraph text frame and type
within it, or add text along a path if a curve
is selected.
Dimension tools
The Horizontal or vertical dimension tool
lets you draw horizontal or vertical
dimension lines.
The Parallel dimension tool lets you draw
slanted dimension lines.
The Angular dimension tool lets you draw
angular dimension lines.
The Segment dimension tool lets you
display the distance between end nodes in
single or multiple segments.
The Radial dimension tool lets you display
the radius of circles or circular arcs.

Workspace tour

21

The Diameter dimension tool lets you

display the diameter of circles or circular
arcs.
Callout tools
The 1-leg callout tool lets you draw a
callout with one leader line.
The 2-leg callout tool lets you draw a
callout with a two-segment leader line.
The 3-leg callout tool lets you draw a
callout with a three-segment leader line.
The Text source button lets you enter
callout text interactively, from the
Clipboard, from object properties, or
incrementally:
Interactive text option
Clipboard text option
Object property text option
Increment text option
Perfect Shapes tools
The Basic shapes tool lets you draw shapes
such as triangles and parallelograms.
The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows
of various shapes.
The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw
several standard flowchart shapes.
The Miscellaneous shapes tool lets you
draw ribbon objects and explosion shapes.
Linear pattern tools

22

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The Linear pattern sprayer tool lets you

draw chains, hoses, pipes, and similar
objects.
The Linear pattern brush tool lets you
apply brush strokes to a curve and create
sweep arrows and similar objects.
The Linear pattern preset tool lets you
draw curves using preset strokes.
Interactive tools
The Extrusion tool lets you give objects a
three-dimensional look.
The Blend tool lets you blend one object
into another through a series of intermediate
shapes.
The Envelope tool lets you distort the shape
of an object by applying an envelope to it
and shaping the envelope.
The Transparency tool lets you apply a
transparency to an object.
The Contour tool lets you create a series of
concentric shapes radiating into, or out of, an
object.
The Drop shadow tool lets you create the
illusion of lighting in a two-dimensional
drawing by adding a shadow to an object.
You can adjust properties such as feathering,
opacity, edge style, and color.
Deletion tools
The Virtual segment delete tool lets you
delete portions of objects between
intersecting lines.

Workspace tour

23

The Eraser tool lets you erase portions of an

object.
The Knife tool lets you break an object into
separate objects.
Interactive fill tools
The Interactive fountain fill tool lets you
apply fills to a selected object.
The Interactive mesh fill tool lets you
apply a mesh fill to simple objects, curves,
and bitmaps.
Eyedropper tools
The Eyedropper tool lets you select object
properties, such as fill, line thickness, size,
and effects, from an object on the drawing
window.
The Paintbucket tool lets you fill an object
with a color selected from another object
using the Eyedropper tool.
Zoom tool
The Zoom tool lets you change the
magnification level in the drawing window.
Pan tool
The Pan tool lets you control which part of
the drawing is visible in the drawing
window.

Property bar
The property bar displays the most commonly used functions that are relevant to the
active tool or to the task youre performing. Although it looks like a toolbar, the
property bar content changes depending on the tool or task. For example, when you

24

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

click the Text tool in the toolbox, the property bar displays only text-related
commands, such as text, formatting, alignment, and editing tools.

You can customize the contents and position of the property bar to suit your needs. For
more information, see Customizing the property bar on page 384.
Common property bar buttons
The Add preset button lets you save the
current settings for reuse.
The Delete preset button lets you delete
the item selected in the Presets list box.
The Fill button lets you open a dialog box
where you set up a fill to apply to an object.
The Outline button opens a dialog box
where you set line properties.
The Geometric properties button opens
the Property manager docker and lets you
set coordinates for the selected object.
The Apply as default button lets you use
the current settings as the defaults for new
objects.

Workspace tour

25

Dockers
Dockers display the same type of
controls as a dialog box, such as
command buttons, options, and list
boxes. Unlike most dialog boxes, you
can keep dockers open while working
on a document, so you can readily
access the commands to experiment
with different effects.
An example is the Property manager
docker. When this docker is open, you
can click an object in the drawing
window and view formatting,
dimensions, and other properties of the
object.
Dockers can be either docked or
floating. Docking a docker attaches it
to the edge of the application window.
Undocking a docker detaches it from
other parts of the workspace, so it can be easily moved around. You can also collapse
dockers to save screen space.

Status bar
The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as width and height,
cursor position, and relevant commands. While you are drawing a non-freehand line or
curve, the segment length and total length for all segments are displayed.
See Customizing the status bar on page 386 for information about customizing the
contents and appearance of the status bar.

The graphic shows some of the information displayed in a status bar.

26

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Getting started
Drawings are the work that you create and edit.
In this section, youll learn about
starting and opening drawings
finding and inserting drawing content
working with templates
undoing, redoing, and repeating actions
zooming and panning
previewing a drawing
working with views
saving drawings
backing up and recovering files
accessing drawing information
closing drawings and quitting Corel DESIGNER

Starting and opening drawings

When you start Corel DESIGNER, you can choose a workspace with which you feel
comfortable. For example, you can choose a workspace that has the look and feel of
Micrografx Designer 9. If you are new to Corel DESIGNER, it is best to choose the
default workspace, on which all procedures in the Help and user guide are based.
Corel DESIGNER lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, a template, or an
existing drawing. A blank page gives you the freedom to specify every aspect of a
drawing. A template provides you with a starting point and leaves the amount of
customization up to you. The templates included with the program are available under
the following categories:
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
Architectural
Getting started

27

 DIN (Deutsches Institut fr Normung)

Engineering
ISO (Industry Standards Organization)
For more information about creating and using templates, see Working with
templates on page 30.
Basing a new drawing on an existing drawing lets you reuse objects and page settings.
You can open existing drawings saved to a variety of file formats. For information about
the file formats you can open, see File formats in the Corel DESIGNER Help.
If the drawing you are opening is from an earlier version of Corel DESIGNER and
contains text in a language different from that of your operating system, you can choose
code page settings to ensure text is converted into Unicode characters properly. Code
page settings help you correctly display text outside the drawing window, such as
keywords, file names, and text entries in the Object manager and Object data
manager dockers. To correctly display text in the drawing window, you need to use
encoding settings. For more information, see Encoding text on page 248.

To start Corel DESIGNER

1 Click Start > Programs > Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 12 >
Corel DESIGNER 12.
In Windows XP, click All programs on the Start menu.
2 In the Select workspace dialog box, choose a workspace from the list box.
If you do not want the Select workspace dialog box to appear each time you start
Corel DESIGNER, enable the Do not show this dialog box on startup check
box.
Procedures in the Help and user guide are based on the default workspace.
You can change the workspace after you start the application. For more
information, see To choose a workspace on page 375.

To start a drawing
To

Do the following

Start a drawing from a blank page

Click File > New.

28

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Start a drawing from a template

Click File > New from template, click the

tab that corresponds to the template
category you want, and choose a template.

You can specify a layout style (template) by clicking Layout > Page setup,
clicking Layout in the Page list of categories, and choosing a layout style from
the Layout list box.

To open a drawing
1 Click File > Open.
2 Locate the folder where the drawing is stored.
3 Click a filename.
4 Click Options >> to display additional options and file information.
If the drawing is from an earlier version of Corel DESIGNER and contains text in a
language different from the language of your operating system, choose the
corresponding option from the Code page list box to ensure that text is properly
converted into Unicode characters.
5 Enable either of the following check boxes:
Extract embedded ICC profile lets you save the embedded International
Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is
installed
Maintain layers and pages lets you maintain layers and pages when you
open files. If you disable the check box, all layers are combined into a single layer.
6 Click Open.
You can also open a drawing by clicking the Open button

on the toolbar.

If you want to view a thumbnail of the drawing, click the Preview check box.

Finding and inserting drawing content

You can use vector and raster graphics stored on your hard drive, network, Corel CDs,
or online.
Getting started

29

You can also access online images directly from Corel on the Web through the
Scrapbook docker.

To browse for vector and raster graphics

1 Click Window > Scrapbook > Browse.
2 Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.
3 Double-click an icon in the CD list and navigate to a folder.
You can also
Browse for files on your computer or
network

Double-click the Desktop icon, and

navigate to a folder.

Browse for images online

Click the Content on the Web button.

To browse for images online, you must be connected to the Internet.

To change your browsing view in the Scrapbook docker, click the flyout
arrow, click View, and choose a view type.

To search for vector and raster graphics

1 Click Window > Scrapbook > Search.
2 Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.
3 Type a keyword in the Search for text box.

To insert a graphic file

Drag the graphic file to the drawing window.

Working with templates

A template is a set of styles and page layout settings that govern the layout and
appearance of a drawing. You can use the default template (Blank Generic Corel
DESIGNER Document) or choose one from a wide variety of preset templates
available in the application. For information on starting a drawing from a template, see
Starting and opening drawings on page 27. If none of the preset templates meets your
30

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

requirements, you can create a template based on styles you create or styles taken from
other templates. For example, if you regularly put together a schematic diagram, you
can save the schematics page layout settings and styles to a template.
You can edit a template by making changes to the styles, page layout settings, or
objects. For example, if you like a template but want to make it more versatile, you can
add styles that youve created or that youve taken from another template. For
information on setting page layout options, see Specifying the page layout on
page 231.
After you have started a drawing with a template, you can load a different template.
When you load a template, you can choose to load just the styles or to load styles, page
layout settings, and objects.
When you create a new drawing using a template, the program formats the page using
the templates page layout settings and loads the templates styles in the new file.

To create a template
1 Click File > Save as.
2 Type a name in the File name list box.
3 Choose CDT - Corel DESIGNER template from the Save as type list box.
4 Locate the folder where you want to save the template.
5 Click Save.

To edit a template
1 Click File > Open.
2 Choose CDT - Corel DESIGNER template from the Files of type list box.
3 Locate the folder where the template is stored.
4 Double-click a template filename.
5 In the Open dialog box, enable the Open for editing check box.
To preview the contents of a template, enable the Preview check box.

To create a new file based on a saved template

1 Click File > Open.
Getting started

31

2 Choose CDT - Corel DESIGNER template from the Files of type list box.
3 Locate the folder where the template is stored.
4 Double-click a template filename.
5 Enable the New from template check box in the Open dialog box.
If, in addition to loading the templates styles, you also want to load page settings
and objects, enable the With contents check box.

Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

You can undo the actions you perform in
a drawing, starting with the most recent
action. If you dont like the result of
undoing an action, you can redo it.
Reverting to the last saved version of a
drawing also lets you remove one or more
actions. Certain actions applied to
objects, such as stretching, filling,
moving and rotating, can be repeated to
create a stronger visual effect.
Customizing the undo settings lets you
increase or decrease the number of actions
that you can undo or redo.

The Undo manager

docker

32

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To undo, redo, and repeat actions

To

Do the following

Undo an action

Click Edit > Undo.

Redo an action

Click Edit > Redo.

Undo or redo a series of actions

Click Window > Undo manager. Choose

the action that precedes all the actions you
want to undo, or choose the last action you
want to redo.

Revert to the last saved version of a drawing

Click File > Revert.

Repeat an action

Click Edit > Repeat.

When you undo a series of actions, all actions listed below the action you
choose are undone.
When you redo a series of actions, the action you choose and all actions listed
between it and the last undone action are redone.
You can repeat an action on another object or group of objects by selecting the
object or objects and clicking Edit > Repeat.
You can also undo or redo actions by clicking the Undo button
button on the Standard toolbar.

or Redo

To customize the Undo settings

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace list of categories, click General.
3 Type a value in the Regular box.
The value you specify is limited only by your computers memory resources.
The higher the value you specify, the greater the demand on memory resources.

Getting started

33

Zooming and panning

You can change the view of a drawing by zooming in to get a closer look or by zooming
out to see more of the drawing. You can experiment with a variety of zoom options to
determine the amount of detail you want.
Another way in which you can view specific areas of a drawing is by panning. When you
work at high magnification levels or with large drawings, you may not be able to see
the whole drawing. Panning lets you move the page around in the drawing window to
view areas not previously displayed.
While you are panning, you can zoom in and out. While you are zooming, you can pan.
This saves you from having to alternate between the two tools.
You can specify zooming and panning settings to zoom in quickly to detailed parts of a
drawing and zoom out to the larger context.

To zoom
1 Click the Zoom tool

2 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom to all objects
Zoom to selected
Zoom to page
Zoom to page width
Zoom to page height
The Zoom to selected tool is available only when you select one or more
objects before you choose the tool.
If you choose the Zoom in button, move the pointer to the drawing window
and click to zoom in or right-click to zoom out. To zoom in on or out of an area,
drag while holding the left or right mouse button respectively to marqueeselect the area.
You can also zoom in by double-clicking or dragging anywhere in the drawing
window using the Pan tool . To zoom out, right-click in the drawing
window.
34

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Use the following keyboard shortcuts to zoom during any task, such as when
you are drawing an object:
F2 zoom in around the pointer
F3 zoom out around the pointer
F4 zoom to all objects
F5 refresh the drawing window
F6 zoom to selected objects
F7 zoom to the page

The F2 and F3 shortcut keys let you zoom in and out around the pointer.

To pan in the drawing window

1 Click the Pan tool

2 Drag in the drawing window until the area you want to view appears.
If you want to pan in the drawing window while you are zoomed in on the
drawing, click the Navigator button in the lower-right corner of the
drawing window. Drag the crosshair pointer around in the Navigator pop-up
window.

Getting started

35

Using the Navigator (lower-right), you can display any part of a drawing
without having to zoom out.

To establish default settings for zooming and panning

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, pan
tool.
3 To specify what you want the Zoom or Pan tool to do when you right-click it in
the drawing window, enable one of the following options:
Zoom out zooms out by a factor of two
Context menu displays a menu of commands that you can choose from to
zoom to a specific level
4 Enable the Zoom relative to 1:1 check box to make the Zoom tool operate
relative to real-world distance.

Previewing a drawing
You can preview a drawing to see how it will look when you print and export. When
you preview a drawing, only the objects on the drawing page and in the immediate area
of the drawing window are displayed, and you can see all layers that are set to print in
the Object Manager. If you want to get a closer look at specific objects in a drawing,
you can select and preview them, too. When you preview selected objects, the rest of
the drawing is hidden.

36

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Before you preview a drawing, you can specify the preview mode. The preview mode
affects the speed at which your preview displays and the amount of detail that is
displayed in the drawing window.
You can also display consecutive pages on the screen at the same time and create objects
that span two pages.

To preview a drawing
Click View > Full-screen preview.
Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window.

To preview selected objects

1 Select the objects.
2 Click View > Preview selected only.
3 Click View > Full-screen preview.
Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window.
If Preview selected only mode is enabled and no objects are selected, Full
screen preview displays a blank screen.
You can disable Preview selected only mode after you return to the
application window by clicking View > Preview selected only.

To specify the full screen preview mode

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Use draft view displays the drawing without PostScript fills, highresolution bitmaps, or anti-aliasing
Use enhanced view uses anti-aliasing to display a sharper version of
drawings with and without PostScript fills
You can have PostScript fills display when you preview in Enhanced mode by
enabling the Show PostScript fills in enhanced view check box.
Getting started

37

To view facing pages

1 Click Layout > Page setup.
2 In the Document, Page list of categories, click Layout.
3 Enable the Facing pages check box.
4 Choose one of the following settings from the Start on list box:
Left side starts the document on a left-facing page
Right side starts the document on a right-facing page

Working with views

As you work, Corel DESIGNER lets you display a drawing in any of the following
modes:
Simple wireframe displays an outline of the drawing by hiding fills, extrusions,
contours, drop shadows, and intermediate blend shapes; also displays the bitmaps
in monochrome. It lets you quickly preview basic elements in a drawing.
Draft displays a drawings fills and bitmaps using a low resolution; eliminates
some detail to allow you to focus on the color balances in a drawing.
Enhanced displays a drawing with PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps,
and anti-aliased vector graphics.

From left to right: Simple wireframe, Draft, and Enhanced views

The view you choose affects the amount of time it takes for a drawing to refresh or open.
For example, a drawing displayed in Simple wireframe view takes less time to refresh
or open than does a drawing displayed in Enhanced view.
38

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can save a view of any part of a drawing so that you can return to that view later.

To choose a viewing mode

Click View, and click one of the following modes:
Simple wireframe
Draft
Enhanced

To save a view
1 Click Window > View manager.
2 Use the Zoom tools on the View manager docker to set up a view.
3 Click Add current view

You can also

Rename a view

Double-click a view name, and type a new

name.

Delete a saved view

Click a view, and click Delete current view

.

If you disable the Page icon beside a saved view on the View manager
docker, Corel DESIGNER switches to the magnification level only, not the
page, when you switch to that view. Similarly, if you disable the Magnifying
glass icon , Corel DESIGNER switches to the page only, not the
magnification level.

To switch to a saved view

1 If the View manager docker is not open, click Window > View manager.
2 Click a view on the View manager docker.
You can also switch to a saved view by selecting it from the Zoom levels list
box on the toolbar.

Getting started

39

Saving drawings
You can save a drawing as you work. Corel DESIGNER offers advanced options that let
you assign notes, keywords, and thumbnails to drawings so that you can find them more
easily.
By default, drawings are saved to the Corel DESIGNER file format (DES); however,
advanced save options let you choose other file formats as well. If you are saving a
drawing to use in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported
by that application. For information about supported file formats, see File formats in
the Corel DESIGNER Help. For information about saving files to other formats, see
Exporting files on page 369.
If you are working on a large drawing, saving only the selected objects reduces the file
size, which can decrease the time it takes to load the drawing.
A drawing can also be saved as a template, allowing you to create other drawings with
the same properties. You can choose to save only selected objects in a drawing. For
information about saving a drawing as a template, see Starting and opening drawings
on page 27.

To save a drawing
1 Click File > Save as.
2 Locate the folder where you want to save the file.
If you want to save notes or keywords with the file, type them in the
corresponding box.
If you want to specify advanced settings, click Advanced, and specify the
settings you want in the Options dialog box.
3 Type a filename in the File name list box.
4 Click Save.
If you want to save changes made to a previously saved drawing, click File >
Save.
You can also save a drawing by clicking the Save button
toolbar.

on the Standard

To save only selected objects

1 Select the objects.
40

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 Click File > Save as.

3 Enable the Selected only check box.
4 Locate the folder where you want to save the file.
5 Type a filename in the File name list box.
6 Click Save.

Backing up and recovering files

The program can automatically save backup copies of drawings and prompt you to
recover them when you restart the program in the event of a system error.
The auto backup feature saves drawings that you have open and modified. During any
working session, you can set the time interval for automatically backing up files and
specify where you want the files to be saved: by default in your temporary folder or to
a specified folder.
You can recover backed-up files from the temporary or specified folder when you restart
the program. Backup files are stored in either the temporary or the user-specified folder.
You can choose not to recover a file; however, that file is automatically erased when you
shut down the program normally.

To specify auto backup settings

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Save.
3 Enable the Auto-backup every check box, and type a value in the Minutes list
box.
4 In the Always back-up to area, enable one of the following options:
Users temporary folder lets you save an auto backup file in the temporary
folder
Specific folder lets you specify the folder for an auto backup file
You can also
Create a backup file every time you save

Enable the Make backup on save check

box.

Disable auto backup

Choose Never from the Minutes list box.

Getting started

41

Auto backup files are named autobackup_of_filename and can be saved in

any folder you specify. Backup files created when you save a drawing are named
backup_of_filename and are always stored in the same folder as the original
drawing.
All open or modified files not in Corel DESIGNER (DES) file format are
backed up as Corel DESIGNER files.
You can cancel the creation of an auto backup file by pressing Esc while saving
is in progress.

To recover a backup file

1 Restart Corel DESIGNER.
2 Click OK in the File recovery dialog box.
3 Save and rename the file in a specified folder.
Recovered files are named GraphicX.des, where X is the numbered
increment.
If you click Cancel, Corel DESIGNER ignores the backup file and deletes it
when you exit the program normally.

Accessing drawing information

As you work, you can access drawing information such as the number of pages, fonts,
text statistics, color models used, and the types of objects the drawing contains. You can
also save and print this information.

To access drawing information

1 Click File > Document info.
2 Enable the check box beside each type of information you want to display.
You can also
Save drawing information

42

Click Save as, specify a folder and filename,

and click Save.
Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Print drawing information

Click Print.

Closing drawings and quitting Corel DESIGNER

You can close one or all open drawings at any time before quitting the program.

To close drawings
To close

Do the following

One drawing

Click File > Close.

All open drawings

Click File > Close all.

To quit Corel DESIGNER

Click File > Exit.
You can also quit the program by pressing Alt + F4.

Getting started

43

Working with precision

Precision is essential for technical graphics. Using gravity snapping, dynamic guides
and constraining, Corel DESIGNER lets you create and position objects accurately.
When drawing or modifying objects, snapping allows you to specify the exact
placement of a point. When drawing objects, constraining affects their shape or the
angle that lines are drawn. For example, when drawing a rectangle you can constrain it
to be a square.
You can use these features for all drawing and editing operations. For example, before
rotating an object, you can snap the center point to another objects corner, and then
rotate the object around that point.
In this section, youll learn about
gravity snapping
using dynamic guides
using constrain keys

Gravity snapping
Gravity snapping is the attraction of the pointer to a snap point. Snap points are precise
mathematical drawing coordinates. When the pointer is close to a snap point, the snap
points gravity source is highlighted, indicating it as the target that the pointer will snap
to.
Each snap points gravity field has a radius of 10 pixels by default. When your pointer
enters a gravity field, a gravity source indicator displays around the point and the name
of the gravity source displays on the screen. Gravity snapping can be turned on or off.
Gravity keys let you specify that a single type of gravity snap is active. By default,
gravity keys are the first letters of gravity candidates. When you hold down a gravity
key, all other gravity snaps are inactive. For example, if you hold down the M key, only
the Midpoint gravity snap is active. You can change the gravity shortcut keys.

Working with precision

45

If the pointer is within the gravity fields of two or more gravity candidates, the one
closest to the pointer has priority. If two are the same distance from the pointer, the snap
will be to the gravity candidate with the higher priority as listed below.
Gravity source
indicator

Gravity candidate

Description

Node

Node object

Intersection

Geometric
intersection of line
segments, arcs, or
guidelines

Midpoint

Line segment
midpoint

Quadrant

Snap points that are

at 0, 90, 130, and
270 on a circle,
ellipse, or arc

Tangent

Point on the outside

edge of an arc, circle,
or ellipse where a
line will touch but
not intersect the
object

Perpendicular

Point on the outside

edge of a segment
where a line will be
perpendicular to the
object

Edge

Location that
touches the nearest
perpendicular edge
(shortest
perpendicular
distance from the
pointer to the edge)

46

Gravity key

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Gravity source
indicator

Gravity candidate

Description

Gravity key

Center

Center of the closest

object (arc, regular
polygon, or curve
centroid)

Grid

Grid point, whether

or not the grid is
visible

Text baseline

Point in the baseline

of artistic or
paragraph text

Absolute

Pointer location;
temporarily
suspends all gravity
snaps

You can make gravity candidates active or inactive and set other options to customize
snapping.

Working with precision

47

Corel DESIGNER lets you control how gravity snapping works.

You can snap to a guideline by snapping to its edge or the intersection of two
guidelines. To turn off snapping to guidelines, disable the Edge gravity mode.

To turn gravity snapping on or off

1 Click Tools > Gravity.
2 Enable or disable the Gravity on check box.
You can also press Alt + Z to toggle gravity snapping on and off.

To use gravity snapping

1 Move the pointer close to where you want to snap.
2 When the gravity source becomes highlighted, click the mouse button.
If you are dragging to draw a line or select an object, release the mouse button.
48

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also use gravity snapping to snap objects. Drag an object close to
where you want to snap, and when the gravity source becomes highlighted,
release the mouse button.
You can see the gravity source name and its coordinates in the status bar.

To set gravity options

1 Click Tools > Gravity.
2 In the Gravity modes area, enable one or more of the mode check boxes.
Click the Select all button to enable all gravity candidates.
Click the Deselect all button to disable all gravity candidates, but without turning
off gravity snapping.
If you want to show the gravity source indicators, enable the Show gravity
location marks.
If you want to show screen tips, enable the Screen tip check box.
If you want to change the size of the gravity field around candidates, specify a
number in the Gravity radius box.

Using dynamic guides

You can display dynamic guides to help you move, align, and draw objects in precise
relation to other objects. Dynamic guides are temporary guidelines that you can pull
from the following snap points in objects center, node, quadrant, and text baseline
end nodes. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see Gravity
snapping on page 45. You can also display dynamic guides that are tangent,
perpendicular, or parallel to objects, as well as dynamic guides that are extensions of line
segments.

Working with precision

49

The 2-point rectangle tool was used to pull dynamic guides from the
following snap points (marked by green squares): center (left), quadrant
(middle), and tangent (right).

Examples of a perpendicular dynamic guide (left) and a parallel dynamic

guide (right)

As you drag an object along a dynamic guide, you can view the objects distance from
the snap point that was used to create the dynamic guide; this allows you to place the
object precisely. Dynamic guides can also help you draw objects in relation to other
objects and draw parallel lines. In addition, you can display intersecting dynamic guides
and place the object at the intersection point.

50

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

A dynamic guide was pulled from a node in the bolt on the left. The screen tip
beside the node displays the angle of the dynamic guide(0)and the distance
between the node and the pointer (1.5). The bolt on the right was dragged
along the dynamic guide and positioned precisely 1.5 inches away from the
node used to generate the dynamic guide.

Dynamic guides contain invisible divisions called ticks to which your pointer gravitates.
Ticks let you move objects with precision along a dynamic guide. You can adjust tick
spacing to suit your needs, and you can disable snapping to ticks. You can set other
options for dynamic guides. For example, you can choose to display dynamic guides at
one or more preset angles, or at custom angles you specify. A preview of the angle
settings you choose is available. When you no longer need a dynamic guide at a certain
angle, you can delete the angle settings.

An example of a dynamic guide that is an extension of a line segment

Working with precision

51

You can turn off dynamic guides at any time.

To enable or disable dynamic guides

1 Click Tools > Dynamic guides setup.
2 Enable the Dynamic guides on check box.
You can toggle dynamic guides on and off by pressing Shift + Alt +D.

To display dynamic guides

1 With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool.
2 Move the pointer over and then off a node, center, quadrant, or text baseline snap
point of an object.
3 Repeat step 2 with other objects to display other dynamic guides.
The snap points you point to are registered in a queue and used to create dynamic
guides.
You can also

Do the following

Display a dynamic guide that is a tangent to

an objects edge

Move the pointer over an objects edge.

When an edge snap point becomes
highlighted, press H. Next, as if you wanted
to draw a tangent, move the pointer off the
snap point until the dynamic guide appears.

Display a dynamic guide that is

perpendicular to an object

Move the pointer over an objects edge.

When a snap point becomes highlighted,
press U. Next, as if you wanted to draw a
perpendicular line, move the pointer off the
snap point until the dynamic guide appears.

52

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Do the following

Display a dynamic guide that is parallel to a

line segment

Click Tools > Dynamic guides setup, and

ensure that the Generate parallel guides
check box is enabled. Start to draw a straight
line, and then move the pointer over the
edge of an existing line segment to register
the angle. Next, as if you were drawing a
line parallel to the line segment you just
pointed to, move the pointer back until a
parallel dynamic guide appears.
You can use the 2-point line , Multipoint line , or 3-point rectangle tool
to display parallel dynamic guides.

Display a dynamic guide that is an extension

of a line segment

Click Tools > Dynamic guides setup, and

ensure that the Extend along segment
check box is enabled. Move the pointer over
an end node in the line segment. When the
snap point becomes highlighted, move the
pointer as if you were extending the line
segment; continue to move it until the
dynamic guide appears.

The node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap points appear only when the
corresponding gravity modes are activated. For more information about snap
points and gravity modes, see Gravity snapping on page 45.
To avoid displaying too many dynamic guides, you can clear the queue of
points at any time by clicking in the drawing window or by pressing Esc.
You can use the snap points you registered to display intersecting dynamic
guides. To do this, display a dynamic guide and then move the pointer along
it to where an intersecting dynamic guide would display from a registered snap
point.

To place an object in relation to another object

1 With dynamic guides enabled, select an object.

Working with precision

53

If you want to move the object by a specific snap point, move the pointer over a
snap point you want until the snap point becomes highlighted.
2 Drag the object to a node, center, quadrant, or text baseline snap point of the
target object.
3 When the snap point of the target object becomes highlighted, drag the object
along the dynamic guide to position it.

To draw an object in relation to another object

1 With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool.
2 Move the pointer over a node, center, quadrant, or text baseline end node snap
point of an object.
3 When the snap point becomes highlighted, move the pointer to display a dynamic
guide.
4 Move the pointer along the dynamic guide to where you want, and drag to draw an
object.

To draw parallel lines

1 Click Tools > Dynamic guides setup, and make sure that the Generate parallel
guides check box is enabled.
2 Draw a straight line or an object that contains straight line segments.
3 Start to draw another straight line, and then move the pointer over the edge of an
existing straight line segment.
4 Move the pointer back to where you want to draw the parallel line.
5 When a parallel dynamic guide appears, drag along the guide until the line is the
length you want.

54

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To draw a parallel line, first start drawing a straight line (left). Next, move
the pointer over the edge of a straight line segment (middle). Finally, move the
pointer back until a parallel dynamic guide appears (right), and drag along
the guide until the parallel line is the length you want.

With the help of parallel dynamic guides, you can also use the 3-point
rectangle tool to draw rectangles that are parallel to straight line segments.

To place an object at the intersection of dynamic guides

1 With dynamic guides enabled, select an object.
If you want to move the object by a specific snap point, move the pointer over the
snap point you want until the snap point becomes highlighted.
2 Drag the object to an eligible snap point of another object, and drag to display a
dynamic guide. Dont release the mouse button.
3 Drag the object to another eligible snap point, and when the snap point becomes
highlighted, drag to display another dynamic guide to where the two dynamic
guides would intersect.
4 When the intersection point displays, release the mouse button.
Below is an example of using intersecting dynamic guidelines to position a washer
in relation to two objects another washer and a bolt.

Working with precision

55

First, the washer was dragged by its center snap point (left) to the other
washers edge, and then to the right to display a dynamic guide (right).

Next, the washer was dragged to the edge of the bolt, and then down to display
another dynamic guide (left). The washer was positioned at the intersecting
point of the dynamic guides (right).

To set dynamic guide options

1 Click Tools > Dynamic guides setup.
2 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Angle screen tip lets you display or hide the angle of dynamic guides
Distance lets you display or hide the distance from the snap point used to
create the dynamic guide

56

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

3 Type a value in the Tick spacing box to change the distance between the invisible
divisions on the dynamic guides.
4 In the Guides area, enable or disable the angle check boxes to choose the angles at
which to display the dynamic guides.
When you enable an angle check box, a preview of the dynamic guide displays in
the Guides preview window.
5 Enable the Extend along segment check box to display dynamic guides that are
extension of line segments.
6 To display dynamic guides that are parallel to line segments, enable the Generate
parallel guides check box.
You can also

Do the following

Disable snapping to ticks

Disable the Snap to ticks check box.

Display a custom dynamic guide by

specifying its angle

In the Guides area, type a value in the

Degrees box, and click Add.

Delete angle settings

Click an angle check box in the list box, and

click Delete.

Display dynamic guides at all available

angles

Click Select all.

Using constrain keys

Constrain keys let you restrict how objects are drawn or edited. For example, when
drawing a line you can constrain it to be perfectly horizontal or vertical. You can change
which key is used as the constrain key.

To constrain while drawing or editing

Start drawing or editing, and hold down the Ctrl key to restrict pointer movement
to the specified constrain angle or to restrict the object shape.
To change the direction of a line youre drawing, release Ctrl, and move the pointer
in the direction you want. You can, then, hold down Ctrl again to restrict pointer
movement to the constrain angle.

Working with precision

57

A rectangle is constrained to a square, an ellipse to a circle, and a polygon to a

shape with sides of equal size.
To change the constrain angle, click Tools > Options. In the Workspace list
of categories, click Edit, and type a value in the Constrain angle box.
You can change the constrain key from Ctrl to Shift, the Windows standard.

To change the constrain key

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace, Toolbox list of categories, click Pick tool.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Ctrl = Constrain, Shift = Transform from center uses the Ctrl key as the
constrain key
Windows standard uses the Shift key as the constrain key

58

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Working with lines, outlines, and

brush strokes
Corel DESIGNER lets you add lines and brush strokes using a variety of techniques
and tools. After you draw lines or apply brush strokes to lines, you can format them.
You can also format the outlines that surround objects.
The program provides you with preset objects that you can spray along a line.
You can create flow and dimension lines and callouts in drawings.
In this section, youll learn about
setting default property values
drawing lines
closing multiple line segments
drawing flow lines
drawing dimension lines
drawing callouts
formatting lines and outlines
applying linear pattern brush strokes
spraying linear patterns along a line

Setting default property values

All objects you create use default property values, including outline style and fill color.
You can apply different properties to a selected object, but when you draw a new object,
it uses the default property values.
There are several ways to change the default property values.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

59

To change default property values

To

Do the following

Set default property values to be the same as

the selected object

Click the Apply as default

property bar.

Set default property values when nothing is

selected

Change a property on a property bar, color

palette, dialog box, or docker. For example,
on the Property manager docker, click the
Fountain fill button to have all future
objects have the fountain fill you created.
You can also click a color in the color palette
to change the default fill color, or right-click
a color to change the default outline color.

Set the default fill color by dragging

Drag a color from the color palette, and drop

it on a blank area in the drawing window.

button on the

You can also use the Tools menu to save the current settings or access the
Options dialog box to set specific settings. See Saving defaults on page 373
for more information.

Drawing lines
You can draw many kinds of lines, from curved or straight lines to preset lines. You can
create segments that are straight and curved in the same line. You can draw straight or
curved segments and then add one node at a time. You can also draw curved segments
by specifying width and height.
You can draw B-splines, which are typically smooth, continuous, curved lines shaped by
control points. Control points let you draw smooth curves easily. B-splines touch the
first and last control points and are pulled by the points in between. However, unlike
the nodes on Bzier curves, control points dont let you specify the points through which
a curve passes when you want to align a curve with other drawing elements.
The control points that touch the line are called clamped control points. These points
function as anchors. The points that pull the line but do not touch it are called floating
control points. The first and last control points are always clamped on open-ended Bsplines. The points in between float by default, but you can clamp points if you want to

60

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

create cusps or straight lines within the B-spline. You can edit completed B-splines by
using the control points.

The path of a B-spline curve is determined by the control points you set.

Some lines have nodes and control points that you can manipulate to shape lines as you
draw. For information about node types, see Working with curve objects on page 119.
Corel DESIGNER provides preset lines that let you create thick strokes in a variety of
shapes. After you draw a preset line, you can apply a fill to it as you would to any other
object. For information about applying fills, see Filling objects on page 157.

To draw a straight line

1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the 2-point line tool

2 Point to where you want to start the line, and drag to draw the line.
As you drag, the length and angle of the segment appear in the status bar. If youre
adding to a line, the total length for all segments also appears.
You can also
Draw a line by using the Multi-point line
tool

Click the Multi-point line tool . Click

where you want to start the line, and click
where you want to end the first line
segment. Click to add additional segments.
Double-click to end the line.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

61

You can also

Add a line segment to a selected line

With the 2-point line tool, point to the end

node of a selected line, and drag to draw the
line.

You can constrain a two-point line to a straight vertical or horizontal line by

holding down Ctrl while you drag. You can change the angle of this line by
clicking Tools > Options, clicking Edit in the Workspace list of categories,
and changing the value in the Constrain angle box.
You can use snapping to specify the beginning and end points of lines. For
information, see Working with precision on page 45.

To draw a curved line

1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the Freehand curve tool

2 Point to where you want to start the curve, and drag to draw the line.
You can also
Draw a curved line using the Multi-point
line tool

Click the Multi-point line tool . Point to

where you want to start the curve, and drag
across the drawing page. Double-click to
finish the curve.

Draw a curved line using the Bzier curve

tool

Click the Bzier curve tool . Click where

you want to place the first node, and drag
the control point in the direction you want
the curve to bend. Release the mouse button.
Position the cursor where you want to place
the next node, and drag the control point to
create the curve you want. Double-click to
finish the curve. The length of the line
appears in the status bar as you drag.

You can erase a portion of a curved freehand curve by holding down Shift and
dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse button.

62

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can close an open curve object by clicking Arrange > Close path and
choosing a close option.

To draw a curved line by specifying width and height

1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the 3-point curve tool

2 Click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to
end.
The start and end positions appear in the status bar.
3 Release the mouse button, and click where you want the apex of the curve to be.
As you position the apex, the length of the segment appears in the status bar. If
youre adding to a line, the total length for all segments also appears.

To draw a B-spline
1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the B-Spline tool

2 Click where you want to start the line.

3 Click to set as many control points as you need to shape your line.
Control points float by default but you can clamp control points to the line by
pressing V while clicking.
4 Double-click to finish the line.
Pressing Esc cancels the line instead of finishing it.
You can also
Reshape the line by using control points

Select the line by using the Shape tool ,

and reposition the control points to reshape
the line.

Float a control point

Select the line by using the Shape tool, click

a clamped control point, and click the Make
control point floating button on the
property bar.

Clamp a control point

Select the line by using the Shape tool, click

a floating control point, and click the Make
control point clamped button on the
property bar.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

63

You can also

Add a control point

Select the line by using the Shape tool, and

double-click along a control line.

Delete a control point

Select the line by using the Shape tool, and

double-click the control point you want to
delete.

Select multiple control points

Select the line by using the Shape tool, and

hold down Shift while you click on the
control points you want to select.

If you add to a B-spline by selecting the first or last control point, the clamped
control point automatically changes to a floating control point as you draw the
new portion of the line.
By choosing Arrange > Convert to curves, you can convert a B-spline line to
curves and then reshape it by using nodes. After a line has been converted, you
can no longer edit it by using B-spline control points.
You can change whether a control point is floating or clamped by holding
down V and clicking a control point.
You can also add control points while you draw a B-spline by pressing
Spacebar instead of clicking.

To draw a preset line

1 Click the Linear pattern tools button, and click the Linear pattern preset
tool .
2 Choose a preset line shape from the Preset stroke list box.
3 Drag until the line is the shape you want.
If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Linear patterns tool
width box on the property bar.

64

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Closing multiple line segments

You can quickly create a closed object from line segments by selecting which lines you
want to connect and the shape of the connecting line.
You can connect lines using the closest nodes between lines. The connecting line can be
either straight or curved. You can also connect lines using the start to end nodes of the
lines. The end node of the first selected line connects directly with the starting node of
the closest selected line. The connected lines will take on the properties of the first line
selected.

To close multiple line segments

1 Hold down Shift, and select each object using the Pick tool

2 Click Arrange > Close path, and click one of the following:
Closest nodes with straight lines
Closest nodes with curvy lines
Start to end with straight lines
Start to end with curvy lines
You can also connect the subpaths in a group of objects.
You can also select lines by marquee selecting. If the lines are marquee selected,
the properties from the top object on a layer are used. To see which object is
the top one, open the Object manager docker by clicking Window > Object
manager.

Drawing flow lines

You can draw flow lines in flowcharts and organizational charts to connect chart shapes.
Objects stay connected by these lines even when you move one or both objects. For
information about drawing flowchart shapes, see Drawing predefined shapes on
page 87.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

65

To draw a flow line between two or more objects

To

Do the following

Draw a flow line

Click the Curve tools button, and click the

Multi-point connector line tool or the
2-point connector line tool . Drag from
a node on one object to a node on another
object.

Move a flow line

Select a flow line using the Shape tool

and drag the node you want to move.

You can draw a flow line horizontally or vertically, but not both. All angles in
a flow line, therefore, are right angles.

Drawing dimension lines

You can draw dimension lines to indicate the size, length, distance, or other
measurements related to objects in a drawing. Dimension lines and the measurements
shown on the lines change with the objects they are applied to.

Dimension lines can show the sizes of parts of an object.

There are several types of dimension lines available in the application:

vertical or horizontal dimension lines measure the vertical (along the y-axis) or
horizontal (along the x-axis) distance between any two nodes
66

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 parallel dimension lines measure the actual distance between two nodes
angular dimension lines measure angles
segment dimension lines measure the linear distance between the end nodes of a
segment or the linear distance between the two most distant nodes in multiple
segments. You can also measure selected successive segments.
radial or diameter dimension lines measure the radius or diameter of a circle or a
partial circle
You can set how dimension text and lines are displayed. For more information about
formatting lines, see Formatting lines and outlines on page 73.

You can measure the distance between the end nodes of a segment (left) or the
distance between the two most distant nodes in multiple segments (right).

To draw a vertical, horizontal, or parallel dimension line

1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Horizontal or vertical
dimension tool or the Parallel dimension tool .
2 Click the start and end points of the dimension line.
3 Drag to position the dimension line, and click where you want to place the
dimension text.

To draw an angular dimension line

1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Angular dimension tool

2 Click where you want the two lines that measure the angle to intersect.
3 Click where you want the first line to end, and click where you want the second line
to end.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

67

4 Click where you want the angles label to appear.

To draw a segment dimension line

1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Segment dimension tool

2 Click the segment you want to measure.

3 Drag to position the dimension line, and click where you want to place the
dimension text.
You can also
Measure the distance between the two most
distant nodes in multiple segments

Using the Segment dimension tool,

marquee-select the segments, drag to
position the dimension line, and click where
you want to place the dimension text.

Measure successive segments automatically

Click the Automatic successive

dimensioning button on the property
bar, and marquee-select the segments you
want to measure. Drag to position the
dimension line, and click where you want to
place the dimension text.

Segment dimension lines can be applied automatically to selected successive

segments.

68

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To draw a radial or diameter dimension line

1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Radial
dimension tool.

or Diameter

2 Click a circle or a circular arc.

3 Drag to where you want the dimension text to appear.
You can hold down the constrain key while dragging to constrain the leader line
angle to the current constrain angle.
4 Release the mouse button, and then drag horizontally to place the dimension text.
If you want to add a symbol to the dimension text, choose a symbol from the
Symbols list box on the property bar.
If you transform a circle to an ellipse after applying a radial or diameter
dimension line, the dimension measurement will not display. Transforming the
ellipse back to a circle displays the correct measurement.

Examples of radial and diameter dimension lines

To set how the dimension units are displayed

1 Select a dimension line.
2 On the property bar, choose options from the following list boxes:
Dimension style lets you choose fractional, decimal or standard dimension
units
Dimension precision lets you choose a level of precision for the
measurements
Dimension units lets you choose the unit of measurement
Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

69

You can also

Hide dimension units

Click the Show units for dimensions

button .

Specify the position of the dimension units

Click the Text position drop down button

on the property bar, and click a text
position.

Change the point size and font of the

dimension units

Select a dimension line. Click the Format

text button . Choose a font style from the
Font list box, and type a value in the Size
box.

Specify a prefix or suffix to dimension text

Type a prefix or suffix in the Prefix or Suffix

box on the property bar.

Hide or show a leading zero with a

dimension value

Click the Leading zero button

on the
property bar (the default is to show the
leading zero).

Drawing callouts
You can draw callout lines to point to and identify objects in a drawing. You can choose
from a variety of line ends, including arrowheads and other symbols, to point to objects.
Callouts can have one, two, or three line segments, or legs, before the text. You can
use several styles for the text.
Callout style

Example

Line
Box
Side-bar
Box-bar
Circle

70

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Callout style

Example

Box-balloon
Boxed circle
Triangle

There are also several ways to enhance callouts. You can change the line width and color,
and adjust the gap between the line and the text.
In addition to typing text, you can insert it from the Clipboard or from object
properties, or you can add a value and increment it as you add more callouts.
You can also add a halo behind the leader lines. A halo is a mask behind the leader line
that makes it easier to see when the line is on top of another object. Usually, the halo is
the same color as the page.
Callouts are added as linked groups. You can break the callout apart if necessary.

To draw a callout
1 Click the Callout tools button, and click one of the following callout tools:
1-leg callout
2-leg callout
3-leg callout
2 Click where you want to place the arrowhead.
3 Click to end each line segment.
4 Add the callout text.
You can also
Change the callout style

Choose a style from the Callout symbol

box.

Change the distance between the leader line

and callout text

Type a value in the Callout gap box.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

71

To add text to a callout

1 Click the Callout tools button, and click the Text source tool

2 Enable one of the following options:

Interactive lets you type the text at the end of the callout line
Clipboard pastes text from the Clipboard to the callout
Object property adds an object property that you choose, such as the
object name, to the callout
Increment adds a numeric value to the callout. The value is incremented
as you continue to add callouts, and you can specify the Start value and amount
to Increment by for each addition. The increment values you set apply only to
the active drawing.

If properties are associated with an object, you can show them in callouts.

To add a halo to a callout

1 Click the Halo button

on the property bar.

2 Enable the Halo options check box.

3 Modify any of the following settings:
Width width of the halo on each side of the line
Color page color or other color; click the Color palette button to change the
color
Opacity percent of visibility; if less than 100, objects under the halo are
visible
Justification which side or sides of the line the halo is added to

72

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can apply halos only to solid lines.

The default width for a halo is double the line width. This is applied to each
side of the line. The default color for a halo is the page color.
To remove a halo from an object, select it, click the Halo button, and disable
the Halo options check box.

To break a callout apart

Right-click the callout, and click Break callout apart.

Formatting lines and outlines

You can change the appearance of both lines and outlines. For example, you can specify
their color, width, style, corner shape, and cap style. You can also remove a line or
outline, and you can create your own line or outline style.
The program also lets you copy the color of an outline to other objects and convert
outlines to objects so that you can fill them. For more information about filling objects,
see Filling objects on page 157.
You can also add arrowheads to lines and curves. In addition, you can create new
arrowheads and edit current or new ones.
Setting the miter limit for outlines lets you specify at what angle a sharp corner is either
mitered (pointed) or beveled (squared-off).
Line styles
You can choose from a variety of line styles. Line styles are organized into two
categories: standard and enhanced.
Standard line styles consist exclusively of dashes and spaces. The dashes and spaces vary
to create different patterns. You can use a preset pattern or create a custom pattern.
Each line style pattern is defined by units. There are fifty units each of which can be
on (filled in) or off (blank) to define a pattern that contains a maximum of ten
dashes or spaces. You can also set the pattern length. When you increase or decrease the
pattern length, the dashes and spaces appear longer or shorter because you are changing
the size of the units to fit the specified pattern length. The line width is not affected if
you change the pattern length.
Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

73

In the Edit line style dialog box, each box represents a unit that can be filled
in to create a dash, or left blank to create a space. You can move the white slider
to the right to increase the number of units in your pattern.

Enhanced line styles consist of shapes, zigzags, or multiple lines to create diverse
patterns. You can edit an enhanced line style by changing the width of the lines or the
width of the overall pattern.
When you apply an enhanced line style to a filled object, the fill is contained within the
objects path, not the outline. For example, if you have a circular object with a zigzag
line style, the fill does not extend into the points of the zigzag.

The pocket drawing on the left uses a standard line style, the drawing in the
center uses an enhanced line style with low pattern-width settings, and the
drawing on the right uses an enhanced line style with higher pattern-width
settings. The fill is always contained within the objects path, not the objects
outline.

The outline created by a standard or enhanced line style can appear in front of or behind
a fill. For example, you may want an outline to appear behind a fill to line up the outline
with the outer edge of the fill.

74

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

In the drawing on the left, the outline is in front of the fill. Because the outline
width is centered along the objects path, the outline covers part of the objects
fill. In the drawing on the right, the outline width is the same, but the outline
has been moved behind the fill and therefore lines up with the outer edge of the
object.

To specify line and outline settings

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen dialog button

3 In the Style area of the Outline pen dialog box, enable the Standard or
Enhanced option.
4 Choose a line style from the Pattern picker.
5 Specify the settings you want.
To

Do the following

Change the line or outline color

In the Outline area, choose a color from the

color picker
.

Change the line or outline width

In the Outline area, type a value in the

Width box.

Change the pattern length of a standard

pattern

Type a value in the Pattern length box.

Change the width of an enhanced pattern

Type a value in the Pattern width box. The

pattern width value must be higher than the
outline width value.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

75

To

Do the following

Automatically scale the line or outline if an

object is resized

Enable the Scale with image check box.

Position the outline beneath the fill

Enable the Behind fill check box.

If the Pattern width value is too low, the pattern might not appear as
expected. To view the pattern on your object, try increasing the Pattern width
value and decreasing the outline Width value.
You can also specify line settings from the property bar or the Outline page of
the Property manager docker.
You can also change the color of a line or outline by right-clicking a color
swatch on the color palette.

To edit a standard line style

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen dialog button

3 In the Style area, enable the Standard option.

4 Choose a line style from the Pattern list box.
5 Click Edit style.
6 Follow the instructions in the Edit line style dialog box to edit the pattern.
7 Click Replace.

To create a standard line style

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen dialog button

3 In the Style area, enable the Standard option.

4 Click Edit style.
5 Follow the instructions in the Edit line style dialog box to create a new pattern.
6 Click Add to save your new pattern in the Pattern picker.
76

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To copy an outline to another object

1 Using the Pick tool

, select the object whose outline you want to copy.

2 Right-click the object, and drag over the object to which you want to apply the
outline.
A blue outline of the original object follows the cursor to the new object.
3 Release the mouse button, and choose Copy outline here from the context menu.
For more information about copying object properties, see Copying object
properties, transformations, and effects on page 102.

To convert an outline to an object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Convert outline to object.

The gear drawing on the left has a gray fill and a blue outline. By converting
the outline to an object, you can separate the new object (center) from the old
filled shape (right).

To remove an objects outline

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, choose None from the Outline width list box.
You can also remove an objects outline by selecting the object and rightclicking No Color on the color palette.
Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

77

To add an arrowhead
1 Select a line or curve.
2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen dialog button

3 In the Arrows area, open the Start arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending
shape.
4 Open the End arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape.
You can also
Create an arrowhead

In the Arrows area, click Options > New.

Drag the side handles and hollow nodes to
shape the arrowhead.

Edit an arrowhead

Using the Pick tool, select an object with an

arrowhead. Click the Arrowhead selector
button on the property bar. In the
arrowhead picker, click Other. In the Edit
window, drag the side handles and hollow
nodes to shape the arrowhead.

To set the miter limit

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Edit.
3 Type a value the Miter limit box.

Applying linear pattern brush strokes

Corel DESIGNER lets you apply a variety of preset brush strokes, ranging from strokes
with arrowheads to ones that are filled with patterns. When you draw a preset brush
stroke, you can specify some of its attributes. For example, you can change the width of
a brush stroke and specify its smoothness.
You can also create custom brush strokes using an object or a group of vector objects.
When you create a custom brush stroke, you can save it as a preset.

78

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To apply a preset brush stroke

1 Click the Linear patterns tools button, and click the Linear pattern brush tool
.
2 Choose a brush stroke from the Brush stroke list box.
3 Drag until the stroke is the shape you want.
If you want to set the width of the stroke, type a value in the Linear patterns tool
width box on the property bar.
If you have access to a brush stroke that is not listed in the Brush stroke list
box, you can apply it by clicking the Browse button on the property bar, and
locating the brush stroke file.

To create a custom brush stroke

1 Select an object or a set of grouped objects.
2 Click the Linear patterns tools button, and click the Linear pattern brush tool
.
3 Click the object or grouped objects.
4 Click the Save linear patterns stroke button

on the property bar.

5 Type a filename for the brush stroke.

6 Click Save.

Example of a custom linear pattern brush stroke

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

79

You can create custom brush strokes by clicking Window > Linear patterns,
and specifying the settings you want on the Linear patterns docker.

Spraying linear patterns along a line

Corel DESIGNER lets you spray a series of objects in a line. Besides graphic and text
objects, you can import bitmaps and symbols to spray along a line.
You can control how a sprayed line appears by adjusting the spacing between objects,
so they are closer or farther apart from each other. You can also vary the order of objects
in the line. For example, if you are spraying a series of objects that includes a star, a
triangle, and a square, you can change the spray order so that the square appears first,
followed by the triangle and then the star. The program also lets you shift the position
of objects in a sprayed line by rotating them along the path or offsetting them in one of
four different directions: alternating, left, random, or right. For instance, you can choose
a left offset direction to align the objects you spray to the left of the path.
You can also create a new spraylist with objects of your own.

The Linear pattern sprayer tool lets you repeat objects along a line.

To spray a line
1 Click the Linear patterns tools button, and click the Linear pattern sprayer tool
.
2 Choose a spraylist from the Spraylist file list box

80

on the property bar.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If the spraylist you want is not listed, click the Browse button
bar to select the folder in which the file is located.

on the property

3 Drag to draw the line.

You can also
Adjust the number of objects sprayed at each
spacing point

Type a number in the top box of the Dabs/

spacing of objects to be sprayed box
on the property bar.

Adjust the spacing between dabs

Type a number in the bottom box of the

Dabs/spacing of object(s) to be sprayed
box
on the property bar.

Set the spray order

Choose a spray order from the Choice of

spray order list box on the property bar.

Adjust the size of spray objects

Type a number in the top box of the Size of

object(s) to be sprayed box on the property
bar.

Increase or decrease the size of the spray

objects as they progress along the line

Type a number in the bottom box of the Size

of object(s) to be sprayed box on the
property bar.

Reset a spraylist to its saved settings

Click the Reset values button

property bar.

on the

Increasing the value for the size of spray objects along the line causes objects to
become larger as they are distributed along the path.
Spraylists that have more complex objects use more system resources. It takes
longer to produce lines using complex objects, and these objects will increase
the file size. Using symbols for each group in the list can help reduce file size
and demands on your system. For more information about creating symbols,
see Working with symbols on page 145.

To rotate the lines that you spray

1 Select the spraylist that you want to adjust.
2 Click the Rotation button

on the property bar.

3 Type a value between zero and 360 in the Angle box.

Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

81

If you want each object in the spray to rotate incrementally, enable the Use
increment check box, and type a value in the Increment box.
4 Enable one of the following options:
Path based rotates objects in relation to the line
Page based rotates objects in relation to the page
5 Press Enter.

To offset the lines that you spray

1 Select a spraylist.
2 Click the Offset button

on the property bar.

3 Enable the Use offset check box to offset objects from the path of the line sprayed.
If you want to adjust the offset distance, type a new value in the Offset box.
4 Choose an offset direction from the Offset direction list box.
If you want to alternate between the left and right of the line, choose Alternating.

To create a new spray list

1 Click Effects > Linear patterns.
2 Select an object, a set of grouped objects, or a symbol.
3 Click the Save button on the Linear patterns docker.
4 Enable Object sprayer.
5 Click OK.
6 Type a filename in the File name box.
7 Click Save.

82

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Drawing shapes
Corel DESIGNER lets you draw basic shapes, which you can modify using special
effects and reshaping tools.
In this section, youll learn about
drawing rectangles and squares
drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges
drawing polygons
drawing predefined shapes

Drawing rectangles and squares

You can draw rectangles and squares, either by dragging diagonally and specifying two
points or by specifying the width and height with three points.
After you draw a rectangle or square, you can reshape it by rounding one or more of its
corners.

To draw a rectangle or a square

Click the Rectangle tools button, and click a rectangle tool.
To draw a

Do the following

2-point rectangle

Click the 2-point rectangle tool . Point

to where you want the rectangle to start,
drag diagonally until the rectangle is the size
you want, and release the mouse button.

Drawing shapes

83

To draw a

Do the following

3-point rectangle

Click the 3-point rectangle tool . Point

to where you want the rectangle to start, and
drag to draw the angle and width. Move the
pointer to where you want the third point,
and click.

Square

Choose one of the above rectangle tools, and

hold down the constrain key while you draw.

You can draw a rectangle from its center outward by holding down Shift as
you drag. You can also draw a square from its center outward by holding down
Shift + Ctrl as you drag.
You can draw a rectangle that covers the drawing page by double-clicking the
2-point rectangle tool.

To round the corners of a rectangle or a square

1 Click a rectangle or a square.
2 Drag one of the nodes on the objects corner.
To apply the same roundness to all corners, click the Geometric properties
button on the property bar, and enable the Round corners together check
box.
To set default corner roundness, click Tools > Options, double-click Toolbox
in the list of categories, click Rectangle tool, and move the slider or enter a
number.

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges

You can draw an ellipse by dragging diagonally or by specifying three points. You can
also draw a circle by specifying three points, or you can specify the center and a point
on the radius.
Another way to create an ellipse is to convert a curve object. The object to be converted
must have a recognizable elliptical shape to be eligible. See To convert a curve to an
ellipse on page 121 for instructions.
84

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Drawing an arc or wedge (pie shape) is similar to drawing a circle or ellipses, except that
you move the line end points around to create the shape.

To draw an ellipse or a circle

Click the Circle tools or Ellipse tools button, and click the tool you want to use.
To draw a

Do the following

3-point circle

Click the 3-point circle tool . Drag to

specify the centerline of the circle, move the
pointer, and click to specify the third point.

Center-point circle

Click the Center-point circle tool . Click

where you want to place the center, drag
until the circle is the size you want, and
release the mouse button.

Center-radius circle

Click the Center-radius circle tool . In

the Circle dialog box, type a value for the
radius, and click where you want to place the
center point.

2-point ellipse

Click the 2-point ellipse tool . Drag

diagonally until the ellipse is the size you
want, and release the mouse button.

3-point ellipse

Click the 3-point ellipse tool . Drag to

specify the centerline of the ellipse, and
release the mouse button. Move the pointer
until the ellipse is the size and shape you
want, and click.

When drawing a circle, holding down the constrain key when dragging
constrains you to the current constrain angle. See Using constrain keys on
page 57 for more information. Holding down the constrain key when drawing
an ellipse constrains the shape to a circle.
You can draw a two-point or three-point ellipse from its center outward by
holding down the Shift key as you drag (if the constrain key is Ctrl).

Drawing shapes

85

To draw an arc or a wedge

Click the Circle tools or Ellipse tools button, and click the tool you want to use.
To draw

Do the following

An arc

Click the Arc button on the property bar.

Drag in the drawing window until the arc is
the shape you want.

A wedge

Click the Pie button on the property bar.

Drag in the drawing window until the
wedge is the shape you want.

To draw an arc, the ellipse or circle must have an outline.

You can change the direction of a selected arc or a wedge by clicking the
Geometric properties button on the property bar and clicking
Complement.
You can constrain the movement of the node to the current constrain angle by
holding down Ctrl as you drag.

Drawing polygons
You can draw polygons and then reshape them. For example, you can convert a polygon
to a star by dragging its nodes, and you can change the number of sides on a polygon.
You can also draw a predefined star shape. For more information, see To draw a
predefined shape on page 88.

To draw a polygon
1 Click the Center-point polygon tool

2 Point to where you want the center, and drag in the drawing window until the
polygon is the size you want.

86

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Example of using a polygon to create a nut

You can change a polygon to a star by selecting the polygon, clicking a node
on one of the sides, and dragging toward the center of the polygon.
You can draw a polygon from its center by holding down Shift as you drag.
You can draw a regular polygon by holding down Ctrl as you drag.

To reshape a polygon
To

Do the following

Reshape a polygon

Click the Shape tool and click a node on

the object. Drag the node to change the
objects shape.

Change the number of sides of a polygon

Select a polygon. Type a value in the

Number of points on polygon box on the
property bar.

Drawing predefined shapes

You can draw predefined shapes, such as basic shapes, arrows, and stars using the Perfect
Shapes collection. Basic shapes, arrow shapes, and star shapes have glyphs which let you
modify their appearance.
You can add text to the inside or outside of the shape. For example, you might want to
put a label inside a flowchart symbol.

Drawing shapes

87

To draw a predefined shape

1 Click the Perfect Shapes tools button, and click one of the following tools:
Basic shapes
Arrow shapes
Flowchart shapes
Miscellaneous shapes
2 In the dialog box, click the shape you want to draw.
3 Drag in the drawing window until the shape is the size you want.
Perfect Shapes can be modified like any other shapes.

To modify a predefined shape

1 Select a shape with a glyph.
2 Drag a glyph until the shape is the form you want.
The right-angle, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not have glyphs.

To add text to a predefined shape

1 Click the Text tool

2 Position the cursor inside the shapes outline until it changes to a Text cursor box
, and then click.
3 Type and format the font inside the shape.

88

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Projecting objects
The Corel DESIGNER application lets you work in projected drawing modes. You can
use drawing profiles to project objects onto drawing planes and create the illusion of a
three-dimensional image.
In this section, youll learn about
understanding projected drawing modes
using projected drawing modes
customizing drawing profiles

Understanding projected drawing modes

Corel DESIGNER provides preset drawing profiles for working in projected drawing
modes. After choosing a drawing profile, you then draw or project objects onto its three
drawing planes (top, front, and right) to create the illusion of a three-dimensional
image. When you close your drawing, the last drawing profile you used is saved along
with it; this drawing profile is automatically activated the next time you open the file.
Corel DESIGNER provides ten preset drawing profiles:
one isometric (default)
four dimetric
four trimetric
one cavalier oblique
You can choose a different drawing profile at any time; however, if you change drawing
profiles after you have begun a project, the geometry of your existing objects will not
change.
If the preset drawing profiles do not meet your needs, you can create new ones or edit
existing ones. For more information, see Customizing drawing profiles on page 94.
Each default drawing profile is associated with a set of three numbers, which correspond
to the x, y, and z axes, respectively. The x-axis is measured in degrees, clockwise from a
Projecting objects

89

line perpendicular to the y-axis. The y-axis is measured in degrees, counterclockwise

from the true horizontal, which is 0 east. The z-axis is measured in degrees,
counterclockwise from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. The isometric drawing profile,
for example, has measurements of (30,90,30) while the cavalier oblique drawing profile
has measurements of (0,90,45).

This image depicts a cube displayed using eight different drawing profiles.
Top row, left to right: Dimetric1 (37,90,37); Dimetric2 (16,90,37);
Dimetric3 (7,90,45); Dimetric4 (15,90,15).
Bottom row, left to right: Trimetric1 (12,90,23); Trimetric2 (5,90,30);
Trimetric3 (45,90,7); Trimetric4 (54,90,17)

90

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

In this example, the Dimetric1 drawing profile is depicted. The x-axis is 37

clockwise from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. The y-axis is 105
counterclockwise from the true horizontal. The z-axis is 37 counterclockwise
from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. Therefore, the Dimetric1 drawing
profile has a value of (37,90,37).

You can choose to work from one of four drawing planes:

orthographic draws on a flat plane, such as the top, front, or right drawing
plane
top draws onto a projected plane bounded by the x and z axes defined in the
drawing profile
front draws onto a projected plane bounded by the x and y axes defined in the
drawing profile
right draws onto a projected plane bounded by the y and z axes defined in the
drawing profile
The default drawing plane is orthographic. Although you can change drawing planes at
any time, only one drawing plane can be active at a time.

Projecting objects

91

Using projected drawing modes

You can specify a projected drawing mode by choosing drawing profiles and drawing
planes from the Drawing plane toolbar. However, you can have only one drawing
profile and one drawing plane active at a time.
You can draw an object in a projected drawing mode, or you can project an object onto
a drawing plane. You can also unproject an object from a drawing plane; this
reconstructs the object as it would appear in an orthographic view.

To display or hide the Drawing Plane toolbar

Click View > Toolbars > Drawing plane to display it.
A check mark beside the Drawing plane command indicates that the Drawing
plane toolbar is displayed.

To choose a preset drawing profile

From the Drawing profiles list box on the Drawing plane toolbar, choose one of
the following preset drawing profiles:
Cavalier oblique (0,90,45)
Dimetric1 (37,90,37)
Dimetric2 (16,90,37)
Dimetric3 (7,90,45)
Dimetric4 (15,90,15)
Isometric (30,90,30)
Trimetric1 (12,90,23)
Trimetric2 (5,90,30)
Trimetric3 (45,90,7)
Trimetric4 (54,90,17)

To choose a drawing plane

On the Drawing plane toolbar, choose one of the following drawing planes:
Orthographic
Top
Front
Right

92

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To draw an object in a projected drawing mode

1 From the Drawing profiles list box on the Drawing plane toolbar, choose a
drawing profile.
2 On the Drawing plane toolbar, choose the Top, Front, or Right drawing plane.
3 Draw an object.

To project an object onto a drawing plane

1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Project.
3 In the Transformations docker, choose Project from the list box.
4 Enable one of the following options:
Top projects the object onto the top plane
Front projects the object onto the front plane
Right projects the object onto the right plane
5 To specify on origin point on the drawing around which to project the selected
object, do one of the following:
Enable the first option under the Origin area, and type coordinates in the X and
Y boxes.
Enable the first option under the Origin area, click the Specify origin-point
button next to the X and Y boxes, and click a point on the drawing.
Enable the second option under the Origin area, and enable the point relative to
the selected objects bounding box.
6 If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to
a copy, type 1 in the Copies box.
7 Click Apply.
Applying a contour to a projected object may not produce the desired results.
It is recommended that you apply a contour to the object in its unprojected
state and then project the object. Contour groups can be unlinked by clicking
Arrange > Break contour group apart.

To unproject an object from a drawing plane

1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Project.
Projecting objects

93

3 In the Transformations docker, choose Unproject from the list box.

4 Enable one of the following options:
Top unprojects the object from the top plane
Front unprojects the object from the front plane
Right unprojects the object from the right plane
5 To specify on origin point on the drawing around which to project the selected
object, do one of the following:
Enable the first option under the Origin area, and type coordinates in the X and
Y boxes.
Enable the first option under the Origin area, click the Specify origin-point
button next to the X and Y boxes, and click a point on the drawing.
Enable the second option under the Origin area, and enable the point relative to
the selected objects bounding box.
6 If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to
a copy, type 1 in the Copies box.
7 Click Apply.

Customizing drawing profiles

You can use the Projected axes docker to create and edit drawing profiles. The
Projected axes docker features a real-time preview of a cube, which represents the
projected axes and scales for the chosen drawing profile. When you change drawing
profiles, or when you modify the projected axes or scales, the preview is automatically
updated.
The Projected axes docker allows you to set the degree offsets for the x, y, and z axes.
For information on how these offsets are calculated, see Understanding projected
drawing modes on page 89. The Projected axes docker also allows you to set a scale
factor for each axis. For example, if you use a drawing profile with a scale of 50% on the
x-axis, projected objects will display at half their original size along their x-axis.
You can create a customized drawing profile from an existing one. You can also edit
preset and custom drawing profiles, or you can delete them altogether.

To display or hide the Projected Axes docker

Click Window > Projected axes.

94

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

A check mark beside the Projected axes command indicates that the Projected
axes docker is displayed.

To create or edit a drawing profile

1 If the Projected axes docker is hidden, click Window > Projected axes to
display it.
If you want to edit a drawing profile, choose a profile from the list.
2 In the Projected axes docker, do one of the following:
Enter a value between -360 and 360 in the X axis angle box. Repeat for the y
and z axes.
Click the Two-point angle button next to the Angle box, and drag the
pointer in the drawing window.
3 Enter a value between 10 and 500 in the X axis scale box. Repeat for the y and z
axes.
4 Click the Save button

5 Choose where you want to save the file, and type a filename in the Filename box.
6 Click Save.
You can create a custom axonometric drawing profile by having the application
calculate the scale values automatically. To do this, type values in the X axis
angle, Y axis angle, and Z axis angle boxes, and enable the Auto
axonometric check box. Note that the Auto axonometric check box may be
disabled for some angle values. In such cases, you first need to adjust the angle
values so that the option becomes available.

To delete a drawing profile

1 In the Projected axes docker, choose a drawing profile from the list box.
2 Click the Delete button

Projecting objects

95

Working with objects

Working with objects is an essential part of creating drawings.
In this section, youll learn about
selecting objects
changing object properties
copying, duplicating, and deleting objects
copying object properties, transformations, and effects
moving objects
sizing and scaling objects
rotating objects
flipping objects
skewing objects
aligning and distributing objects
changing the order of objects
grouping objects
combining objects
accessing and displaying geometric information about objects

Selecting objects
Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects,
hidden objects, and a single object in a group or a nested group, and each object in the
order in which it is created. You can also select all objects simultaneously and deselect
objects.

Working with objects

97

A selection box displays around a selected object, and an X appears at its

center.

You can select a single object in a group.

You can only select objects that are appropriate to the active tool. For example, if a curve
tool is active, you can select any curve object, but you cannot select other object types.
When you select an object, either a selection box, rotation and skew handles, or the
objects nodes appear. Clicking a selected object changes its selection mode. The
selection modes are
Drag and scale a selection box displays around the object.
Rotate and skew rotation and skew handles display around the object.
Shape/Edit the objects nodes appear.

98

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can drag, rotate, or shape the object by its snap points, depending on which
selection mode is active. See Gravity snapping on page 45 for a list of snap points.

To select objects
To select

Do the following

An object

Click an object using the Pick tool

Multiple objects

Hold down Shift, and click each object you

want to select.

An object, starting with the first object

created and moving toward the last object
created

Press Shift + Tab until a selection box

displays around the object you want to
select.

An object, starting with the last object

created and moving toward the first object
created

Press Tab until a selection box displays

around the object you want to select.

All objects

Press Ctrl + A.
Or click Edit > Select all > Objects.

An object in a group

Hold down Ctrl, and click an object in a

group.

An object in a nested group

Hold down Ctrl, and click an object you

want to select until a selection box displays
around it.

A hidden object

Hold down Alt, and click the topmost object

until a selection box displays around the
hidden object you want to select.

Multiple hidden objects

Hold down Shift + Alt, and click the

topmost object until a selection box displays
around the hidden objects you want to
select.

A hidden object in a group

Hold down Ctrl + Alt, and click the

topmost object until a selection box displays
around the hidden object you want to select.

The status bar displays a description of each hidden object as you select it.
Working with objects

99

You can also select one or more objects by dragging around the object or
objects using the Pick tool.
If you hold the Alt key while dragging, any objects you intersect are also
selected.

To deselect objects
To deselect

Do the following

All objects

Press Esc.
Or click the Pick tool , and click a blank
space in the drawing window.

A single object in multiple selected objects

Hold down Shift, and click the object using

the Pick tool.

Changing object properties

Once youve created an object, you can change its properties. There are several ways to
do this, including using the property bar, color palette, and dialog boxes. To change the
default property values for new objects see Setting default property values on page 59.
You can also copy properties from one object to another object.

To copy an objects outline, fill, or text properties to another object

1 Click the Pick tool

2 Select the object you want to change.

3 Click Edit > Copy properties from.
4 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Outline pen
Outline color
Fill
Text properties
5 Click OK.
6 Click the object whose properties you want to copy.

100

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can copy fill or outline properties or both by clicking an object with the
right-mouse button, dragging over another object, and choosing Copy fill
here, Copy outline here, or Copy all properties.

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

Corel DESIGNER gives you two ways to copy objects. You can cut or copy an object to
place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing, or you can duplicate an object.
Cutting an object to the Clipboard removes it from the drawing; copying an object to
the Clipboard leaves the original in the drawing; and duplicating an object places a copy
directly in the drawing window, not the Clipboard. You can copy entire objects or their
properties.
Duplicating is faster than copying and pasting. When you duplicate an object, the
duplicate is placed at an offset from the original object. You can also place a duplicate
wherever you want in the drawing window.
When you no longer need an object, you can delete it.

To cut or copy an object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Edit, and click one of the following:
Cut
Copy
You can also cut or copy an object by right-clicking the object, and clicking
Cut or Copy.

To paste an object into a drawing

Click Edit > Paste.

To duplicate an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Edit > Duplicate.
The duplicate is placed at an offset from the original object.
Working with objects

101

If youve set the Ctrl and Shift keys to the Windows standard
Ctrl=Duplicate/Leave original, Shift=Constrain, you can duplicate an
object as you place the duplicate where you want in the drawing window. To
do this, first select the object using the Pick tool . Holding down Ctrl, drag
the object to where you want to create a duplicate, and release the mouse
button. For information about setting the Ctrl and Shift keys to the Windows
standard, see To change the constrain key on page 58.
You can also duplicate a selected object by pressing Ctrl+D.

To delete an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Edit > Delete.
You can also delete an object by right-clicking the object and pressing Delete.

Copying object properties, transformations, and effects

You can copy object properties such as outline, fill, and text properties. You can copy
object transformations such as sizing, rotating, and positioning. You can also copy
effects applied to an object.

To copy object properties to another object

1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Eyedropper tool

2 Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar.
3 Click the Properties flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following
check boxes:
Outline
Fill
Text
4 Click the edge of the object whose properties you want to copy.
5 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Paintbucket tool

6 Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the properties.

102

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Options that are enabled in the Transformations and Effects flyouts on the
property bar are also applied.
You can copy fill or outline properties or both by right-clicking an object,
dragging over another object, and choosing Copy fill here, Copy outline
here, or Copy all properties.

To copy object transformations to another object

1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Eyedropper tool

2 Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar.
3 Click the Transformations flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the
following check boxes:
Size
Rotation
Position
4 Click the edge of the object whose transformations you want to copy.
5 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Paintbucket tool

6 Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the transformations.
Options that are enabled in the Properties and Effects flyouts on the property
bar are also applied.

To copy object effects to another object

1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Eyedropper tool

2 Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar.
3 Click the Effects flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check
boxes:
Perspective
Envelope
Blend
Extrude
Contour
Lens
Working with objects

103

 PowerClip
Drop shadow
4 Click the edge of the object whose effects you want to copy.
5 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Paintbucket tool

6 Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the effects.
Options that are enabled in the Properties and Transformations flyouts on
the property bar are also applied.

Moving objects
You can move objects by dragging, by specifying distance and direction, or by nudging.
You can also move an object while you are drawing it.
The values you set in super nudging and micro nudging allow you to move objects into
place by increments. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.1-inch increments, but you
can change the nudge values to suit your needs.

To move an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Move.
3 Use one of the following methods:
Horizontal and vertical type the horizontal and vertical values to move the
object
Length and angle type the distance and angle to move the object
User-specified distance click the User-specified distance button , and
drag the pointer in the drawing window to specify the distance and angle to
move the object
Gap and direction enable the option for these boxes, type a value for the
gap, and choose the direction to move the object. This moves the object the
distance equal to its height or width plus the specified gap.
If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to
copies that are created, type a number in the Copies box.

104

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also move a selected object by dragging it to another position in the
drawing.
You can set a precise location for the object by clicking the Geometric
properties button in the property bar and typing values in the Property
manager docker.
You can use snapping to precisely specify an objects position. See Working
with precision on page 45 for information.

To move an object while drawing

1 Start drawing an object.
2 Hold down the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button, and
drag the unfinished object to its new position.
3 Release the right mouse button, and continue drawing.

Moving an object while drawing

To nudge an object
To

Do the following

Nudge a selected object by the nudge

distance

Press an Arrow key.

Nudge a selected object by a fraction of the

nudge distance (Micro nudge)

Hold down Ctrl, and press an Arrow key.

Working with objects

105

To

Do the following

Nudge a selected object by a multiple of the

nudge distance (Super nudge)

Hold down Shift, and press an Arrow key.

To set nudge distances

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.
3 Type a value in the Nudge box.
4 Type a value in one of the following boxes:
Super nudge
Micro nudge
You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a
value in the Nudge offset box on the property bar.

Sizing and scaling objects

Corel DESIGNER lets you size and scale objects. In both cases, you can change the
dimensions of an object proportionally by preserving its aspect ratio. You can size an
objects dimensions by specifying values or changing the object directly. Scaling changes
an objects dimensions by a specified percentage.
You can change an objects anchor point from its center to any of its eight selection
handles.
You can also specify a rectangular area for selected objects to scale into.

To size an object
To

Do the following

Size a selected object

Drag any of the corner selection handles.

Size a selected object from its center

Hold down Shift, and drag one of the

selection handles.

106

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Size a selected object to a multiple of its

original size

Hold down Ctrl, and drag one of the

selection handles.

Stretch a selected object as you size it

Hold down Alt, and drag one of the

selection handles.

You can set a precise size for the object by clicking the Geometric properties
button in the property bar and typing values in the Property manager
docker.

To scale an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Scale.
3 In the Transformations docker, type values in the following boxes:
Horizontal scale lets you specify a percentage by which you want to scale the
object horizontally
Vertical scale lets you specify a percentage by which you want to scale the
object vertically
If you want to change the objects anchor point, enable the option that corresponds
to the anchor point you want to set.
If you want to maintain the aspect ratio, disable the Non-proportional check box.
You can also
Leave the original object unchanged and
apply the transformation to copies that are
created

Type a number in the Copies box.

Specify a rectangular area into which to scale

the object

Enable the Fit to box option. Note: the

number in the Copies box cannot be more
than one.

You can also scale an object by dragging a selection handle.

Working with objects

107

Rotating objects
You can rotate an object in a drawing by specifying an angle of rotation. You can also
specify a point on the drawing around which to rotate, or rotate around a point on the
selected object.

To rotate an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Rotate.
3 In the Transformations docker, type a value in the Angle box.
4 Enable the Rotate orientation option

or Retain orientation option

5 To specify a point on the drawing to rotate around, enable the first option under
Origin, and type coordinates in the X and Y boxes.
If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to
copies that are created, type a number in the Copies box.
You can also
Graphically specify two points for the angle

Click the 2-point angle button

next to
the Angle box, and drag the pointer in the
drawing window.

Graphically specify a point on the drawing

to rotate around

Click the Specify origin-point button

next to the X and Y origin boxes, and click a
point on the drawing.

Rotate around a point on the selected object

Enable the second option under Origin, and

enable the point relative to the selected
objects bounding box.

You can also rotate a selected object by dragging a rotation handle

or counterclockwise.

clockwise

Flipping objects
Corel DESIGNER lets you create mirror images of objects.

108

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Flipping an object flips it from left to right or top to bottom. By default, the anchor
point is in the center of the object.

To flip an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Flip.
3 In the Transformations docker, enable the Horizontal flip option
flip option .

or Vertical

4 Enable the Origin point about which to flip the object.

If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to
a copy, type 1 in the Copies box. (One is the maximum number of copies.)
You can also mirror a selected object by holding down Ctrl and dragging a
selection handle to the opposite side of the object.

Skewing objects
You can skew objects. When you skew an object, you specify the degree by which you
want to slant the object.
Corel DESIGNER also lets you change the skew and sizing anchor point of an object
from its default center position.

To skew an object
1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Transformations > Skew.
3 In the Transformations docker, enable the Horizontal skew option
skew option , and type a value in the Angle box.

or Vertical

4 Enable the Origin point about which to skew the object.

If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to
copies that are created, type a number in the Copies box.
If you move the skew anchor point, you can reset it to the center again.

Working with objects

109

You can also skew an object interactively by dragging one of its skew handles.

Aligning and distributing objects

The program lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing.
You can align objects to each other and to parts of the drawing page such as the center,
edges, and grid. When you align objects to objects, you can line them up by their
centers or by their edges.
The program lets you align multiple objects to the center of the drawing page
horizontally or vertically. Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge
of the page and to the nearest point on a grid. You can also align a single object, or
multiple objects, to a precise point you specify.

Example of aligning objects to each ones center

You can distribute objects at equal intervals in a specified area.

To align an object to an object

1 Select the objects.
2 Click Arrange > Align and distribute > Align and distribute.
3 Click the Align tab.
4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical alignment
you want.

110

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If you want to align objects vertically, enable the Left, Center, or Right option.
If you want to align objects horizontally, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom
option.
5 From the Align objects to list box, choose Active objects.
If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text
source objects use list box:
First line baseline
Last line baseline
Bounding box
The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edges is determined by
the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects
before you align them, the last object created will be used. If you select the
objects one at a time the last object selected will be the reference point for
aligning the others.

To align an object to the page center

1 Select an object.
If you want to align multiple objects, marquee select the objects.
2 Click Arrange > Align and distribute > Align and distribute.
3 Click the Align tab.
4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical alignment
you want.
If you want to align objects vertically, enable the Left, Center, or Right option.
If you want to align objects horizontally, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom
option.
5 From the Align objects to list box, choose Center of page.
If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text
source objects use list box:
First line baseline
Last line baseline
Bounding box

Working with objects

111

To align an object to the page edge

1 Select an object.
If you want to align an object group, select the group.
2 Click Arrange > Align and distribute > Align and distribute.
3 Click the Align tab.
4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical alignment
you want.
If you want to align objects vertically, enable the Left, Center, or Right option.
If you want to align objects horizontally, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom
option.
5 From the Align objects to list box, choose Edge of page.
If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text
source objects use list box:
First line baseline
Last line baseline
Bounding box
You can align an object to the grid by choosing Grid from the Align to objects
list box.

To align an object to a specified point

1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Align and distribute > Align and distribute.
3 Click the Align tab.
4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical alignment
you want.
If you want to align objects vertically, enable the Left, Center, or Right option.
If you want to align objects horizontally, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom
option.
5 From the Align objects to list box, choose Specified point.
If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text
source objects use list box:
First line baseline
112

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Last line baseline

Bounding box
6 Click Apply.
7 Click where you want to align the object.
You can use snapping to precisely specify the alignment point. See Working
with precision on page 45 for information.

To distribute objects
1 Select the objects.
2 Click Arrange > Align and distribute > Align and distribute.
3 Click the Distribute tab.
4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the distribution you want.
5 In the Distribute area, enable a check box that corresponds to the distribution
area.

Changing the order of objects

You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer by sending objects to the front
or back, or behind or in front of other objects. You can also position objects precisely in
the stacking order, as well as reverse the stacking order of multiple objects.

Changing the stacking order corrects the appearance of this graphic by bringing
the object to the front. (Tip: Hold the Alt key and drag the pointer to select
any object you intersect.)
Working with objects

113

To change the order of an object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Arrange > Order, and click one of the following:
To front moves the selected object to the front of all other objects
To back moves the selected object behind all other objects
Forward one moves the selected object forward one position
Back one moves the selected object behind one position
In front of moves the selected object in front of a specific object
Behind moves the selected object behind a specific object

To reverse the order of multiple objects

1 Select the objects.
2 Click Arrange > Order > Reverse order.

Grouping objects
When you group two or more objects, they are treated as a single unit. This lets you
apply the same formatting, properties, and other changes to all the objects within the
group at the same time. Corel DESIGNER also lets you group other groups to create
nested groups.

Single objects retain their attributes when they are grouped.

You can also add and remove objects to and from a group and delete objects that are
members of a group. If you want to edit a single object in a group, you can ungroup the
objects.
114

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To group objects
1 Select the objects.
2 Click Arrange > Group.
You can create a nested group, by selecting two or more groups of objects and
clicking Arrange > Group.
You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, once
grouped, the objects will reside on the same layer.
You can also group objects by clicking Window > Object manager, and
dragging an objects name in the Object manager docker over the name of
another object.

To add an object to a group

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 In the Object manager docker, drag the name of the object to the name of the
group you want to add it to.

To remove an object from a group

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Double-click the name of the group in the Object manager docker.
If youre removing an object from a group, click the object in the object list, and
drag it out of the group.
If you want to delete an object thats in a group, select the object in the object list
and click Edit > Delete.
You can select an object within a group by holding Ctrl and clicking the object.
You can then press Delete or drag it out of Object manager.

To ungroup objects
1 Select one or more groups.
2 Click Arrange > Ungroup.

Working with objects

115

Combining objects
Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common fill and outline
attributes. You can combine rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, or text.
Corel DESIGNER converts these objects to a single curve object. If you need to modify
the attributes of an object that is combined, you can break the combined object apart.
You can extract a subpath from a combined object to create two separate objects.

To combine objects
1 Select the objects.
2 Click Arrange > Combine.
Combined text objects become larger blocks of text.

To break apart a combined object

1 Select a combined object.
2 Click Arrange > Break curve apart.
If you break apart a combined object that contains artistic text, the text breaks
apart into lines first, then into words. Paragraph text breaks into separate
paragraphs.

To extract a subpath from a combined object

1 Select a segment, node, or group of nodes on a combined object using the Shape
tool .
2 Click the Extract subpath button

on the property bar.

After you have extracted the subpath, the paths fill and outline properties are
removed from the combined object.

Accessing and displaying geometric information about objects

You can access geometric information, such as the length, perimeter, and area of objects.
You can also calculate the volume of an object by specifying a desired depth. Object
116

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

geometric information can be copied to the Clipboard and displayed in the drawing
window.

To access geometric information

1 Select an object.
2 Click Tools > Geometric information dialog.
3 To calculate the volume of the selected object, enter a depth in the Depth text box.
To access geometric information about another object, select the object, and click
Refresh in the Geometric information dialog box.

To display geometric information in the drawing window

1 Select an object.
2 Click Tools > Geometric information dialog.
3 Click Copy in the Length, Perimeter, Area, or Volume area to copy the
corresponding value to the Clipboard.
4 Click Create text to display the copied value in the drawing window.
To display geometric information about another object, select the object, click
Refresh in the Geometric information dialog box, and repeat steps 3 and 4.
You can also display copied geometric information in a text box in the drawing
window by clicking Edit > Paste.

Working with objects

117

Shaping objects
You can shape objects in various ways.
In this section, youll learn about
working with curve objects
shaping objects by using Reflect Nodes mode
shaping objects by using envelopes
splitting and erasing portions of objects
trimming objects
filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners
welding and intersecting objects
creating new objects from boundaries
blending objects
creating PowerClip objects
For more information about working with paths and subpaths, see Reference: Shaping
objects on page 144.

Working with curve objects

Objects can be shaped by manipulating their nodes and segments. An objects nodes are
the tiny squares that display along the objects outline. The line between two nodes is
called a segment. Moving an objects segments lets you make coarse adjustments to the
objects shape, while changing the position of its nodes lets you fine-tune the shape of
the object.
Most objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of
freehand and Bzier curves. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape of an object,
it is recommended that you convert that object to a curve object. By converting objects
to curves, you can shape them by adding, removing, positioning, aligning, or
transforming their nodes. You can join two or more open curves or arcs to make a single
Shaping objects

119

curve object, and you can convert curve objects to ellipses, if they have a basic ellipse
shape to begin with.
Before you can manipulate an objects nodes, you must select them. When working
with curve objects, you can select individual, multiple, or all of the objects nodes.
Selecting multiple nodes lets you shape different parts of an object simultaneously.
When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments, and therefore the amount
of control you have over the shape of the object. You can also remove nodes to simplify
an objects shape.
When you create an object, it is made up of one or multiple paths. If you are working
on an open object, such as a freehand curve, you can join its start and end nodes. When
you join the start and end nodes, the two nodes are pulled together to create a closed
object. You can add color to the inside of closed paths that you create. For information
on applying fills, see Filling objects on page 157. If the paths consist of multiple
subpaths, you can break paths apart to extract subpaths. For information on breaking
paths apart, see Splitting and erasing portions of objects on page 128.
After you create a curve object, you can align its nodes horizontally or vertically.
You can change the nodes on a curve object to one of four types: cusp, smooth,
symmetrical, or line. Cusp nodes make the nodes intersecting line take on the shape of
a corner or point when you adjust the position of the nodes control points. Smooth
nodes make the nodes intersecting line take on the shape of a curve. Each control point
can be shortened or lengthened independently, giving you smaller or larger angles to
work with. Symmetrical nodes make the nodes intersecting line take on the shape of a
curve as well as intersect the node at exactly the same angle. Line nodes let you shape
objects by changing the shape of their segments. You can make a curve segment straight
or a straight segment curved.
You can also change the direction of a segment by reversing the position of its start and
end nodes. The effect is transparent only when the ends of a segment are different.
You can also shape objects by stretching, scaling, rotating, and skewing their nodes. For
example, you can scale the corner nodes of a curve object to enlarge the curve object
proportionally. Stretching, on the other hand, elongates a curve object so that its shape
is distorted. All or parts of a curve object can be rotated in a counterclockwise or
clockwise direction. You can also skew nodes to shape a curve object.

To convert objects to curve objects

1 Select the object.
120

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 Click Arrange > Convert to curves.

You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual
characters.

To join curves
1 Select two or more open curves or arcs.
2 Click Arrange > Join curves.
3 In the Endpoint tolerance dialog box, choose or type a value.
You cannot join interior points, only endpoints.
Endpoints must be within the specified tolerance to be joined.
If endpoints to be joined do not share coordinates, the endpoints are extended
to their intersection.

To convert a curve to an ellipse

1 Select the curve object to convert.
2 Click Arrange > Convert to ellipse.

To select a node
1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select a curve object.

3 Click a node.
You can also
Select multiple nodes

Press Shift, and click each node.

Select all nodes on a selected curve

Click Edit > Select all > Nodes.

Deselect a node

Press Shift, and click a selected node.

Deselect multiple nodes

Press Shift, and click each selected node.

Deselect all nodes

Click a blank space in the drawing window.

Shaping objects

121

When a curve is selected by using the Shape tool, you can select the first node
in a curve object by pressing Home, or the last node by pressing End.

To add or remove a node

To

Do the following

Add a node

Click the Shape tool , select a curve

object, and double-click where you want to
add a node.

Delete a node

Click the Shape tool, select a curve object,

and double-click a node.

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Click a subpath.
3 Click the Auto-close curve button

on the property bar.

You can close multiple subpaths by clicking Arrange > Close path. For more
information, see Closing multiple line segments on page 65.

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Press Shift, and click a node from each subpath.

3 Click the Extend curve to close button

on the property bar.

If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine
them into a single curve object, and then join the end nodes of the new
subpaths. For information about combining objects, see Combining objects
on page 116.

To align nodes
1 Click the Shape tool
122

.
Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 Select a curve object.

3 Press Shift, and select the nodes you want to align.
4 Click the Align nodes button

on the property bar.

5 In the Node Align dialog box, enable the alignment options you want.

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Click a node.
3 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:
Make node a cusp
Make node smooth
Make node symmetrical
You can also change an existing node from one type to another using shortcut
keys. To change a smooth node to a cusp node or a cusp node to a smooth node,
click the node using the Shape tool, and press C. To change a symmetrical
node to a smooth node or a smooth node to a symmetrical node, click the node
using the Shape tool, and press S.

To manipulate a curve objects segments

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select a curve object.

3 Drag a segment until its the shape you want.
You can also
Straighten a curve segment

Click a curve segment, and click the

Convert curve to line button on the
property bar.

Curve a straight segment

Click a straight segment, and click the

Convert line to curve button on the
property bar.

Shaping objects

123

You can also

Change the direction of the curve

Click a segment, and click the Reverse

curve direction button on the property
bar.

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select a curve object.

3 Select the nodes along the curve you want to transform.
4 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:
Stretch and scale nodes
Rotate and skew nodes
5 Drag a set of handles to transform the nodes.

Shaping curve objects by using Reflect Nodes mode

Reflect Nodes mode lets you edit nodes and have the same edits take place in reverse on
corresponding nodes. For example, you can move a node to the right and have its
corresponding node move the same distance to the left.
This is useful when you want to shape curve objects and have the changes mirrored
across their left and right or top and bottom.
Usually, you will start with one curve object that is more or less symmetrical, or two
curve objects, where the second was created by mirroring the first.

To shape a curve object by using Reflect Nodes mode

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select corresponding nodes on the left and right or top and bottom. Drag to select
nodes or click a node, hold down Shift, and click each additional node.
3 On the property bar, click one of the following:
Reflect nodes vertically button
Reflect nodes horizontally button
4 Edit the nodes on one side.
124

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The changes occur in reverse on corresponding nodes on the other side.

To shape multiple objects using Reflect Nodes mode, click the first object, and
drag to select nodes; or hold down Shift, and click each node on the first object.
Then hold down Shift, click the second object, and drag to select nodes, or hold
down Shift and click each node on the second object.

Shaping objects by using envelopes

Corel DESIGNER lets you shape objects, including lines, artistic text, and paragraph
text frames by applying envelopes to them. Envelopes are made of multiple nodes that
you can move to shape the envelope and, as a result, change the shape of the object. You
can apply a basic envelope that conforms to the shape of an object, or you can apply a
preset envelope. After you apply an envelope, you can edit it, or add a new envelope to
continue changing the objects shape. The program also lets you copy and remove
envelopes.
You can edit an envelope by adding and positioning its nodes. Adding nodes gives you
more control over the shape of the object contained in the envelope. The program also
lets you delete nodes, move multiple nodes simultaneously, change nodes from one type
to another, and change a segment of an envelope to a line or curve. For more
information about the different types of nodes, see Working with curve objects on
page 119.
You can also change the mapping mode of an envelope to specify how the object fits to
the envelope. For example, you can stretch an object to fit the basic dimensions of the
envelope, and then apply the horizontal mapping mode to compress it horizontally so
that it fits the shape of the envelope.

To apply an envelope
1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Interactive envelope tool

3 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

Envelope straight line mode creates envelopes based on straight lines,
adding perspective to objects
Envelope single arc mode creates envelopes with an arc shape on one
side, giving objects a concave or convex appearance
Shaping objects

125

 Envelope double arc mode creates envelopes with an S shape on one or

more sides
Envelope unconstrained mode creates freeform envelopes that let you
change the properties of the nodes, and add and delete the nodes
4 Click the object.
5 Drag the nodes to shape the envelope.
If you want to reset the envelope, press Esc before releasing the mouse.
You can also
Apply a preset envelope

Click the Add preset button on the

property bar, and click an envelope shape in
the list.

Apply an envelope to an object with an

envelope

Click the Add new envelope button on

the property bar, and drag the nodes to
change the shape of the envelope.

Remove an envelope

Click Effects > Clear envelope.

You can prevent the objects straight lines from being converted to curves by
enabling the Keep lines button on the property bar.

To copy an envelope
1 Select an object to which you want to copy an envelope.
2 Click Effects > Copy effect > Envelope from.
3 Select the object from which you want to copy the envelope.
You can also copy an envelope by selecting an object, clicking the Copy
envelope properties button on the property bar, and selecting an object with
the envelope you want to copy.

To edit an envelopes nodes and segments

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Interactive envelope tool

2 Select an object with an envelope.

126

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

3 Double-click the envelope to add a node, or double-click a node to delete it.

You can also
Move several envelope nodes at once

Click the Envelope unconstrained mode

button on the property bar, marquee
select the nodes you want to move, and drag
any node to a new position.

Move opposing nodes an equal distance in

the same direction

Press Shift, select two opposing nodes, and

drag them to a new position.

Move opposing nodes an equal distance in

the opposite direction

Click the Envelope single arc mode

or
Envelope double arc mode
button on
the property bar so that it appears raised,
press Shift, and drag one of the nodes to a
new position.

Change an envelope node type

Click the Envelope unconstrained mode

button on the property bar so that it appears
pressed, and click the Make node a cusp
, the Make node smooth , or the
Make node symmetrical button.

Change an envelope segment to a straight

line or curve

Click the Envelope unconstrained mode

button on the property bar so that it appears
pressed, click a line segment, and click the
Convert curve to line button
or the
Convert line to curve button .

To change the mapping mode

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Interactive envelope tool

2 Click an object with an envelope.

3 On the property bar, choose one of the following from the Mapping mode list box:
Horizontal stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope
and then compresses the object horizontally to fit the shape of the envelope
Original maps the corner handles of the objects selection box to the
envelopes corner nodes. The other nodes are mapped linearly along the edge of
the objects selection box.

Shaping objects

127

 Putty maps the corner handles of the objects selection box to the envelopes
corner nodes
Vertical stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope and
then compresses the object vertically to fit the shape of the envelope
4 Drag the nodes or the nodes control points.
You cant change the mapping mode of paragraph text frames to which youve
applied an envelope.

Splitting and erasing portions of objects

You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You
can split a closed object along a straight or jagged line. Corel DESIGNER lets you
choose between splitting an object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed
of two or more subpaths. You can specify whether you want to close paths automatically
or keep them open.

The Knife tool creates two separate objects by cutting the ellipse in half. The
two objects are separated and used to form the top of the screw.

You can erase unwanted portions of bitmaps and vector objects. Erasing automatically
closes any affected paths and converts the object to curves. If you erase connecting lines,
you create subpaths rather than individual objects. You can also delete portions of
objects, called virtual line segments, that are between intersections. For example, you
can delete loops from a curved line, or you can delete interior lines from overlapping
shapes.

128

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To split an object
1 Click the Knife tool

2 Position the Knife tool over the objects outline where you want to start cutting.
The Knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly.
3 Click the outline to start cutting.
4 Position the Knife tool where you want to stop cutting, and click again.
You can also
Split an object along a freehand curve

Point to where you want to start the cut, and

drag to where you want it to end.

Split an object along a Bzier curve

Press Shift, click where you want to start

cutting an object, and click each time you
want to change the direction of the line. If
you want to constrain the line by 15-degree
increments, press Shift + Ctrl.

Split an object into two subpaths

Click the Leave as one object button

the property bar.

on

By default, objects are split into two objects and paths are automatically closed.
When you use the Knife tool on a selected object, the object becomes a curve
object.

To divide an object into equal segments

1 Select the object you want to divide.
2 Click Arrange > Shaping > Equal divide.
3 In the Shaping docker, specify the following:
Divisions number of segments to divide the object into
Gap amount of space between each segment
If you want to group the segments after the divide, enable the Group divisions
check box.
If you want the segments to be combined as one object, enable the Combine
divisions check box. Disable the check box if you want the segments to be
individual objects.
Shaping objects

129

If you do not want to delete the original object, disable the Delete selected
objects check box.
4 Click Apply.
This feature creates a copy of the object and applies the divisions to the new
object. If you do not delete the original object, you will have two objects, and
it will look as though there are no changes.
The resulting object inherits the original objects edge and fill properties.
You can divide curves, arcs, rectangles, and polygons. To divide other objects,
you must first convert them to curves. You cannot divide images.
You can select multiple objects to divide at one time. If you also enable the
Group divisions check box, all the objects that you divide are grouped into a
single group.

To break a path
To

Do the following

Break a path

Click the Shape tool . Select a node, and

click the Break curve button on the
property bar.

Extract a broken path from an object

Click the Shape tool. Right-click a path, and

click Break apart. Select a segment, node,
or group of nodes that represents the portion
of the path you want to extract, and click the
Extract subpath button on the property
bar.

To erase portions of an object

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Delete tools button, and click the Eraser tool

3 Drag over the object.

130

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Change the size of the eraser nib

Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on

the property bar, and press Enter.

Change the shape of the eraser nib

Click the Circle/square button

property bar.

Maintain all the nodes of the area being

erased

Disable the Auto-reduce on erase button

on the property bar.

on the

When you erase portions of objects, any affected paths are automatically
closed.
You can erase in straight lines by clicking where you want to start erasing, and
then clicking where you want to finish erasing. Press Ctrl if you want to
constrain the lines angle.
You can also erase an area of a selected object by double-clicking the area with
the Eraser tool.

To delete a virtual line segment

1 Click the Virtual segment delete tool

2 Move the pointer to the line segment you want to delete.

The Virtual segment delete tool snaps upright when positioned properly.
3 Click the line segment.
If you want to delete multiple line segments at one time, drag the pointer to
enclose or intersect all target segments.
The Virtual segment delete tool does not work on linked groups (like drop
shadows), text, or images.

Trimming objects
Trimming creates irregularly shaped objects by removing object areas that overlap. You
can trim almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single
Shaping objects

131

objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot trim paragraph text, dimension
lines, or masters of clones.
Before you trim objects, you must decide which object you want to trim (the target
object) and which object you want to use to perform the trimming (the source object).
For example, if you want to create a star-shaped cut out of a square object, the star is
the source object because you are using it to trim the square. The square is the target
object because its the object you want to trim. The source object trims the part of the
target object it overlaps.
The target object retains its fill and outline attributes. For example, if you trim a
rectangle that is overlapped by a circle, the area of the rectangle that was covered by the
circle is removed, creating an irregular shape.
Corel DESIGNER lets you trim objects in different ways. You can use a front object as
the source object to trim an object behind it, as well as use the back object to trim a
front object. You can also remove hidden areas of overlapping objects, so that only the
visible areas remain in the drawing. Removing the hidden areas can reduce file size when
you convert vector graphics to bitmaps.

To trim an object
1 Select the source object.
2 Click Arrange > Shaping > Trim.
3 Click Indicate target.
4 Click the object to trim.
If you want to delete objects during the trim, enable the Selected object[s] or
Target object[s] check box.

To trim front and back objects

1 Marquee select the source and target objects.
2 Click Arrange > Shaping, and click one of the following:
Back minus front removes the front object from the back one
Front minus back removes the back object from the front one
3 Click Apply.

132

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object so that the object inside
the PowerClip object will assume the new shape of the PowerClip container.
For information about PowerClip objects, see Creating PowerClip objects on
page 142.
Text on a path is converted to a curve object before it is trimmed.

To trim overlapping areas among objects

1 Marquee select the objects you want to trim.
2 Click Arrange > Shaping > Simplify.
3 Click Apply.
You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object, so that the object inside
the PowerClip object assumes the new shape.
Text on a path is converted to a curve object before it is trimmed.

Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners

You can shape an object by filleting, scalloping, or chamfering corners. Filleting
produces a rounded corner, scalloping rounds and inverts the corner to create a notch,
and chamfering bevels a corner so that it appears flat.

The cabinet doors have different styles applied to the corners. From left to right
you can see standard corners with no changes, filleted corners, scalloped corners,
and chamfered corners.
Shaping objects

133

You can fillet, scallop, or chamfer the corners of any curve object whether it
originates from a shape, lines, text, or bitmap. If you select a shape that has not been
converted to curves, a dialog box appears and gives you the option of converting the
shape automatically. Text objects must be converted to curves manually by using the
Convert to curves command. Changes apply to all corners unless you select individual
nodes. You cannot fillet, scallop, or chamfer a smooth or symmetrical curve; the corner
must be created by two lines that intersect at an angle of less than 180 degrees.
If a fillet, scallop, or chamfer value is too high, the operation is not applied to some or
all of the corners. This occurs when line segments arent long enough to apply the radius
or chamfer distance. Even if the line segments appear long enough at the beginning of
the operation, you must consider that the line segments shorten as the radius or chamfer
values are applied across the object.

In the example above, the circles represent fillet radius settings. The upper lines
show the proposed fillets on the left and the successful results on the right. The
lower lines also show the proposed fillets on the left, but the results on the right
show that not all corners are filleted. After the first fillet is applied, the next
corner cant be filleted because the line segment isnt long enough. This corner
is skipped, and the final corner is filleted.

To round object corners by filleting

1

Do one of the following:

Select an object using the Pick tool .
Select individual nodes using the Shape tool

2 Click Window > Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer.

3 In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, enable the Fillet option.
4 Type a value in the Radius box.
134

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The radius is used to create a circular arc whose center is equidistant from either
side of a corner. Higher values produce more rounded corners.

5 Click Apply.
If the object isnt a curve object, a dialog box appears to inform you that the object
will be converted to curves. Click OK to accept the changes.
The Apply button is disabled if no valid objects or nodes are selected.
If you have a square or rectangle, you can also round all the corners at once by
dragging a corner node toward the center of the object while the 2-point
rectangle tool or 3-point rectangle tool is active. The shape is not converted
to curves if you use this method.

To scallop object corners

1

Do one of the following:

Select an object by using the Pick tool .
Select individual nodes by using the Shape tool

2 Click Window > Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer.

3 In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, enable the Scallop option.
4 Type a value in the Radius box.
The radius value is measured from the original corner point to create a scalloping
arc.

5 Click Apply.
If the object isnt a curve object, a dialog box appears to inform you that the object
will be converted to curves. Click OK to accept the changes.

To bevel object corners by chamfering

1

Do one of the following:

Shaping objects

135

 Select an object by using the Pick tool .

Select individual nodes by using the Shape tool

2 Click Window > Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer.

3 In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, enable the Chamfer option.
4 In the Chamfer distance area, type a value in the A box to set where the chamfer
will begin in relation to the original corner.
If you do not want the chamfer to be equidistant from the original corner, click the
Lock button , and enter a different value in the B box. A and B values are
applied according to the direction in which the line is drawn.

5 Click Apply.
If the object is not a curve object, a dialog box appears and informs you that the
object will be converted to curves. Click OK to accept the changes.

Welding and intersecting objects

You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or
intersect almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single
objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text,
dimension lines, or masters of clones.
You can weld objects to create one object with a single outline. The new object uses the
welded objects perimeter as its outline and adopts the fill and outline properties of the
target object. All intersecting lines disappear.
You can weld objects regardless of whether they overlap each other. If you weld objects
that do not overlap, they form a weld group that acts as a single object. In both cases,
the welded object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object.
You can weld single objects with intersecting lines so that the object breaks into several
subpaths, but its appearance remains the same.
Intersecting creates an object from the area where two or more objects overlap. The
shape of this new object can be simple or complex, depending on the shapes you
intersect. The new objects fill and outline attributes depend on the object you define as
the target object.

136

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To weld an object
1 Select the source object or objects.
2 Click Arrange > Shaping > Weld.
3 Click Indicate target.
4 Click the object to weld.
If you want to delete objects during the weld, enable the Selected object[s] or
Target object[s] check box.

To intersect an object
1 Select the source object.
2 Click Arrange > Shaping > Intersect.
3 Click Indicate target.
4 Click the object to intersect with.
If you want to delete objects, enable the Selected object[s] or Target
object[s] check box.
To intersect multiple objects, marquee select the source objects.

Creating new objects from boundaries

You can draw a boundary around the outer or inner edges of complex shapes to create
a new closed curve object with the current properties (line weight, fill color, and so on).
During this process, if you specify a point outside the selected objects, an outline is
wrapped around the outside edge. If you specify a point on the inside of selected objects,
an outline is drawn around the inner edges. If the objects do not overlap, each object is
outlined separately. Error messages appear if you click directly on a line or if there is not
sufficient space to create the boundary.
Boundaries cannot be drawn around text, bitmaps, or open line endings.

To create a new object from a boundary

1 Select the objects for the boundary.
Shaping objects

137

2 Click Arrange > Shaping > Boundary.

If you want the boundary object to be placed behind the current objects, enable
Place behind selected.
3 Click Indicate boundary.
4 Click a point outside or inside the selected objects.
If you want to delete the original objects, enable Delete selected objects.

Blending objects
Corel DESIGNER lets you create blends, such as straight-line blends, blends along a
path, and compound blends.
A straight-line blend shows a progression in shape and size from one object to another.
The outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects progress along a straight-line path
across the color spectrum. The outlines of intermediate objects show a gradual
progression in thickness and shape.
After you create a blend, you can copy or clone its settings to other objects. When you
copy a blend, the object takes on all of the blend-related settings, except for the outline
and fill attributes. When you clone a blend, changes you make to the original blend
(also called the master) are applied to the clone.
You can fit objects along part or all of a paths shape, and you can add one or more
objects to a blend to create a compound blend.
You can change the appearance of a blend by adjusting the number and spacing of its
intermediate objects, the blends color progression, the nodes the blends map to, the
blends path, and the start and end objects. You can fuse the components of a split or
compound blend to create a single object.
You can also split and remove a blend.

138

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To blend objects
To

Do the following

Blend along a straight line

Click the Interactive tools button, and click

the Interactive blend tool . Select the
first object, and drag over the second object.
If you want to reset the blend, press Esc as
you drag.

Blend an object along a freehand path

Click the Interactive tools button, and click

the Interactive blend tool. Select the first
object. Hold down Alt, and drag to draw a
line to the second object.

Fit a blend to a path

Click the Interactive tools button, and click

the Interactive blend tool. Click the blend.
Click the Path properties button on the
property bar. Click New path. Using the
curved arrow, click the path to which you
want to fit the blend.

Stretch the blend over an entire path

Select a blend that is already fitted on a path.

Click the Miscellaneous blend options
button on the property bar, and enable
the Blend along full path check box.

Create a compound blend

Using the Interactive blend tool, drag from

an object to the start or end object of
another blend.

To copy or clone a blend

1 Select the two objects you want to blend.
2 Click Effects, and click one of the following:
Copy effect > Blend from
Clone effect > Blend from
3 Select the blend whose attributes you want to copy or clone.
You cant copy or clone a compound blend.

Shaping objects

139

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

1 Select a blend.
2 Click the Use steps or fixed spacing for blend button

on the property bar.

3 Type a value in the Number of steps or offset between blend shapes box on the
property bar.
4 Press Enter.
You can set object and color acceleration rates by clicking the Object and
color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the
corresponding slider.

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

1 Select a blend.
2 On the property bar, click one of the following:
Direct blend
Clockwise blend
Counterclockwise blend
You cant create color progressions using blended objects filled with bitmaps,
texture, patterns, or PostScript fills.
You can set how fast the objects colors transform from the first to the last
object by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the
property bar and moving the corresponding sliders.

To map the nodes of a blend

1 Select a blend.
2 Click the Miscellaneous blend options button

on the property bar.

3 Click the Map nodes button on the property bar.

4 Click a node on the start object and on the end object.

140

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To

Do the following

Select the start or end object

Select a blend, click the Start and end

object properties button on the
property bar, and click Show start, or Show
end.

Change the start or end object of a blend

Select a blend, click the Start and end

object properties button on the property
bar, and click New start, or New end. Click
an object outside the blend that you want to
use as the start or end of the blend.

Fuse the start or end object in a split or

compound blend

Hold down Ctrl, and click a middle object in

a blend, and then a start or end object. Click
the Miscellaneous options button on
the property bar. If you have selected the
start object, click the Fuse start button .
If you have selected the end object, click the
Fuse end button .

You can reverse the direction of the blend by clicking Arrange > Order >
Reverse order.

To change the blend path

1 Select a blend.
2 Click the Path properties button

on the property bar, and click New path.

3 Click the path you want to use for the blend.

You can also
Detach a blend from a path

Click the Path properties button on the

property bar, and click Detach from path.

Change the path of a selected freehand blend

Click the blend path with the Shape tool

and drag a paths node.

Shaping objects

141

To select the blend path, click the Path properties button, and click Show
path.

To split a blend
1 Select a blend.
2 Click the Miscellaneous options button
3 Click the Split button

on the property bar.

4 Click the intermediate object at the point where you want to split the blend.
You cant split a blend at the intermediate object that is immediately adjacent
to the start or end object.

To remove a blend
1 Select a blend.
2 Click Effects > Clear blend.
You can also remove a selected blend by clicking the Clear blend button
on the property bar.

Creating PowerClip objects

Corel DESIGNER lets you place vector objects and bitmaps, such as photos, inside
other objects, or containers. A container can be any object, for example artistic text or
a rectangle. When you place an object into a container that is larger than the container,
the object, called the content, is cropped to fit the form of the container. This creates a
PowerClip object.
You can create more complex PowerClip objects by placing one PowerClip object inside
another PowerClip object to produce a nested PowerClip object. You can also copy the
contents of one PowerClip object to another PowerClip object.
After you create a PowerClip object you can modify the content and the container. For
example, you can lock the content, so that when you move the container, the content
moves with it. This program also lets you extract the content from a PowerClip object,
so that you can delete the content or modify it without affecting the container.
142

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To create a PowerClip object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > PowerClip > Place inside container.
3 Click the object you want to use as the container.
If you want to create a nested PowerClip object, hold down the right mouse
button, drag the PowerClip object inside a container, and click PowerClip inside.

To copy the content of a PowerClip object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > Copy effect > PowerClip from.
3 Click a PowerClip object.

To edit the content of a PowerClip object

1 Select a PowerClip object.
2 Click Effects > PowerClip > Edit contents.
3 Edit the contents of the PowerClip object.
4 Click Effects > PowerClip > Finish editing this level.
While you edit, the container displays in Wireframe mode and cannot be
selected.

To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object

Right-click a PowerClip object, and click Lock Contents to PowerClip.
If you move the container while the content is unlocked, the content remains
stationary and is not visible until you move the container over it.

To extract the content of a PowerClip object

1 Select a PowerClip object.
2 Click Effects > PowerClip > Extract contents.

Shaping objects

143

You must extract the contents of each level in a nested PowerClip separately.

Reference: Shaping objects

Objects created in Corel DESIGNER follow a path that gives them their defining shape.
When this path is broken or cut, subpaths remain.
Paths and subpaths
Paths outline an objects shape and are often visible as one or more line or curve
segments. You can disconnect line segments from one another to create subpaths.
Even though they are not connected, subpaths are still part of the defining path of
the original object; however, you can extract a subpath to create two separate
objects: the extracted subpath and the object it was extracted from.
Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is
constructed. For example, a single curve object with subpaths is often created when
text is converted to curves. The letter O, for instance, is composed of two ellipses:
the outside ellipse that defines the letters shape and the inside ellipse that defines
the hole. The ellipses are subpaths that compose the single curve object, O.
One of the basic reasons for creating an object with subpaths is that you can
produce objects with holes in them. In the preceding example, you can see objects
underneath the center of the letter O.

144

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Working with symbols

Symbols are graphics that are defined once and can be referenced many times in a
drawing. Using symbols for objects that appear many times in a drawing helps to
reduce file size.
With this application, you can link to symbols that have already been created, or you
can create objects and save them as internal symbols within a document. Symbols that
you can link to are stored in library files, which have a .csl filename extension.
Each time you insert a symbol into a drawing, you create an instance of the symbol. You
can have multiple instances of a symbol in a drawing with little impact on file size.
Editing a drawing is quicker and easier, as changes made to a symbol are automatically
inherited by all instances. Symbol definitions, as well as information about instances, are
stored in the Corel DESIGNER (DES) file.
In this section, youll learn about
using symbols in drawings
managing collections and libraries
creating, editing, and deleting symbols
sharing symbols between drawings
For information about modifying symbol instances and about unsupported object types,
see Reference: Working with symbols on page 154.

Using symbols in drawings

You can insert a symbol into a drawing, which creates a symbol instance. A symbol
instance can be modified in ways which do not affect the symbol definition in the library.
For example, you can modify the size and position of a symbol instance, without
affecting the symbol definition. You can also have the symbol instance scaled
automatically to match the current drawing scale.
For a list of object properties that can be modified in a symbol instance, see Modifying
symbol instances on page 154.
Working with symbols

145

If a symbol stored in a library is changed, you can update the link to refresh the symbol
instances. Also, if a link is broken, you can fix the link. A link can become broken when
the file containing the symbol is moved or renamed. To fix the link, you can reference
any library file that contains the symbol.
You can revert a symbol instance to an object or objects while preserving its properties.
You can also delete a symbol instance, and purge unused symbol definitions. Purging
removes all symbol definitions that are not instanced in a drawing.
You use the Symbol manager docker to work with symbols.

Symbol manager docker

The preview area shows a symbol and information about it, including the
name
number of instances in the active document
type of link:
linked the symbol definition is added from a library file
internal the symbol was created in the active document or was made internal by
146

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

breaking a link
type of symbol: nested or un-nested
Just below the preview area, a tree view lets you see all linked and internal symbol
definitions in the active document, including symbols that are not instanced. You can
also navigate to symbol libraries.

To locate a symbol
1 Click Edit > Symbol > Symbol manager.
2 Click the active document at the top of the tree view to see symbols in the current
document.
Click a folder to choose a collection, and click a symbol library
symbols in a file.

to see

To insert a symbol instance

1 Click Edit > Symbol > Symbol manager.
2 Choose a symbol library

in the tree view.

3 Choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

If you want the symbol scaled automatically to match the current drawing scale,
ensure that the Scale to world units button is enabled.
4 Click the Insert symbol button.
You can also insert a symbol instance by dragging a symbol from the Symbol
manager docker to the drawing window.

To modify a symbol instance

1 Select a symbol instance.
2 Make any changes.
If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are
treated as if they were a group. You cannot modify individual objects in a
symbol instance.

Working with symbols

147

Not all properties of a symbol instance can be modified. For a list of properties
that can be modified, see Modifying symbol instances on page 154.

To update a link
1 Select a symbol in the active document.
2 Click Edit > Symbol > Update from link.
You can also click Window > Link manager and use the Link manager
docker to update links to symbols. An exclamation sign is next to objects that
need to be updated.

To fix a broken link

1 Click Window > Link manager.
2 Select a symbol with a broken link.
3 Click the Fix broken link button

4 Choose the drive and folder where the library folder that contains the symbol is
stored.
5 Click the library file name.
6 Click Open.
In the Link manager docker, an X icon

is next to objects with broken links.

To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects

1 Select a symbol instance.
2 Click Edit > Symbol > Revert to objects.
The symbol definition remains in the active document.
You can also revert a symbol instance to an object by right-clicking the symbol
instance and clicking Revert to objects.

148

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To delete a symbol instance

1 Select a symbol instance.
2 Press Delete.
The symbol definition remains in the active document.

To purge unused symbol definitions

1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document.
2 Click the Purge unused symbols button

Managing collections and libraries

Most of the symbols you will use have already been created and are stored in library files
that are grouped into collections.
The Symbol manager docker always displays libraries and collections that are in your
local Symbols folder. You can add collections and libraries to your Symbols folder from
elsewhere on the network. When you insert a local or external symbol into a drawing,
a copy of the symbol definition is added to the document but it remains linked to the
source symbol.

To add a collection or library

1 Click Window > Symbol manager.
2 In the tree, click Local Symbols or Network Symbols.
3 Click the Add library button

4 Locate and choose a collection or library.

5 Click OK.
By default, library files are referenced from their original location. If you want
to copy a library to your User Symbols folder (under Application Data for
your sign on), enable the Copy libraries locally check box.
If you are adding a collection, you can enable the Recursive check box to
include subfolders.

Working with symbols

149

To delete a collection or library

1 In the Symbol manager docker, click a collection or library.
2 Press Delete.
The collection or library is removed from the tree in the Symbol manager
docker but files are not deleted.

Creating, editing, and deleting symbols

Internal symbols can be created in three ways: by creating one on a blank drawing page,
by converting an existing object or objects to a symbol, or by making a linked symbol
an internal one by breaking its link.
You can edit an internal symbol; any changes you make affect all instances in a drawing.
Linked symbols cannot be edited within the drawing, but can be edited directly in the
library file where they are stored. You can tell whether a symbol is linked or not by
looking in the preview area of the Symbol manager docker.
If a nested symbol contains an internal definition, you can edit the internal symbol
within the drawing. External symbols in nested symbols can also be edited, but you
must first convert the external symbols to internal. For information about converting
symbols from external to internal, see To make a linked symbol internal on page 151.
You can also delete a symbol from the drawing and remove all instances.

To convert an object to a symbol

1 Select an object or multiple objects.
2 Click Edit > Symbol > New symbol.
3 Type a name for the symbol.
Symbols cannot span layers. If you convert objects on different layers to a
symbol, the objects are combined on the topmost objects layer. For more
information about layers, see Working with layers on page 225.

150

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also convert an existing object or objects to a symbol by dragging the
object or objects to the Symbol manager docker. The symbol name is
automatically added.

To make a linked symbol internal

1 Select a symbol.
2 Click Edit > Symbol > Break link.
If other instances of the symbol are in the drawing, you are given the choice to
break links to all instances. If you do, the internal symbol will then apply to all the
instances.
You can also make a linked symbol internal by right-clicking a symbol and
choosing Break link.

To edit an internal symbol

1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol
from the Symbols list.
If you want to name or rename the symbol, double-click symbols name box, and
type a name.
2 Click the Edit symbol button

3 Modify the objects on the drawing page.

4 Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing
window.
Changes made to a symbol are automatically made to all instances in the active
drawing.
You cannot add layers while in symbol edit mode.
While editing a symbol, you can insert an instance of another symbol, which
creates a nested symbol. You cannot, however, insert an instance of the same
symbol.

Working with symbols

151

To edit a linked symbol

1 Click File > Open.
2 Choose the drive and folder where the library is stored.
3 Click a library filename.
Library files have a .csl filename extension.
4 Click Open.
5 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol
from the Symbols list.
If you want to rename the symbol, click the name again, and type a new name.
6 Click the Edit symbol button

7 Modify the objects on the drawing page.

8 Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing
window.
9 Click File > Save.
You may need permission to change files on the network.

To edit a nested symbol

1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose the nested
symbol from the Symbols list.
2 Click the Edit symbol button

3 Modify the editable objects on the drawing page.

4 Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing
window.
While you are editing a nested symbol, linked symbols are uneditable.

To delete a symbol from a document

1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol
from the Symbols list.
2 Click the Delete symbol button

152

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

When you delete a symbol, it is removed from the active drawing, and all
instances of the symbol are removed from the drawing.
If the symbol is linked, its symbol definition is removed from the active
document but remains in the library file.

Sharing symbols between drawings

Symbols can be stored within a drawing or in library files. You can share symbols
between drawings by copying and pasting. Copying symbols to the Clipboard leaves the
originals in the drawing or library file.
You can also copy and paste instances of a symbol to and from the Clipboard. Pasting a
symbol instance places the symbol in the active document and also places an instance
of the symbol in the drawing. Subsequent pasting will place another instance of the
symbol in the drawing without adding to the document. Symbol instances are copied,
cut, and pasted in the same way other objects are. For more information, see Copying,
duplicating, and deleting objects on page 101.
You can export symbols from a document and create a new library file, or you can create
a symbol library from any drawing file. You can create a new library by exporting the
symbol library from a document or by saving the symbols in a drawing as a new library.
If you put the new file in a shared folder, other users will be able to use the symbols.

To copy, paste, or duplicate symbols

To

Do the following

Copy symbols to the Clipboard

In the Symbol manager docker, select the

symbol or symbols from the Symbols list,
right-click, and click Copy.

Paste symbols from the Clipboard

In the Symbol manager docker, right-click

and click Paste.

Duplicate symbols

In the Symbol manager docker, right-click

the symbol, and click Duplicate.

To export a symbol library

1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document.
Working with symbols

153

2 Click the Export library button

3 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the library file.
4 Type a filename in the Filename box.
5 Click Save.

To create a new library

1 Click File > Save.
2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the library.
3 Type a filename in the Filename box.
4 Choose CSL - Corel Symbol Library from the Save as type list box.
5 Click Save.

To add a symbol to an existing library

1 Click File > Open.
2 Choose the drive and folder where the library is stored.
3 Choose CSL - Corel Symbol Library from the Files of type list box.
4 Choose the library file where you want to add a symbol.
5 Paste a symbol to the document.
6 Save the library file.

Reference: Working with symbols

This reference section contains additional information about working with symbols.

Modifying symbol instances

The following object properties can be modified for symbol instances. If a symbol
contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated collectively as a
single object, just as if they were grouped.

154

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Property

Notes

Position

Type values in the Object(s) position boxes

on the Transform toolbar. For more
information, see Moving objects on
page 104.

Size

Type width and height values in the

Object(s) size boxes on the Transform
toolbar. For more information, see Sizing
and scaling objects on page 106.

Skew

See Skewing objects on page 109.

Rotation angle

Type a value in the Angle of rotation box on

the Transform toolbar. For more
information, see Rotating objects on
page 108.

Transparency

Uniform transparency only. Click the

Symbol tab in the Property manager
docker, and move the Transparency slider.
For more information, see Applying
transparencies on page 215.

Mirroring

See Flipping objects on page 108.

Wrap paragraph text

On the General tab in the Property

manager docker, choose a wrapping option
from the list box. See Wrapping paragraph
text around objects and text on page 267.

Order

See Changing the order of objects on

page 113.

Name

The name of an instance is displayed in the

Object manager docker. Click twice to
change it.

Unsupported object types

Most objects in Corel DESIGNER can be converted to symbols, with the following
exceptions.

Working with symbols

155

Unsupported object type

Notes

Linked or embedded objects

Objects with lenses that are not frozen

Lenses must be frozen.

Callouts
Control objects in link groups

All related objects in the link group must be

included in the symbol. For example, if an
object has a drop shadow, you cannot
convert the object without the drop shadow.

Linked bitmaps
Placed PDF or EPS files
Locked object

Object must be unlocked.

Paragraph text
Connector and dimension lines

Must be broken apart or included with the

linked object or objects

Guidelines
Rollovers

156

You cannot convert a rollover to a symbol;

however, you can include a symbol instance
in a rollover state.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Filling objects
You can add colored, patterned, textured, and other fills to the inside of objects. You
can customize a fill and set it as a default, so that each object you draw has the same
fill.
In this section, youll learn about
applying uniform fills
applying fountain fills
applying hatch fills
applying pattern fills
applying texture fills
applying PostScript texture fills
applying mesh fills
working with fills

Applying uniform fills

You can apply a uniform fill to objects. Uniform fills are solid colors you can choose or
create using color models and color palettes. For information about creating colors, see
Working with color on page 175.

To apply a uniform fill

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool
.
3 Choose Uniform fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.
4 Specify the settings you want on the property bar, and press Enter.
You can also fill a selected object by clicking a color on the color palette.
Filling objects

157

You can mix colors in a uniform fill by selecting a filled object, pressing Ctrl,
and clicking another color on the color palette.

Applying fountain fills

A fountain fill is a smooth progression of two or more colors that adds depth to an
object. There are four types of fountain fills: linear, radial, conical, and square. A linear
fountain fill flows in a straight line across the object, a conical fountain fill creates the
illusion of light hitting a cone, a radial fountain fill radiates from the center of the object,
and a square fountain fill is dispersed in concentric squares from the center of the object.
You can apply preset fountain fills, two-color fountain fills, and custom fountain fills to
objects. Custom fountain fills can contain two or more colors, which you can position
anywhere in the fills progression. After you create a custom fountain fill, you can save
it as a preset.
When you apply a fountain fill, you can specify attributes for the fill type you choose;
for example, the direction of a fills color blend, the fills angle, center point, midpoint,
and edge pad. You can also adjust the print and display quality of the fountain fill by
specifying the number of fountain steps. By default, the fountain step setting is locked
so that the print quality of the fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the
print settings and the display quality is determined by the default value you set.
However, you can unlock the fountain steps setting when you apply a fountain fill and
specify a value that applies to both the print and view quality of the fill. For information
about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see Fine-tuning print jobs on page 334.

To apply a preset fountain fill

1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

button .

, and click the Fountain fill dialog

3 Choose a fill from the Presets list box.

4 Specify the settings you want.

To apply a two-color fountain fill

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool
.
158

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

3 Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.
4 Open the Fill dropdown picker on the property bar, and click a color.
5 Open the Last fill picker on the property bar, and click a color.
6 Specify the settings you want.
You can mix colors in a two-color fountain fill by selecting one of the
interactive vector handles, pressing Ctrl, and clicking a color on the color
palette.
You can add a color to a fountain fill by dragging a color from the color palette
to an objects interactive vector handle.

To apply a custom fountain fill

1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

button .

, and click the Fountain fill dialog

3 Choose a fountain fill from the Type list box.

4 Enable the Custom option.
5 Click the box at one end of the area just above the color band, and click a color on
the color palette.
6 Click the box at the opposite end of the area just above the color band, and click a
color on the color palette.
7 Specify the attributes you want.
You can also
Add an intermediate color

Double-click between the two ends of the

area just above the color band, and click a
color on the color palette.

Change a color

Click the vector just above the color band,

and click a color on the color palette.

Delete a color

Double-click the vector just above the color

you want to delete.

Change the position of a color

Drag the vector just above the color to a new

location.

Filling objects

159

You can also

Save the fill as a preset

Type a name in the Presets box, and click

the Add preset button .

You can also create a custom fountain fill by dragging colors from the color
palette in the drawing window onto the objects interactive vector handles.

To change the fountain fill print and display quality

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool
.
3 Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.
4 Click the Fountain step lock/unlock button
in the Fountain step box, and press Enter.

on the property bar, type a value

When the Fountain step box is locked, the number of steps in the printed
fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the Print dialog box. For
information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see Fine-tuning print
jobs on page 334.

To set the display quality for fountain fills

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Display.
3 Type a value in the Preview fountain steps box.

Applying hatch fills

You can fill objects with hatch patterns to clearly distinguish materials or object
relationships in a drawing. For example, a drawing of a floor plan may use hatching to
indicate different flooring materials, or the hatching may indicate where two floors
overlap.

160

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Hatch fills can be used to indicate different materials.

Hatch fills are composed of vector-based lines. You can use preset hatch fills or edit fills
by setting different line patterns and colors for the foreground, or by changing the color
of the background. When you edit hatch fills in the Hatch fill dialog box, the changes
apply only to the currently selected object. You can also create new hatch fills and add
them to a library.
When you create new hatch fills, the currently selected fill is used as a starting point. If
no fill is selected, the default fill is used. You can add new lines, specify line style
attributes, set the position and angle for the lines, and control the spacing and offset for
each instance of a line.
You can use hatch fills on projected objects to create the illusion of a three-dimensional
image. Hatch fills use the active drawing plane.
Transforming and scaling hatch fills
Hatch fills can retain their properties independently of changes made to the object, or
they can be transformed and scaled with the object. If you choose to transform the hatch
fill with the object, only the transformations you apply from that point forward are
applied previous object transformations are not applied to the hatch fill.

Filling objects

161

The original hatch fill (left) isnt scaled with the object in the first example
(center) and is scaled with the object in the second example (right).

Aligning hatch fills

When you apply the same hatch fill to more than one object, you can retain the fill
alignment for the individual objects, or you can align the fills.

The hatch fills are aligned in the drawing on the right.

To apply a hatch fill

1 Select an object for which you want to apply or edit a hatch fill.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

, and choose Hatch fill dialog.

3 In the Hatch fill dialog box, choose a hatch fill library from the Library list box.
4 Choose a hatch fill from the Fill picker located below the Library list box.
162

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If a hatch fill is already applied to the selected object, it appears in the Fill picker.
5 Specify the attributes you want.
If you want to preview the fill on the object, click Preview.
To

Do the following

Change the line color

Choose a color from the Front color picker.

Change the background color

Choose a color from the Back color picker.

Change line spacing

In the Fill area, type a value in the Spacing

box. Larger numbers increase the distance
between lines; smaller numbers decrease the
distance.

Change line width

In the Fill area, type a value in the

Thickness box. Larger numbers increase the
line width; smaller numbers decrease the line
width. For example, typing 200% doubles
the existing line width.

Skew lines

Type a value in the Skew box to set the

degrees by which the lines are skewed.

Rotate lines

Type a value in the Rotate box to set the

degrees by which the lines are rotated.

When you edit a hatch fill in the Hatch fill dialog box, the changes are applied
only to the object selected in the drawing window. Only custom hatches
created in the New hatch from selected dialog box can be added to a library.
You can also apply a hatch fill by clicking the Fill tab of the Property
manager docker, choosing Hatch fill from the Fill type list box, and
specifying the properties you want.

To create a custom hatch fill

1 In the Hatch fill dialog box, click New hatch.
The new hatch fill is based on the current fill.

Filling objects

163

2 In the New hatch from selected dialog box, click a line to edit from the Hatch
lines list.
The selected line displays in red in the Hatch preview window. Unselected lines
display in their applied color.
3 In the Line style area, specify the attributes you want.
4 In the Line origin area, specify the following:
y-Origin lets you set the y-origin for the line. This setting is important if you
have more than one line in the hatch fill. The y-Origin value can be used to set
the spacing between different lines. For example, to ensure that a new line isnt
positioned directly over an existing line, type a new value in the y-Origin box.
x-Origin lets you set the x-origin for the line. This setting is effective when
you have more than one dashed line and you want to offset the patterns of the
different lines. It has no visible effect on standard solid lines.
5 In the Line angle box, type a value to set the angle of the line.
6 Type a value in the Shift box to offset each instance of a line.
This setting is effective when you have one dashed line and you want to stagger the
pattern. It has no visible effect on standard solid lines.
7 Type a value in the Spacing box to set the distance between each instance of the
lines.
The distance between lines is set from the path for the line, not the edge of the
outline. If the Outline width value is high and the Spacing value is low, the lines
might overlap.
8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 for each line you want to edit.
9 Click OK to return to the Hatch fill dialog box, choose a library from the Library
list box, and click Add to library.
You can also
Add lines

Click the Add button

Delete lines

In the Hatch lines list, choose a line, and

click the Delete button .

164

. When you add a

new line, it is created directly over the
previous line. Change the y-Origin value
to view the new line.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Hide or show lines in the Hatch preview
window

In the Hatch lines list, click the Eye icon

to the left of the line name. When the eye
appears closed, the line is hidden. When the
eye appears open, the line is displayed.

To scale or transform a hatch fill with an object

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

, and choose Hatch fill dialog.

3 In the Hatch fill dialog box, enable the following options:

Transform fill with object automatically transforms the hatch fill to reflect
all future transformations applied to the object
Scale line width with object automatically scales hatch lines when the
object is resized

To align hatch fills across multiple objects

1 Select one or more objects that have the same hatch fill.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

, and choose Hatch fill dialog.

3 Enable the Use world coordinates option.

Applying pattern fills

You can fill objects with two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills. A two-color
pattern fill is composed of only the two colors that you choose. A full-color pattern fill
is a more complex vector graphic that can be composed of lines and fills. A bitmap
pattern fill is a bitmap image whose complexity is determined by its size, image
resolution, and bit depth.
You are provided with preset pattern fills that you can apply to objects; however, you
can also create your own pattern fills. For example, you can create pattern fills from
objects that you draw or images that you import.
You can change the tile size of pattern fills. You can also specify exactly where these fills
begin by setting the tile origin. Tiles in a fill can also be offset. Adjusting the horizontal

Filling objects

165

or vertical position of the first pattern, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest
of the fill.
You can choose how the pattern fill appears by specifying whether to mirror the fill so
that alternating tiles are the reflections of one another. If you want a pattern fill to
change according to actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you
want it to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a
pattern that transforms, the pattern becomes larger instead of increasing the number of
tiles.

To apply a two-color pattern fill

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool
.
3 Choose Two color pattern from the Fill type list box on the property bar.
4 Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern.
5 Open the Front color picker, and click a color.
6 Open the Back color picker, and click a color.
You can also mix colors in a two-color pattern fill by pressing Ctrl and clicking
a color on the color palette.
You can mix a color with only one of the colors in the fill by pressing Ctrl and
dragging a color to the interactive handle.

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool
.
3 Choose one of the following from the Fill type list box on the property bar:
Full-color pattern
Bitmap pattern
4 Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern.

166

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To create a two-color pattern fill

1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

button .

, and click the Pattern fill dialog

3 Enable the 2-color option.

4 Open the following color pickers, and click a color:
Front to choose a foreground color
Back to choose a background color
5 Click Create.
6 In the Two-color pattern editor dialog box, enable one of the following options in
the Bitmap size area:
16 X 16 changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 16 x 16 squares
32 X 32 changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 32 x 32 squares
64 X 64 changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 64 x 64 squares
7 In the Pen size area, enable one of the following options:
1 X 1 changes the pen size to a 1-grid square
2 X 2 changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square
4 X 4 changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square
8 X 8 changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square
8 Click in the grid to enable a square. If you want to disable a square, right-click the
square.
Squares that are enabled form the foreground, and squares that are disabled form
the background.
You can also create a foreground pattern by dragging in the grid.

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

1 Click Tools > Create > Pattern.
2 Enable the Two-color option.
3 In the Resolution area, enable one of the following options:
Low creates a low-resolution, two-color pattern
Medium creates a medium-resolution, two-color pattern
High creates a high-resolution, two-color pattern
4 Click OK.
Filling objects

167

5 Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern.

To create a full-color pattern from an image

1 Click Tools > Create > Pattern.
2 Enable the Full color option.
3 Click OK.
4 Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern.
5 In the Create pattern dialog box, click OK.
6 Type a filename for the pattern in the File name box.

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

button .

, and click the Pattern fill dialog

3 Enable one of the following options:

2-color
Full-color
Bitmap
4 Click Load.
5 In the Import dialog box, locate the image you want to use, and double-click the
filename.

To change the size of pattern tiles

1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

button .

, and click the Pattern fill dialog

3 Enable one of the following options:

2-color
Full-color
Bitmap
4 Type a value in any of the following boxes:
Width lets you change the width of a pattern tile
Height lets you change the height of a pattern tile
168

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Set the tile origin of a pattern fill

Type values in the X and Y boxes in the

Origin area.

Offset the tile origin of a pattern fill

Enable the Row or Column option, and

type a value in the % of tile size box.

Rotate a pattern fill

Type a value in the Rotate box.

Skew a pattern fill

Type a value in the Skew box.

Mirror a pattern fill

Enable the Mirror fill check box.

Transform a pattern fill with the object

Enable the Transform fill with object

check box.

You can also change the size of pattern tiles by clicking the Interactive fill
tools button, clicking the Interactive fountain fill tool , selecting an
object, and clicking the Small tile for pattern, Medium tile for pattern, or
Large tile for pattern button on the property bar.
You can skew or rotate tiles by clicking the Interactive fill tools button,
clicking the Interactive fountain fill tool , selecting an object, and
dragging the skewing or rotation handles to change the appearance of the
pattern.

Applying texture fills

A texture fill is a randomly generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural
appearance. Corel DESIGNER provides preset textures, and each texture has a set of
options that you can change. You can use colors from any color model or palette to
customize texture fills. Texture fills can hold only RGB colors; however, other color
models and palettes can be used as a reference to select colors. For information about
color models, see Understanding color models on page 184.
You can change the tile size of texture fills. Increasing the resolution of a texture tile
increases the accuracy of the fill. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by
setting the tile origin. Tiles in a fill can also be offset. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical
position of the first tile, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill.

Filling objects

169

You can rotate, skew, adjust the tile size, and change the center of the texture to create
a custom fill.
If you want a texture fill to change according to the actions you perform on the filled
object, you can specify that you want the fill to transform with the object. For example,
if you enlarge an object filled with a texture that transforms, the texture becomes larger
instead of increasing the number of tiles.
Texture fills are powerful features that can enhance a drawing. However, they also
increase the size of a file and the time it takes to print, so you may want to use them in
moderation.

To apply a texture fill

1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

button .

, and click the Texture fill dialog

3 Choose a texture library from the Texture library list box.

4 Choose a texture from the Texture list.
You can also
Create a custom texture fill

Specify the settings you want in the Style

name area.

Change the size of texture tiles

Click Tiling, and type values in the Width

and Height boxes.

Set the tile origin of a texture fill

Click Tiling, and type values in the X and Y

boxes in the Origin area.

Offset the tile origin of a texture fill

Click Tiling, and enable the Row or

Column option. Type an amount of offset in
the % of tile size box.

Rotate a texture fill

Click Tiling, and type a value in the Rotate

box.

Skew a texture fill

Click Tiling, and type a value in the Skew

box.

Mirror a texture fill

Click Tiling, and enable the Mirror fill

check box.

170

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can modify the texture you choose from the texture library and save it to
another library, but you cannot save textures to or overwrite textures in the
texture library.
You can save a custom texture fill by clicking the plus sign (+) in the Texture
fill dialog box, and typing a name in the Texture name box.

Applying PostScript texture fills

You can apply PostScript texture fills to objects. A PostScript texture fill is created using
the PostScript language. Some textures are very complex, and large objects that contain
PostScript texture fills may take time to print or to update on the screen. Depending on
the view mode you are using, the letters PS may display rather than the fill. For more
information about displaying PostScript fills, see Working with views on page 38.
When you apply a PostScript texture fill, you can change several parameters, such as
the size, line width, and the amount of gray that appears in the textures foreground and
background.

To apply a PostScript texture fill

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool
.
3 Choose PostScript fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.
4 Choose a PostScript fill from the PostScript fill textures list box.
If you want to change the fills parameters, click the Edit fill button
property bar, and specify the settings you want.

on the

Applying mesh fills

When you fill an object with a mesh fill, you can create unique effects. For example, you
can create smooth color transitions in any direction without having to create blends or
contours.

Filling objects

171

When you apply a mesh fill, you specify the number of columns and rows in the grid,
and you specify the grids intersecting points.
After you have created a mesh object, you can edit the mesh fill grid by adding and
removing nodes or intersections. You can also remove the mesh.
A mesh fill can be applied only to closed objects or a single path. If you want to apply
a mesh fill to a complex object, you must first create a mesh-filled object and combine
it with the complex object to form a PowerClip object. For more information about
working with PowerClip objects, see Creating PowerClip objects on page 142.
You can add color to a patch of a mesh fill and to the individual intersection nodes. You
can also choose to mix colors for a more blended appearance.

To apply a mesh fill to an object

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive mesh fill tool

3 Type the number of columns in the top portion of the Grid size box on the
property bar.
4 Type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the Grid size box on the
property bar, and press Enter.
5 Adjust the grid nodes on the object.
You can also
Add an intersection

Click once within a grid, and click the Add

on the property bar.
intersection button

Add a node

Hold down Shift, and double-click where

you want to add the node.

Remove a node or an intersection

Click a node, and click the Delete node(s)

on the property bar.
button

Shape the mesh fill

Drag a node to a new location.

Remove the mesh fill

Click the Clear mesh button

property bar.

172

on the

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If the mesh object contains color, adjusting the intersection nodes of the mesh
affects how the colors blend together.
You can also marquee select or freehand marquee select nodes to shape an
entire area of the mesh.
You can add an intersection by double-clicking in a space, or you can add a
single line by double-clicking a line.

To add color to a patch in a mesh fill

1 Select a mesh-filled object.
2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive mesh fill tool

3 Drag a color from the color palette to a patch in the object.

You can also
Color an intersection node in a mesh fill

Click an intersection node, and click a color

on the color palette.

Mix a color in a mesh fill

Select part of the mesh, press Ctrl, and click

a color on the color palette.

You can also drag a color from the color palette to an intersection node.
You can also freehand marquee select nodes to apply a color to an entire area
of the mesh.

Working with fills

There are a number of tasks that are common to all types of fills. You can choose a
default fill color so that every object you add to a drawing has the same fill. You can also
remove any fill, copy it to another object, or use it to fill an area surrounded by an open
curve.

To choose a default fill color

1 Click a blank area on the drawing page to deselect all objects.

Filling objects

173

2 Click any rectangle or circle tool.

3 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout
.

, and click the Fill color dialog button

4 Specify any fill settings.

You can also choose a default fill color by dragging a color from the color
palette to a blank area in the drawing window.

To remove a fill
1 Select an object using the Pick tool

2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout

, and click the No fill button

To copy a fill to another object

1 Using the Pick tool

, select the object that has the fill you want to copy.

2 Right-click the object, and drag over the object you want to fill.
A blue outline of the original object follows the cursor to the new object.
3 Release the mouse button, and choose Copy fill here from the context menu.
For more information about copying object properties, see Copying object
properties, transformations, and effects on page 102.

To show fills in open curves

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click General.
3 Enable the Fill open curves check box.

174

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Working with color

Your application lets you choose and create colors using a wide variety of industrystandard palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can create and edit custom color
palettes to store frequently used colors for future use.
You can also customize how color palettes display on your screen by changing the size
of swatches, the number of rows in palettes, and other properties.
In this section, youll learn about
choosing colors
creating custom color palettes
opening and editing custom color palettes
setting color palette properties
understanding color models

Choosing colors
You can choose fill and outline colors using fixed or custom color palettes, color viewers,
color harmonies, or color blends.
For information about applying the colors you choose, see Applying uniform fills on
page 157 and Formatting lines and outlines on page 73.
When you want to use a color that already exists in an object or document, you can
sample the color to achieve an exact match. You can even sample a color from the
desktop.
Choosing a color by using the default color palette
A palette is a collection of color swatches. You can choose fill and outline colors using
the default palette, which contains 90 colors from the CMYK color model. The selected
fill and outline colors display in the color swatches on the property bar.

Working with color

175

Choosing a color by using fixed or custom color palettes

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers. Some examples of these
are PANTONE, HKS Colors, and TRUMATCH. It may be useful to have on hand
a manufacturers swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows exactly
what each color looks like when printed.
Some fixed color palettes PANTONE, HKS Colors, Toyo COLOR FINDER, DIC,
Focoltone, and SpectraMaster are collections of spot colors. If you create color
separations when you print, each color from these color palettes requires a separate
printing plate. This can significantly affect the cost of your print job. If you want to use
these colors, but you dont want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process
colors when printing.
Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette.
You can save a custom color palette for future use. For more information about working
with custom color palettes, see Creating custom color palettes on page 180 and
Opening and editing custom color palettes on page 181.
Choosing a color by using color viewers
Color viewers give a representation of a range of colors using either one-dimensional or
three-dimensional shapes. The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model,
but you can use this viewer to choose CMYK, CMY, or RGB colors. For information
about color models, see Understanding color models on page 184.
Choosing a color by using color harmonies
Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape, such as a rectangle or a triangle, over
a color wheel. Each vertical row in the color grid begins with the color located at one of
the points on the superimposed shape.
The colors at each corner of the shape are always complementary, contrasting, or
harmonious, depending on the shape you choose. The color harmonies allow you to
choose the color model you prefer to use, and are most useful when youre choosing
several colors for a project.
Choosing a color by using color blends
When you choose a color using color blends, you combine base colors to get the color
you want. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from the four base
colors you choose.

176

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To choose a color by using the default color palette

To

Do the following

Choose a fill color for a selected object

Click a color swatch.

Choose an outline color for a selected object

Right-click a color swatch.

Choose from different shades of a color

Click and hold a color swatch to display a

pop-up color picker, and click a color.

View more colors in the default color palette

Click the scroll arrows at the top and bottom

of the color palette.

You can display color names by pointing to a swatch.

To choose a color by using a fixed or custom color palette

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill button
from the list box.

, and then choose Fill color dialog

3 Click the Palettes tab.

4 Choose a fixed or custom palette from the Palette list box.
5 Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.
6 Click a color in the color selection area.
Each color swatch on a fixed color palette is marked with a small white square.
You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will
be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more
accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for
the final output. For more information about reproducing colors accurately, see
Managing color for display, input, and output on page 187.
You can display or hide the names of fixed or custom colors by clicking
Options > Show color names.

Working with color

177

You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which
has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options > Swap
colors.

To choose a color by using a color viewer

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill button
from the list box.

, and then choose Fill color dialog

3 Click the Models tab.

4 Choose a color model from the Model list box.
5 Click Options > Color viewers, and click a color viewer.
6 Move the color slider.
7 Click a color in the color selection area.
If you choose a color that is out of the printers gamut, Corel DESIGNER
displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference
area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this
closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For
information about color correction, see Managing color for display, input, and
output on page 187.
You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will
be consistent, and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more
accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for
the final output.
You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which
has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options > Swap
colors.

To choose a color by using color harmonies

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill button
from the list box.

, and then choose Fill color dialog

3 Click the Mixers tab.

178

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

4 Click Options > Mixers > Color harmonies.

5 Choose a shape from the Hues list box.
6 Choose an option from the Variation list box.
7 Drag the black dot on the color wheel.
8 Click a color swatch on the color palette below the color wheel.
If you choose a color that is out of the printers gamut, Corel DESIGNER
displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference
area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this
closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For
information about color correction, see Managing color for display, input, and
output on page 187.
You can change the number of swatches in the color grid by dragging the Size
slider.
You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which
has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options > Swap
colors.

To choose a color by using color blends

1 Select an object.
2 On the property bar, click the Fill button
from the list box.

, and then choose Fill color dialog

3 Click the Mixers tab.

4 Click Options > Mixers > Color blend.
5 Open each color picker, and click a color.
6 Click a color in the color selection area.
You can only blend colors that are in the default color palette. If you want to
blend other colors, change the default color palette. For information, see To
open a custom color palette on page 181.
You can change the cell size of the color grid by moving the Size slider.
Working with color

179

You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which
has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options > Swap
colors.

To sample a color
1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Eyedropper tool

2 One the property bar, choose Sample color from the list box.
3 Click Sample size and enable an option.
If you want to sample a color outside the drawing window, click Select from
Desktop.
4 Click the color you want to sample.
5 Click the Paintbucket tool

6 In the drawing window, click the object to which you want to apply the color.
The cursor changes as you hover over an area to indicate whether an outline or fill
area is chosen. For example, as you hover over the center of a square, the cursor
displays a solid color swatch; as you hover over the outline of the square, the cursor
displays an outline shape.

Creating custom color palettes

Custom color palettes are collections of colors that you save. A number of preset custom
color palettes are available; however, you can create color palettes from scratch. Custom
color palettes are useful when you frequently choose the same colors, or when you want
to work with a set of colors that look good together.
When you create a custom color palette, the color palette is empty; however, you can
edit it by adding the colors you want to include, as well as changing, deleting, sorting,
and renaming colors.
You can create a custom color palette by choosing each color manually or by using colors
in an object or an entire document.

To create a custom color palette

1 Click Window > Color palettes > Palette editor.
2 Click New palette

180

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

3 Type a filename.
4 Click Save.

To create a color palette from an object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Window > Color palettes > Create palette from selection.
3 Type a filename.
4 Click Save.

To create a color palette from a document

1 Click Window > Color palettes > Create palette from document.
2 Type a filename.
3 Click Save.

Opening and editing custom color palettes

You can open a custom color palette, and you can set it as the default color palette. For
more information about customizing color palettes, see Setting color palette
properties on page 182.

To open a custom color palette

1 Click Window > Color palettes > Open palette.
2 Choose the folder where the custom color palette is stored.
Custom color palettes are saved to your user profile folder by default.
3 Double-click the filename.
If you want to set the opened custom color palette as the default palette, right-click
anywhere on the edge of the color palette border, and click Set as default.
You can close a custom color palette by right-clicking the edge of the color
palette and then clicking Palette > Close.

Working with color

181

To edit a custom color palette

1 Click Window > Color palettes > Palette editor.
2 Choose a palette from the list box.
3 Modify any colors.
To

Do the following

Add a color

Click Add color. Click a color in the color

selection area, and click Add to palette.

Change a color

In the color selection area, click the color

that you want to change, click Edit color,
and click the new color in the color selection
area.

Delete a color

Click a color in the color selection area, and

click Delete color.

Sort colors

Click Sort colors, and click a color sorting

method.

Rename a color

Click a color in the color selection area, and

type a color name in the Name box.

You can delete multiple colors from a custom color palette by holding down
Shift or Ctrl, and clicking in the color selection area.

Setting color palette properties

Your application offers you the option of customizing color palettes.
Color palettes can be either docked or floating. Docking a color palette attaches it to
the edge of the application window. Undocking a color palette pulls it away from the
edge of the application window so that it floats and can be easily moved around.
You can set the right mouse button action for color swatches either to display a context
menu or to set the outline color. You can also adjust the color swatch border and size,
and you can hide or display the No Color well .

182

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To dock or undock a color palette

To

Do the following

Dock a color palette

Click the top of the color palette border, and

drag the color palette to any edge of the
application window until a thin black
toolbar outline displays.

Undock a color palette

Click the color palette border, and drag the

color palette away from the edge of the
application window.

Change the number of rows on a docked

color palette

Click Tools > Customization. In the

Customization list of categories, click
Color palette. Type a value in the
Maximum palette rows when docked box.

You can set a maximum of seven rows in a color palette.

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.
3 Enable one of the following check boxes:
Context menu
Set outline color
If you enable Set outline color, you can still display the context menu by
right-clicking anywhere on the border of a color palette.

To customize the color swatches

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.
3 Enable or disable any of the following check boxes:
Wide borders
Large swatches
Show No Color well
Working with color

183

Understanding color models

You need a precise method to define colors. Color models provide various methods of
defining colors, and when creating graphics, you can choose from a range of color
models.
CMYK color model
The CMYK color model uses the following components to define color:
cyan (C)
magenta (M)
yellow (Y)
black (K)
The cyan, magenta, yellow, and black components are the amounts of cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black ink that a CMYK color contains and are measured as percentages.
The CMYK color model is a subtractive color model. Subtractive color models use
reflected light to display color. The CMYK color model is used to produce printed
materials. When you combine cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, so that the value of
each component is 100, the result is black. When the value of each component is 0, the
result is pure white.
RGB color model
The RGB color model uses the following components to define color:
red (R)
green (G)
blue (B)
The red, green, and blue components are the amounts of red, green, and blue light that
an RGB color contains and are measured in values ranging from 0 to 255.
The RGB color model is an additive color model. Additive color models use transmitted
light to display color. Monitors use the RGB color model. When you add red light, blue
light, and green light together, so that the value of each component is 255, the color
white displays. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure black.
HSB color model
The HSB color model uses the following components to define color:
hue (H)
saturation (S)
184

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 brightness (B)
Hue describes the pigment of a color and is measured in degrees from 0 to 359 (for
example, 0 degrees is red; 60 degrees, yellow; 120 degrees, green; 180 degrees, cyan;
240 degrees, blue; and 300 degrees, magenta). Saturation describes the vividness or
dullness of a color and is measured as a percentage (the higher the percentage, the more
vivid the color). Brightness describes the amount of white that the color contains and is
measured as a percentage (the higher the percentage, the brighter the color).
Grayscale color model
The Grayscale color model uses only one component, lightness, to define color, and is
measured in values ranging from 0 to 255. Each Grayscale color has equal values of the
red, green, and blue components of the RGB color model.

Working with color

185

Managing color for

display, input, and output
In this section, youll learn about
the Color management dialog box
working with color profiles
choosing advanced color management settings
correcting colors for display

Understanding the Color management dialog box

Color management is the process of matching colors between devices, such as scanners,
digital cameras, printers, and monitors. Your application features color management
controls designed to help you achieve the best possible color matches.
The Color management dialog box, with its default settings, looks like this:

You can activate the following visual elements:

Scanner/digital camera icon
Separations printer icon
Monitor icon
Managing color for display, input, and output

187

 Composite printer icon

Import/export icon
Internal RGB icon
Arrows
You can click the Monitor icon, the Import/export icon, the Internal RGB icon, and
the Arrows to choose color management options and advanced settings.
You can click the caption text under the icons to choose color profiles for each device.
You can also get other color profiles from the application CD or online. For more
information, see Working with color profiles on page 189. To help you choose the
appropriate profile, check the manufacturers documentation for a device.
In addition, you can click the arrows between device icons to turn the color profiles on
or off. The arrows appear orange when on, and grayed and broken when off. You can
use the arrows to correct colors between devices and control how colors are displayed.
The following table contains descriptions of what happens when an arrow is on or off.
When a device is corrected for color, at least two profiles are used one for each device.
For example, if the printer colors are being corrected with Internal RGB, both the
Internal RGB and printer profiles are used. If you use simulation to display colors on
your monitor as they are printed, three profiles are used: the Internal RGB, printer, and
monitor profiles.
Convention

Description

Examples

From the Scanner/digital

camera to Internal RGB

The scanner/digital camera

profile and the Internal RGB
profiles are used for color
correction.

The profiles are not used.

From Internal RGB to the

Monitor

Colors are calibrated for

display using the Internal
RGB and monitor color
profiles.

The profile is not used.

From Internal RGB to the

Composite printer

The printer and Internal

RGB profile are used for
color correction.

The profile is not used.

188

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Convention

Description

Examples

From the Composite

printer to the Monitor

The monitor simulates a

composite printer output.

The monitor does not

simulate a composite printer
output.

From Internal RGB to the

Separations printer

The separations printer and

RGB profiles are used for
color correction.

The profile is not used. You

can override this setting in
the Print dialog box.

From the Separations

printer to the Monitor

The monitor simulates

output from the color
separations printer.

The monitor does not

simulate output from the
color separations printer.

From the Separations

printer to the Composite
printer

The composite printer

simulates separations printer
display.

The composite printer does

not simulate separations
printer display.

From Internal RGB to

Import/Export

Internal RGB profiles are

embedded.

ICC profiles are not

embedded.

From Import/Export to
Internal RGB

Embedded ICC profiles are

used.

ICC profiles are ignored.

Working with color profiles

A color management system helps you achieve accurate colors across a variety of devices
consistently. The first stage in setting up your color management system is to choose
color profiles for your monitor and each of the devices you use, such as scanners, digital
cameras, and printers.
Understanding color management
Each device has a range of colors, or color space, that it uses. For example, a monitor
displays a different set of colors than a printer reproduces. So, you may see some colors
on the screen that cannot be printed.
You can use a color management system to translate colors from one device to another.
Color profiles define the color space for your monitor and for the input and output
devices you use.
For more information about using color management in your application, see
Understanding the Color management dialog box on page 187.
Managing color for display, input, and output

189

Choosing color profiles

Different brands and models of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, and printers have
different color spaces and thus require different color profiles. Some widely used profiles
are installed with your application.
Standard ICC (International Color Consortium) color profiles are used in your
application. You can choose color profiles for the following:
monitor
scanner/digital camera
composite printer
separations printer
internal RGB color space
Obtaining additional color profiles
If you need additional profiles or updates, you can get them from the application CD,
or you can download them.

To choose a color profile

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Click a profile name under one of the following icons:
Scanner/digital camera
Separations printer
Monitor
Composite printer
Internal RGB
3 Choose a profile from the list box.
By default, color profiles are stored in the applications Color folder.
You can access other color profiles. For more information, see To copy a color
profile from a CD or network on page 191 and To download a color profile
on page 191.

190

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To copy a color profile from a CD or network

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Get profile from
disk.
3 Insert the application CD.
4 In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose the folder where the profiles are
located.
You may want to load color profiles that you have stored on a network or on your
hard disk.
5 In the Install from disk dialog box, choose the color profile you want to copy.
6 Click Choose.

To download a color profile

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Download profiles.
3 In the dialog box, enable the check box for each profile you want to download.
4 Click Download.

Choosing advanced color management settings

Once you choose color profiles, the color management system uses a Color Matching
Module (CMM) to match colors between devices as closely as possible.Your application
uses the Kodak Color Management System by default. You can also choose different
rendering intents, which control how the color management system converts colors
between different color spaces.
When you import or export graphics, you can embed, or attach, color profiles. By
embedding a color profile, you can ensure color integrity; anyone viewing or printing
your work will use the same colors that you used.
By enabling the gamut alarm, you can preview which on-screen colors cannot be
printed. The colors that cannot be reproduced are highlighted.
By enabling the gamut alarm, you can preview which on-screen colors cannot be
printed. The colors that cannot be reproduced are highlighted.

Managing color for display, input, and output

191

There are advanced settings for separations and composite printers; you can link a color
profile to a specific printer.
Using color styles, you can choose to turn color management off or to optimize the color
display.

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Click on the Internal RGB

3 In the Advanced settings dialog box, from the Rendering intent list box, choose
one of the following:
Absolute colorimetric preserves the white point throughout conversion
Automatic default setting, which uses saturation for vector graphics and
perceptual for bitmaps
Perceptual good for a variety of images, especially bitmaps and photographic
images
Relative colorimetric good for producing proofs on inkjet printers
Saturation good for vector graphics (lines, text, and solid colored objects)
4 Choose an option from the Color engine list box.
The Microsoft ICM 2.0 Color Matching Module (CMM) is not available for
Windows NT 4.0.

To embed color profiles

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Click the Import/export icon

3 In the Import area, enable one of the following options:

Use embedded ICC profile
Always convert using
Ignore embedded ICC profile
4 In the Export area, enable one of the following options:
Embed internal RGB profile
Always embed using
Do not embed ICC profiles

192

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

When you enable the Always convert using import options, as well as the
Always embed using export option, you can choose a profile from the list box.
This may not be the same profile that was used to create the image when you
saved it.
When you enable the Embed internal RGB profile or the Always embed
using export options, certain file formats are exported with an embedded ICC
profile. These file formats are: TIFF, encapsulated PostScript (EPS),
Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT), CorelDRAW (CDR), Corel DESIGNER
(DES), JPEG, Portable Document Format (PDF), and Adobe Photoshop
(PSD).

To enable the gamut alarm

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Click the Monitor icon

3 Enable the Highlight display colors out of printer gamut check box.
If you want to show CMYK in percentages, enable the Show CMYK in
percentages check box.
You can map spot colors into CMYK gamut by enabling the Map spot colors
into CMYK gamut check box.
You can change the warning color of the gamut alarm by opening the
Warning color picker and choosing a color.

To choose advanced printer settings

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Click one of the following icons:
Composite printer
Separations printer
3 Choose a setting from the list box.
If you choose an advanced setting, that setting overrides the profile that
displays under the printer icon in the Color management dialog box.
Managing color for display, input, and output

193

To use color management styles

1 Click Tools > Color management.
2 Choose one of the following from the Style list box:
Color management off
Default settings
Optimized for desktop printing
Optimized for professional output
Optimized for the Web
Some color management settings, such as Default, Optimized for desktop
printing, and Optimized for professional output, can result in on-screen
colors appearing dull. This is due to an on-screen printer simulation of the
output. For more information, see Correcting colors for display on page 194.
You can add or delete a color management style by clicking the Add preset
or Remove preset buttons.

Correcting colors for display

You can correct colors so that they display as accurately as possible on screen. If you
correct only the display colors, the colors are shown according to the internal RGB and
monitor color profiles.
If you display colors as they will print, on-screen colors simulate output using the
Internal RGB, monitor, and printer color profiles. Simulating printer output may cause
on-screen colors to appear dull.

To correct colors for display

Click Tools > Color management.
To

Do the following

Correct display colors

Click the arrow from the Internal RGB

icon to the Monitor icon

194

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Display simulation of a composite printer

output

Click the arrow from the Composite

Display simulation of a color separations

printer output

Click the arrow from the Separations

Display simulation of a separations printer

on a composite printer

printer icon

printer icon

to the Monitor icon

to the Monitor icon

Click the arrow from the Separations

printer icon
icon

to the Composite printer

Arrows appear orange when they are turned on, and grayed and broken when
they are turned off. For more information about using the arrows for color
correction, see Understanding the Color management dialog box on
page 187.
The display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer does not
affect output.

Managing color for display, input, and output

195

Working with color styles

The Corel DESIGNER application lets you create and edit color styles in drawings.
In this section, youll learn about
creating and applying color styles
editing and sorting color styles
moving and copying color styles

Creating and applying color styles

A color style is a color you save and apply to objects in a drawing. Since an infinite
number of colors are available in Corel DESIGNER, color styles can make it easier to
apply the exact color you want.
When you create a color style, the new style is saved to the active drawing. After you
create a color style, you can apply it to objects in the drawing. You can also delete color
styles if you no longer require them.
One powerful feature of color styles is that you can create a shade or series of shades
based on a color style. The original color style is referred to as the parent color, and
the shades are referred to as child colors. For most of the available color models and
palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent color but have different saturation
and brightness levels. With the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, PANTONE
Hexachrome, and Custom spot color palettes, child and parent colors are linked to
one another but have different tint levels.
Corel DESIGNER has an Auto-create feature for creating color styles from selected
objects. When you create color styles from an object, the color style is automatically
applied to that object so that if you decide to change a color style, the objects related
color will also be updated.
When you use the Auto-create feature, you can choose to create few or many parent
color styles. After you have converted all colors in an object to color styles, you can, for

Working with color styles

197

example, use one parent color to control all red objects, or many parents, one for each
shade of red in the drawing.
When creating child colors, colors added from a color-matching system are converted
to the parent colors color model so that they can be grouped into appropriate parentchild groups automatically.

To create a color style

1 Click Window > Color styles.
2 In the Color styles docker, click the New color style button

3 Select a color from the New color style dialog box.

You can also
Apply a color style

Select an object, and double-click the name

of the style you want to apply in the Color
styles docker.

Delete a color style

Right-click the color style in the Color

styles docker, and click Delete.

You can also create a color style from an object or the color palette by dragging
a color to the Color styles docker.
You can also apply a color style to an object by dragging a color from the Color
styles docker.

To create a child color

1 Click Window > Color styles.
2 In the Color styles docker, choose the color style to which you want to link a child
color.
3 Click the New child color(s) button

4 In the Create a new child color dialog box, specify the settings you want.
5 Type a name in the Color name box.

To create a series of child colors

1 Click Window > Color styles.
198

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 In the Color styles docker, choose the color style to which you want to link a child
color.
3 Click the New child color(s) button.
4 In the Number of shades area, type a value in the Create box.
5 Enable one of the following options:
Lighter shades creates child colors that are lighter than the parent
Darker shades creates child colors that are darker than the parent
Both creates an equal number of light and dark child colors
6 Adjust the Shade similarity slider.
Move the slider to the left to create very different shades; move the slider to the
right to create very similar shades.
You can also create a series of child colors by right-clicking a color style and
clicking Create a child color.

To create parent and child colors from an object

1 Click Window > Color styles.
2 Select an object or a group of objects.
3 In the Color styles docker, click the Auto create color styles button

4 Enable any of the following check boxes:

Use fill colors
Use outline colors
If you want to link similar colors together under their appropriate parent colors,
enable the Automatically link similar colors together check box.
5 Click the Convert child palette colors to CMYK check box.
If you want to convert colors added from a color-matching system to CMYK so
that they can be grouped under an appropriate parent color, enable this check box.
If you want these colors to represent separate color styles, disable the check box.
If you enable the Automatically link similar colors check box, move the
Parent creation index slider to determine the number of parent colors
created. To test different slider values, click Preview.

Working with color styles

199

Editing and sorting color styles

You can edit both parent and child colors in Corel DESIGNER. When you change the
hue of a parent color, all of its child colors are updated, based on the new hue and the
original saturation and brightness values. For color styles using the PANTONE
MATCHING SYSTEM, PANTONE Hexachrome, and Custom spot color palettes, if
you change the color of a parent, all child colors are updated, based on the new color
and the original tint.
If you want to change the color of the object later, you can edit the parent color, and
Corel DESIGNER will automatically adjust the child colors. For example, if you change
a parent color from red to yellow, the application converts the child colors of the red
parent to shades of yellow.
Sorting color styles allows you to locate a style in less time. Instead of having color styles
appearing randomly in a list, you can sort color styles alphabetically by name, or you
can have all parent colors with child colors listed first.

To edit a parent or child color

1 Click Window > Color styles.
2 In the Color styles docker, choose the parent or child color you want to edit.
3 Click the Edit color style button

4 Select a color from either of the following dialog boxes:

Edit color style for parent colors
Edit child color for child colors
You can also
Rename a color style

Right-click a color style, click Rename, type

a new name for the color, and press Enter.

Sort colors by name

Click Window > Color styles, right-click

the folder whose color styles you want to
sort, and click Sort > By names.

Sort by links

Click Window > Color styles, right-click

the folder whose color styles you want to
sort, and click Sort > By color styles with
children.

200

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also edit a parent or child color by right-clicking the color and clicking
Edit color.
You can also rename a color style by clicking the color style, pausing, clicking
the color style a second time, typing the new name, and pressing Enter.

Moving and copying color styles

You can move a child color from one parent to another. The child color will change color
based on the new hue and the original saturation, brightness, or tint levels. You can also
copy color styles from one drawing to another.

To move a child color

1 Click Window > Color styles.
2 In the Color styles docker, drag the child color under another parent color using
the Pick tool .
The parent color to which you are moving the child color must already have at
least one child color.

To copy a color style from one drawing to another

1 Open the drawing with the color style you want to copy.
2 Open the drawing to which you want to copy the style.
3 Click Window > Color styles.
4 In the Color styles docker, drag the color style to another drawing folder.

Working with color styles

201

Adding three-dimensional
effects to objects
You can create the illusion of three-dimensional depth in objects by adding contour,
perspective, extrusion, or drop shadow effects.
In this section, youll learn about
contouring objects
applying perspective to objects
creating vector extrusions
creating drop shadows

Contouring objects
You can contour an object to create a series of concentric lines that progress to the inside
or outside of the object. Corel DESIGNER also lets you set the number and distance of
the contour lines.
After contouring an object, you can copy or clone its contour settings to another object.
With cloning, any changes you make to the master object are automatically applied to
its clones.
You can also change the colors of the fill between the contour lines and the contour
outlines themselves. You can set a color progression in the contour effect, where one
color blends into another. The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or
counterclockwise path through the color range of your choice.

To contour an object
1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool

2 Click an object or a set of grouped objects, and drag the start handle toward the
center to create an inside contour.
3 Move the object slider to change the number of contour steps.

Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

203

You can also

Specify the number of contour lines

Click the Inside button on the property

bar, and type a value in the Contour steps
box on the property bar.

Specify the distance between contour lines

Type a value in the Contour offset box on

the property bar.

Accelerate contour line progression

Click the Object and color acceleration

button on the property bar, and move the
object slider.

You can create an outside contour by dragging the start handle away from the
center.

To copy or clone a contour

1 Select the object you want to contour.
2 Click Effects and click one of the following:
Copy effect > Contour from
Clone effect > Contour from
3 Click a contour object.
You can also use the Eyedropper tool
to copy a contour. For more
information, see To copy object effects to another object on page 103.

To set the fill color for a contour object

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool

2 Select a contour object.

3 Open the Fill color picker on the property bar, and click a color.
If the original object has a fountain fill, a second color picker displays.
You can accelerate the fill color progression by clicking the Object and color
acceleration button on the property bar.

204

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can change the contour centers color by dragging a color from the color
palette to the end fill handle.

To specify an outline color for the contour object

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool

2 Select a contour object.

3 Open the Outline color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

To set the fill progression

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool

2 Select a contour object.

3 Click one of the following buttons on the property bar:
Linear contour colors
Clockwise contour colors
Counterclockwise contour colors

Applying perspective to objects

You can create a perspective effect by shortening one or two sides of an object. This
effect gives an object the appearance of receding in one or two directions, thereby
creating a one-point perspective or a two-point perspective.
Perspective effects can be added to objects or grouped objects. You can also add a
perspective effect to linked groups, such as contours, blends, extrusions, and objects
created with the Linear patterns tool. You cant add perspective effects to paragraph
text, bitmaps, or symbols.
After you apply a perspective effect, you can copy it to other objects in a drawing, adjust
it, or remove it from the object.

To apply a perspective
To
Apply a one-point perspective

Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

Click Effects > Add perspective. Press

Ctrl, and drag a node.

205

To
Apply a two-point perspective

Click Effects > Add perspective. Drag the

nodes on the outside of the grid to apply the
effect you want.

Pressing Ctrl constrains the nodes movement to the horizontal or vertical axis
to create a one-point perspective effect.
You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by
pressing Ctrl + Shift as you drag.

To copy an objects perspective effect

1 Select an object to which you want to apply a perspective effect.
2 Click Effects > Copy effect > Perspective from.
3 Select an object whose perspective effect you want to copy.
You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a perspective effect. For more
information, see To copy object effects to another object on page 103.

To adjust the perspective

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select an object that has a perspective effect.

3 Drag a node to a new position.
You can also adjust the perspective by dragging one or both of the vanishing
points.

To remove an objects perspective effect

1 Select an object that has a perspective effect.
2 Click Effects > Clear perspective.

206

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Creating vector extrusions

You can make objects appear three-dimensional by creating vector extrusions. You can
create vector extrusions by projecting points from an object and joining them to create
an illusion of three dimensions. Corel DESIGNER also lets you apply a vector extrusion
to an object in a group.
After you create an extrusion, you can copy or clone its attributes to a selected object.
Cloning and copying transfer the extrusion attributes of an extruded object to another.
However, the cloned extrusion settings cannot be edited independently from the
master.
You can change an extruded form by rotating it, changing its direction, changing its
depth, and rounding its corners.
Corel DESIGNER also lets you remove a vector extrusion.
Bevels
Another way in which you can give an object a three-dimensional appearance is by
applying a beveled edge to an extrusion. A bevel creates the illusion that an objects
extruded edges are cut on an angle. You can specify the angle and depth values of the
bevel to control the effect.
Extruded fills
You can apply fills to an entire vector extrusion or to the extruded surfaces of a vector
extrusion. You can cover each surface individually with the fill, or you can drape the fill
so that it blankets the entire object with no breaks to the pattern or texture.
Lighting
You can enhance vector extrusions by applying light sources. You can add up to three
light sources to project toward the extruded object with varying intensity. When you
no longer need light sources, you can remove them.
Vanishing points
You can create a vector extrusion in which the lines of the extrusion converge at a
vanishing point. The vanishing point of a vector extrusion can be copied to another
object so that both objects appear to recede toward the same point.
You can also give two vector extrusions different vanishing points.

Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

207

To create a vector extrusion

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Extrusion tool

2 Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion type list box on the property bar.
3 Select an object.
4 Drag the objects selection handles to set the direction and depth of the extrusion.
If you want to reset the extrusion, press Esc before releasing the mouse button.
You can also
Apply preset settings to a vector extrusion

Select an extruded object, click the

Extrusion tool, and choose a preset setting
from the Preset list box on the property bar.

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

1 Select the object you want to extrude.
2 Click Effects and click one of the following:
Copy effect > Extrude from
Clone effect > Extrude from
3 Click an extruded object.
You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a vector extrusion. For more
information, see To copy object effects to another object on page 103.

To change a vector extrusions form

To

Do the following

Rotate an extrusion

Select an extruded object. Click the Extrude

rotation button on the property bar.
Drag the extrusion in the direction you
want.

Change the direction of an extrusion

Using the Extrusion tool , click an

extrusion. Click the vanishing point, and drag
in the direction you want.

208

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Change the depth of an extrusion

Using the Extrusion tool, click an extrusion,

and drag the slider between the interactive
vector handles.

Round the corners of an extruded rectangle

or square

Click the Shape tool . Drag a corner node

along the outline of the rectangle or square.

To remove a vector extrusion

1 Select an extruded object.
2 Click Effects > Clear extrude.
You can also remove a vector extrusion by clicking the Clear extrude button
on the property bar.

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

1 Select an extruded object with the Extrusion tool
2 Click the Color button

on the property bar.

3 Click one of the following buttons:

Use object fill applies the objects fill to the extrusion.
Use solid color applies a solid color to the extrusion
Use color shading applies a gradient fill to the extrusion
You can apply an unbroken pattern or texture fill to an object by enabling the
Drape fills check box before you click the Use object fill button.

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Extrusion tool

2 Select an extruded object.

3 Click the Bevels button

on the property bar.

4 Enable the Use bevel check box.

5 Type a value in the Bevel depth box.
Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

209

6 Type a value in the Bevel angle box.

You can also set the bevel depth and angle by using the Interactive display
box below the Use bevel check box.
You can show only the bevel and hide the extrusion by enabling the Show
bevel only check box.

To add light to a vector extrusion

1 Select an extruded object.
2 Click the Lighting button

on the property bar.

3 Click any of the three Light buttons .

The lights appear as numbered circles in the preview window.
4 Drag the numbered circles in the Light intensity preview window to position the
lights.
If you want to create more realistic shading, enable the Use full color range check
box.
You can also
Adjust the intensity of a light source

Select a light in the Light intensity preview

window and move the Intensity slider.

Remove a light source

Click an active Light button.

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion

To

Do the following

Lock a vanishing point

Double-click an extruded object. Choose VP

locked to object or VP locked to page
from the Vanishing point properties list
box on the property bar.

210

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Copy a vanishing point

Double-click an extruded object whose

vanishing point you want to change. Choose
Copy VP from the Vanishing point
properties list box on the property bar.
Select the extruded object that has the
vanishing point you want to copy.

Set one vanishing point for two extrusions

Double-click an extruded object. Choose

Shared vanishing point from the
Vanishing point properties list box on the
property bar. Select the extruded object that
has the vanishing point you want to share.

Creating drop shadows

Drop shadows simulate light falling on an object from one of five particular
perspectives: flat, right, left, bottom, and top. You can add drop shadows to most
objects or groups of objects, including artistic text, paragraph text, and bitmaps.
When you add a drop shadow, you can change its perspective, and you can adjust
attributes such as color, opacity, fade level, angle, and feathering.
After you create a drop shadow, you can copy it or clone it to a selected object. When
you copy a drop shadow, the original and copy have no connection and can be edited
independently. With cloning, the master objects drop shadow attributes are
automatically applied to its clone.
By separating a drop shadow from its object, you gain more control over the drop
shadow itself. For example, you can edit the drop shadow as you would edit a
transparency. For information about editing a transparency, see Applying
transparencies on page 215.
As with transparencies, you can apply a merge mode to a drop shadow to control how
the color of the drop shadow blends with the color of the object underneath. For more
information about merge modes, see Applying merge modes on page 218.
You can also adjust the rendering resolution of a drop shadow. For example, you can
increase the rendering resolution to improve a drop shadows appearance. However,
increasing the resolution of a drop shadow may increase the file size of a drawing.

Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

211

You can remove a drop shadow.

To add a drop shadow

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Drop shadow tool

2 Click an object.
3 Drag from the center or side of the object until the drop shadow is the size you
want.
4 Specify any attributes on the property bar.
You cant add drop shadows to linked groups, such as blended objects,
contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, objects created with the
Linear patterns tool, or other drop shadows.

To copy or clone a drop shadow

1 Select the object to which you want to copy or clone a drop shadow.
2 Click Effects and click one of the following:
Copy effect > Drop shadow from
Clone effect > Drop shadow from
3 Click the drop shadow of an object.
You can also use the Eyedropper tool
to copy a drop shadow. For more
information, see To copy object effects to another object on page 103.

To separate a drop shadow from an object

1 Select an objects drop shadow.
2 Click Arrange > Break drop shadow group apart.
3 Drag the shadow.

To apply a merge mode to a drop shadow

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Drop shadow tool

2 Select an object with a drop shadow, and choose a merge mode from the
Transparency operation list box on the property bar.
212

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The default merge mode Multiply produces natural-looking drop shadows.

To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Workspace list of categories, click General.
3 Type a value in the Resolution box.

To remove a drop shadow

1 Select an objects drop shadow.
2 Click Effects > Clear drop shadow.
You can also remove a drop shadow from an object by clicking the Clear drop
shadow button on the property bar.

Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

213

Changing the
transparency of objects
You can apply a transparency to an object so that all objects behind it show through.
The Corel DESIGNER application also lets you specify how the color of the
transparent object combines with the color of the object beneath it.
In this section, youll learn about
applying transparencies
applying merge modes

Applying transparencies
When you apply a transparency to an object, you make the objects beneath it partially
visible. You can apply transparencies using the same kind of fills you apply to objects;
that is, uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern. For more information about these fills,
see Filling objects on page 157.
By default, the program applies all transparencies to the objects fill and outline;
however, you can specify whether you want the transparency to apply only to the
objects outline or fill.
You can also copy a transparency from one object to another.
When you position a transparency over an object, you can freeze it, making the view of
the object move with the transparency.

To apply a uniform transparency

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool

3 On the property bar, choose Uniform from the Transparency type list box.
4 Type a value in the Starting transparency box on the property bar, and press
Enter.

Changing the transparency of objects

215

You can click a color on the color palette to apply a color to the transparency.

To apply a fountain transparency

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool

3 On the property bar, choose one of the following fountain transparencies from the
Transparency type list box:
Linear
Radial
Conical
Square
4 Reposition the interactive vector handles that display, or point to where you want
the transparency to start on the object, and drag to where you want the
transparency to end.
If you want to reset the transparency, press Esc before releasing the mouse button.
5 Type a value in the Transparency midpoint box on the property bar, and press
Enter.
You can create a custom fountain transparency by dragging colors, whose
shades convert to grayscale, from the color palette onto the objects interactive
vector handles
.

To apply a textured transparency

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool

3 Choose Texture from the Transparency type list box on the property bar.
4 Choose a sample from the Texture library list box on the property bar.
5 Open the First transparency picker on the property bar, and click a texture.
6 On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:
Starting transparency lets you change the opacity of the starting color
Ending transparency lets you change the opacity of the ending color

216

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To apply a pattern transparency

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool

3 From the Transparency type list box on the property bar, choose one of the
following:
Two-color pattern a simple picture composed of on and off pixels. The
only shades included in the picture are the two that you assign.
Full-color pattern a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of
color like bitmaps. These vector graphics are smoother and more complex than
bitmap images and are easier to manipulate.
Bitmap pattern a color picture composed of patterns of light and dark or
differently colored pixels in a rectangular array.
4 Open the First transparency picker on the property bar, and click a pattern.
5 On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:
Starting transparency
Ending transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool

2 Select an object to which a transparency has been applied.

3 From the Transparency target list box on the property bar, choose one of the
following:
Fill
Outline
All

To copy a transparency to another object

1 Select an object to which you want to apply a transparency.
2 Click Effects > Copy effect > Lens from.
3 Using the horizontal cursor, select the object with the transparency you want to
copy.

To freeze the contents of a transparency

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool
Changing the transparency of objects

.
217

2 Select an object to which a transparency has been applied.

3 Click the Freeze button

on the property bar.

The view of the object beneath the transparency moves with it; however, the
actual object remains unchanged.

Applying merge modes

You can apply a merge mode to a transparency to specify how the color of a transparency
is combined with the color of the object behind it. The following merge modes available
for transparencies can also be applied to drop shadows.
Merge mode

Description

Normal

Applies the transparency color on top of the

base color

Add

Adds the values of the transparency color

and the base color

Subtract

Adds the values of the transparency color

and the base color together, and then
subtracts 255

Difference

Subtracts the transparency color from the

base color and multiplies by 255. If the
transparency color value is 0, the result will
always be 255.

Multiply

Multiplies the base color by the transparency

color, and then divides by 255. This has a
darkening effect, unless you are applying
color to white. Multiplying black with any
color results in black. Multiplying white
with any color leaves the color unchanged.

Divide

Divides the base color by the transparency

color, or conversely, divides the transparency
color by the base color, depending on which
color has the higher value

218

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Merge mode

Description

If lighter

Replaces any base color pixels that are a

darker color with the transparency color.
Base color pixels that are lighter than the
transparency color are not affected.

If darker

Replaces any base color pixels that are a

lighter color with the transparency color.
Base color pixels that are darker than the
transparency color are not affected.

Texturize

Converts the transparency color to grayscale,

and then multiplies the grayscale value by
the base color

Hue

Uses the hue of the transparency color, as

well as the saturation and lightness of the
base color. If you are adding color to a
grayscale image, there will be no change
because the colors are desaturated.

Saturation

Uses the lightness and hue of the base color

and the saturation of the transparency color

Lightness

Uses the hue and saturation of the base color

and the lightness of the transparency color

Invert

Uses the transparency colors

complementary color. If a transparency color
value is 127, there will be no change because
the color value falls in the center of the color
wheel.

Logical AND

Converts the transparency and base colors to

binary values, and then applies the Boolean
algebraic formula AND to these values

Logical OR

Converts the transparency and base colors to

binary values, and then applies the Boolean
algebraic formula OR to these values

Changing the transparency of objects

219

Merge mode

Description

Logical XOR

Converts the transparency and base colors to

binary values, and then applies the Boolean
algebraic formula XOR to these values

Red

Applies the transparency color to the red

channel of RGB objects

Green

Applies the transparency color to the green

channel of RGB objects

Blue

Applies the transparency color to the blue

channel of RGB objects

To apply a merge mode to a transparency

1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool

2 Select an object with a transparency.

3 Choose a merge mode from the Transparency operation list box on the property
bar.

220

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Using lenses with objects

Lenses contain creative effects that let you change the appearance of an object without
actually changing the object.
In this section, youll learn about
applying lenses
editing lenses

Applying lenses
Lenses change how the object area beneath the lens appears, not the actual properties
and attributes of the objects. You can apply lenses to any vector object, such as a
rectangle, ellipse, closed path, or polygon. You can also change the appearance of artistic
text and bitmaps. When you apply a lens over a vector object, the lens itself becomes a
vector image. Likewise, if the lens is placed over a bitmap, the lens also becomes a
bitmap.
After you apply a lens, you can copy it and use it with another object.
The following are the types of lenses you can apply to objects.
Lens

Description

Brighten

Lets you brighten and darken object areas

and set the rate of the brightness and
darkness

Color add

Lets you simulate an additive light model.

The colors of the objects beneath the lens are
added to the color of the lens as if you were
mixing colors of light. You can choose the
color and the amount of color you want to
add.

Using lenses with objects

221

Lens

Description

Color limit

Lets you view an object area with only black

and the lens color showing through. For
example, if you place a green color limit lens
over a bitmap, all colors except green and
black are filtered out in the lens area.

Custom color map

Lets you change all the colors of the object

area beneath the lens to a color ranging
between two colors you specify. You can
choose the ranges start and end colors and
the progression between the two colors. The
progression can follow a direct, forward, or
reverse route through the color spectrum.

Fish eye

Lets you distort, magnify, or shrink the

objects beneath the lens, according to the
percentage value you specify

Heat map

Lets you create the effect of an infrared

image by mimicking the heat levels of colors
in object areas beneath the lens

Invert

Lets you change the colors beneath the lens

to their complementary CMYK colors.
Complementary colors are colors that are
opposite one another on the color wheel.

Magnify

Lets you magnify an area on an object by an

amount that you specify. The magnify lens
overrides the original objects fill, making
the object look transparent.

Tinted grayscale

Lets you change the colors of object areas

beneath the lens to their grayscale
equivalents. Tinted grayscale lenses are
particularly effective for creating sepia-tone
effects.

Transparency

Lets you make an object look like a piece of

tinted film or colored glass

222

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Lens

Description

Wireframe

Lets you display the object area beneath the

lens with the outline or fill color you choose.
For example, if you set red for the outline
and blue for the fill, all areas beneath the
lens appear to have red outlines and blue
fills.

To apply a lens
1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > Lens.
3 Choose a lens type from the list box in the Lens docker.
4 Specify the settings you want.
You cannot apply the lens effect directly to linked groups such as contoured
objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, paragraph text or objects created
with Linear pattern tools.
You can preview the different types of lenses in real-time before auto-applying
one to a drawing by clicking the Lock button and then choosing a lens and
settings to preview. When you find the lens you want to use, click the Lock
button again, and click Apply.

To copy a lens
1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > Copy effect > Lens from.
3 Click the object whose lens you want to copy.

Editing lenses
You can edit a lens to change how it affects the area beneath it. For example, you can
change the viewpoint of a lens, indicated by an X in the drawing window, to display any
part of a drawing. The viewpoint represents the center point of what is being viewed
Using lenses with objects

223

through the lens. You can position the lens anywhere in the drawing window, but it
always shows the area around its viewpoint marker. For example, you can use the
viewpoint marker on the Magnify lens to enlarge part of a map.
You can also display a lens only where it overlaps other objects or the background. As a
result, the lens effect is not seen where the lens covers blank space (white space) in the
drawing window.
Freezing the current view of a lens lets you move the lens without changing whats
displayed through it. In addition, changes you make to the areas beneath the lens have
no effect on the view.

To edit a lens
1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > Lens.
3 Enable the Viewpoint check box on the Lens docker.
If you want to display a lens only where it covers other objects, enable the Remove
face check box.
4 Click Edit to display the viewpoint marker.
5 Drag the viewpoint marker in the drawing window to a new location.
6 Click End.
If you want to freeze the current view of a lens, enable the Frozen check box.
7 Click Apply.
The Remove face check box is not available for the Fish Eye and Magnify
lenses.

224

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Working with layers

You can work with layers to help you organize and arrange objects in complex
illustrations.
In this section, youll learn about
creating layers
changing layer properties and stacking order
moving and copying objects between layers
printing layers

Creating layers
All Corel DESIGNER drawings consist of stacked objects. The vertical order of these
objects the stacking order contributes to the appearance of the drawing. You can
organize these objects using invisible planes called layers.
Layering gives you added flexibility when organizing and editing the objects in complex
drawings. You can divide a drawing into multiple layers, each containing a portion of
the drawings contents. For example, using layers can help you organize an architectural
plan for a building. You can organize the buildings various components (for example,
plumbing, electrical, structural) by placing them on separate layers. You can display
pages only and layers only.
You can also display selected objects. Hiding a layer lets you identify and edit the objects
on other layers. You also reduce the time the program needs to refresh your drawing
when you edit it.

Working with layers

225

Drawings can be assembled by placing objects on various levels or layers.

Layering lets you change foregrounds and backgrounds independently.

Each new file has one Master Page that contains and controls three default layers: the
Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers. The Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers contain the
grid, guidelines, and objects outside the borders of the drawing page. The Desktop layer
lets you create drawings you might want to use later. You can specify settings for the
grid and guidelines on the Master Page. You can specify settings, for example color, for
each layer on the Master Page.
You can add one or more master layers to a Master Page. This layer contains information
that you want to display on every page of a multipage document. For example, you can
use a master layer to place a header, footer, or static background on every page.

To create a layer
To

Do the following

Create a layer

Click Window > Object manager. Click

the flyout button , and click New layer.

Create a master layer

Click Window > Object manager. Click

the flyout button, and click New master
layer.

To use a layer in the drawing, you must first make the layer active. In the
Object manager docker, the active layer is highlighted in red. When you start
a drawing, the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer.
226

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

When you create a master layer, it moves to the Master Page.

You can also add a layer by clicking the New layer button
manager docker.

in the Object

You can make any layer a master layer by right-clicking the layer name, and
clicking Master.

To display or hide a layer

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Click the Eye icon beside the layer name.
The layer is hidden when the Eye icon is grayed.
You can also display or hide a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object
manager docker and clicking Visible.

To display pages, layers, and objects

To

Do the following

Display pages

Click Window > Object manager. Click

the flyout button , and then click Show
pages.

Display layers

Click Window > Object manager. Click

the Layer manager view button .

Display objects

Click Window > Object manager. Click

the flyout button , and then click Expand
to show selection.

To delete a layer
1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Click the name of a layer.
3 Click the flyout button

Working with layers

, and click Delete layer.

227

When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on it. To keep an object
on the layer youre deleting, move it to a different layer first.
You can delete any unlocked layer except the three default layers of the Master
Page (Grid, Guides, or Desktop). For more information about locking and
unlocking layers, see To set a layers editing properties on page 228.

To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Right-click the layer, and click Properties.
3 Change the settings, and click OK.

Changing layer properties and stacking order

By default, each new layer has its editing, printing, and display properties enabled and
its master layer property disabled; however, you can change these properties.
You can set a layers editing properties to make a layer active, and allow the editing of
all layers or the active layer only. When you are making changes to a drawing, you can
lock a layer to prevent accidental changes to its objects. When you lock a layer, you
cannot select or edit it.
Renaming layers can be used to indicate their contents, position in the stacking order,
and relationship with other layers.
You can change a layers place in the stacking order.

To set a layers editing properties

Click Window > Object manager.
To

Do the following

Make a layer active

Click the name of a layer.

Allow editing of all layers

Click the flyout button

across layers.

, and click Edit

Allow editing of the active layer only

Click the flyout button

across layers.

, and disable Edit

228

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Lock or unlock a layer

Click the Pencil icon

name.

beside the layer

If you disable the Edit across layers button , you can work on the active
layer and the Desktop layer only. You cant select or edit objects on inactive
layers.
You cant lock or unlock the Grid layer.
You can also allow editing of the active or of all layers by enabling or disabling
the Edit across layers button in the Object manager docker. Editing across
layers is enabled when the button appears pressed.
You can also lock or unlock a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object
manager docker and clicking Editable.

To rename a layer
1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Right-click the layer name, and click Rename.
You can also rename a layer by clicking the layer name and typing a new name.

To change the position of a layer in the stacking order

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 In the Layers list, drag a layer name tag to the new position.

Moving and copying objects between layers

You can move or copy selected objects to new layers, including layers on the Master
Page to another page and back.
Moving or copying an object to a layer below its current layer causes the object to
become the top object on its new layer. Similarly, moving or copying an object to a layer
above its current layer causes the object to become the bottom object.
Working with layers

229

To move or copy an object to another layer

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Click an object in the Object manager.
3 Click the flyout button
Move to layer
Copy to layer

, and click one of the following:

4 Point to the layer to which you want to move or copy the object, and click.
When moving objects to or from a layer, the layers must be unlocked.
You can move and copy an object to another layer by dragging an object to a
new layer in the Object manager docker.

Printing layers
Enabling the print setting of a layer lets you print the layer and its contents. If you
disable a layers print setting, the layer and its contents wont appear when you print
the drawing.

To enable or disable printing for a specific layer

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Click the Printer icon

beside the layer name.

Disabling the printing of a layer prevents its contents from displaying in fullscreen previews. For information about full-screen previews, see Previewing a
drawing on page 36.
You can also enable or disable the printing of a layer by right-clicking the layer
in the Object manager docker and clicking Printable.

230

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Working with pages and

layout tools
The Corel DESIGNER program allows you to specify the size, orientation, unit of
scale, and background of the drawing page. You can customize and display page grids
and guidelines to help you organize objects and place them exactly where you want.
Rulers can help you position grids, guidelines, and objects along a scale using units of
your choosing. Also, you can add and delete pages.
Page layout settings and tools are fully customizable and can be used as defaults for
other drawings.
In this section, youll learn about
specifying the page layout
choosing a page background
adding, renaming, and deleting pages
using the rulers
calibrating the rulers
setting up the grid
setting up guidelines
setting the drawing scale

Specifying the page layout

You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and
layout style of the page. The options you choose when specifying the page layout can
be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size
and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing.
Page size
There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size or creating
your own. You can choose from many preset page sizes ranging from legal-size paper

Working with pages and layout tools

231

and envelopes to posters and Web pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs,
you can create a custom page size by specifying a drawings dimensions.
Page orientation
The orientation of the page can be landscape or portrait. With landscape orientation the
drawings width is greater than its height, and with portrait orientation the drawings
height is greater than its width. Any pages you add to a drawing project assume the
current orientation; however, you can give single pages in a drawing project a different
orientation.
Layout styles
With the default layout style (Full Page), each page in a document is considered a single
page and prints on one sheet. You can also choose layout styles for multipage
publications such as booklets and brochures. The multipage layout styles Book,
Booklet, Tent Card, Side-fold Card, and Top-fold Card split the page size you set into
two or more equal parts. Each part is considered a separate page. The advantage is that
regardless of the layout required to print your document, you can edit each page in
upright orientation and in sequential order in the drawing window. When you are ready
to print, the application automatically arranges the pages in the order required for
printing and binding.

To set the page size and orientation

To

Do the following

Choose a preset page size

Click Layout > Page setup, and choose a

paper type from the Paper list box.

Specify a custom page size

Click Layout > Page setup, and type values

in the Width and Height boxes.

Set the page orientation

Click Layout > Page setup, and enable the

Landscape or the Portrait option.

Set the page size and orientation for an

individual page in a multipage document

Go to the page. Click Layout > Page

setup, choose the page size and orientation
you want, and enable the Resize current
page only check box.

232

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

With the Pick tool active and no objects selected, you can quickly change the
page size and orientation by using the controls on the property bar. To apply
page size and orientation settings to all pages in a drawing, begin by clicking
the top half of the Set default or current page size and orientation button
. To change only the current page, first click the bottom half of the Set
default or current page orientation button.
You can also specify the page size and orientation by clicking View > Page
sorter view and using the buttons on the property bar.

To choose a layout style

1 Click Layout > Page setup.
2 In the Page list of categories, click Layout.
3 Choose a layout style from the Layout list box.
Each layout style is accompanied by a short description and illustration.

To set the default page layout

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, click Document.
3 Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box.
4 Enable the Page options check box.
The next new document is created with the page size and orientation options
that were last specified with the Resize current page only check box disabled.

To match the page settings to the printer settings

1 Click Layout > Page setup.
2 Enable the Normal paper option.
3 Click Set from printer.

Working with pages and layout tools

233

Choosing a page background

You can choose the color and type of background for a drawing. For example, you can
use a solid color if you want a uniform background. If you want a more intricate or
dynamic background, you can use a bitmap. Some examples of bitmaps include
textured designs, photographs, and clipart.
When you choose a bitmap as the background, it is embedded in the drawing by
default. This is the recommended option. However, you can also link the bitmap to the
drawing so that if you later edit the source image, the change is automatically reflected
in the drawing. If you send a drawing with a linked image to someone else, you must
also send the linked image.
You can make a background bitmap printable and exportable, or you can save computer
resources by exporting and printing a drawing without the background bitmap.
If you no longer need a background, you can remove it.

To use a solid color as the background

1 Click Layout > Page background.
2 Enable the Solid option.
3 Open the Color picker, and click a color.

To use a bitmap as the background

1 Click Layout > Page background.
2 Enable the Bitmap option.
3 Click Browse.
4 Choose a file format from the Files of type list box.
5 Locate the folder where the file is stored.
6 Double-click the filename.
7 Enable one of the following options:
Linked links the bitmap to the drawing so that changes made to the source
file are reflected in the bitmap background
Embedded embeds the bitmap in the drawing so that changes made to the
source file are not reflected in the bitmap background
If you want the background to be printed and exported with the drawing, enable
the Print and export background check box.
234

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

8 Enable one of the following options:

Default size lets you use the bitmaps current size
Custom size lets you specify the dimensions of the bitmap. Type values in the
H and V boxes.
If you want to specify non-proportional height and width values, disable the
Maintain aspect ratio check box.
If the bitmap is smaller than the drawing page, it is tiled across the drawing
page. If it is larger than the drawing page, it is cropped to fit the drawing page.
A background bitmap is not an object and cannot be edited.

To remove a background
1 Click Layout > Page background.
2 Enable the No background option.

Adding, renaming, and deleting pages

Corel DESIGNER lets you add a page to a drawing, rename it at any time, and delete
a single page or an entire range of pages. You can also move objects from one page to
another.
You can use the Page sorter view to manage pages while viewing the page contents. The
Page sorter view lets you change the order of pages as well as copy, add, rename, and
delete pages.

To add a page
1 Click Layout > Insert page.
2 Type the number of pages you want to add in the Insert pages box.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Before
After
If you want to insert before or after a page other than the current page, type the
page number in the Page box.

Working with pages and layout tools

235

You can also add pages by clicking the Add page button in the document
window if youre on the first or last page.
You can also choose where to add a page by right-clicking a page tab in the
document window and clicking Insert page after or Insert page before.

To rename a page
1 Click Layout > Rename page.
2 Type the name of the page in the Page name box.
You can also rename a page in the Object manager docker by clicking the
page name twice and typing a new name. To access the Object manager
docker, click Window > Object manager.

To delete a page
1 Click Layout > Delete page.
2 In the Delete page dialog box, type the number of the page you want to delete.
You can delete a range of pages by enabling the Through to page check box
and typing the number of the last page to delete in the Through to page box.

To change the order of pages

Drag the page tabs on the document navigator at the bottom of the drawing
window.

To move an object to another page

Drag the object over the page number tab of the page you want to move the object
to, and without letting go of the mouse button, drag the object to position it on the
page.

To manage pages while viewing their contents

Click View > Page sorter view.

236

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Change the order of pages

Drag a page to its new location.

Copy a page

Right-click, drag the page to its new

location, and choose Copy here from the list
box.

Add a page

Right-click a page, and click Insert before

page or Insert after page.

Rename a page

Click the page name below a page, and type

a new name.

Delete a page

Right-click a page, and click Delete page.

Return to normal view

Double-click a page.

Using the rulers

You can display rulers in the drawing window to help you draw, size, and align objects
precisely. You can hide the rulers or move them to another position in the drawing
window. You can also customize the ruler settings to suit your needs. For example, you
can set the ruler origin, choose a unit of measurement, and specify how many marks or
ticks display between each full unit mark.
By default, Corel DESIGNER applies the same units used for the rulers to the duplicate
and nudge distances. You can change the default so that you can specify different units
for these and other settings. For information about nudging, see Moving objects on
page 104.

To hide or display the rulers

Click View > Rulers.
A check mark beside the Rulers command indicates the rulers are displayed.

To move a ruler
Hold down Shift, and drag a ruler to a new position in the drawing window.

Working with pages and layout tools

237

To customize ruler settings

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.
3 In the Units area, choose a unit of measurement from the Horizontal list box.
If you want to use a different unit of measurement for the vertical ruler, disable the
Same units for horizontal and vertical rulers check box, and choose a unit of
measurement from the Vertical list box.
4 In the Origin area, type values in the following boxes:
Horizontal
Vertical
5 Type a value in the Tick divisions box.
If you change the unit of measurement for rulers, the unit of measurement for
nudge distances automatically changes as well, unless you first disable the
Same units for duplicate distance, nudge and rulers check box in the
Nudge area.
You can access ruler settings directly by double-clicking a ruler.
You can specify nudge settings by typing values in the Nudge, Super nudge,
and Micro nudge boxes in the Nudge area.

Calibrating the rulers

You can have one inch on your screen equal one inch of real distance. This lets you
work using real-world distances as opposed to relative distances that depend on screen
resolution. This tool is particularly useful when working with signs, or when drawing
in 1:1 zoom mode.
Before you can perform this procedure, you must have a clear plastic ruler for comparing
real-world and on-screen distances. This ruler should use the same unit of measurement
you set for the Corel DESIGNER rulers. For information about ruler settings, see
Using the rulers on page 237.

To calibrate the rulers to match real-world distance

1 Click Tools > Options.
238

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 In the list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, pan tool.
3 Click Calibrate rulers.
4 Place a clear plastic ruler under the on-screen horizontal ruler.
5 Click the Up or Down Arrow on the Horizontal box to match one unit of
measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual
ruler.
6 Place the ruler beside the on-screen vertical ruler.
7 Click the Up or Down Arrow button on the Vertical box to match one unit of
measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual
ruler.

Setting up the grid

The grid is a series of intersecting dashed lines or dots that you can use to precisely align
and position objects in the drawing window. You can set the distance between the grid
lines or dots by specifying the frequency or spacing. Frequency refers to the number of
lines or dots that display between each horizontal and vertical unit. Spacing refers to the
exact distance between each line or dot. High frequency values or low spacing values
can help you align and position objects more precisely.
You can have objects snap to the grid so that when you move the objects, they jump
between grid lines.

To display or hide the grid

Click View > Grid.
A check mark beside the Grid command indicates that the grid is displayed.

To set the distance between the grid lines

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Grid.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Frequency specifies grid spacing as the number of lines per unit of measure
Spacing specifies grid spacing as the distance between each grid line

Working with pages and layout tools

239

4 Type values in the following boxes:

Horizontal
Vertical
The unit of measure used for grid spacing is the same as that used for rulers.
For information about ruler settings, see To customize ruler settings on
page 238.

Setting up guidelines
Guidelines are lines that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object
placement. There are three types of guidelines: horizontal, vertical, and slanted. By
default, the application displays guidelines you can add to the drawing window, but you
can hide them at any time.
You can add a guideline wherever you need one; however, you can also choose to add
preset guidelines. There are two types of preset guidelines: Corel presets and userdefined presets. An example of a Corel preset is one with guidelines that display at oneinch margins. User-defined presets are guidelines whose location you specify. For
example, you can add preset guidelines that display margins at a distance you specify or
that define a column layout or grid. After you add a guideline, you can select it, move
it, rotate it, lock it in place, or delete it.
Guidelines always use the unit of measure specified for rulers. For information about
ruler settings, see To customize ruler settings on page 238.

To display or hide the guidelines

Click View > Guidelines.
A check mark beside the Guidelines command indicates that the guidelines
are displayed.

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Guidelines.
3 In the list of categories, click one of the following:
Horizontal
240

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Vertical
4 Specify the guideline settings you want.
5 Click Add.
You can also add a guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler
in the drawing window.

To add a slanted guideline

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Guidelines.
3 In the Guidelines list of categories, click Guides.
4 From the Specify list box, choose one of the following:
2 points lets you specify two points to be joined to create a guideline
Angle and 1 point lets you specify one point and an angle. The guideline
crosses through the point at the angle specified.
5 Choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
6 Specify the x and y coordinates and, if applicable, the angle.
7 Click Add.

To add preset guidelines

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document, Guidelines list of categories, click Presets.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Corel presets
User defined presets
4 Enable the check boxes beside each guideline setting you want.
If you enabled the User defined presets option, specify values in the Margins,
Columns or Grid areas.
5 Click Apply presets.

Working with pages and layout tools

241

To modify guidelines
To

Do the following

Select a single guideline

Click the guideline using the Pick tool

Select all guidelines

Click Edit > Select all > Guidelines.

Move a guideline

Drag a guideline to a new position in the

drawing window.

Rotate a guideline

Click a guideline twice using the Pick tool

, and rotate it when skewing handles
display.

Lock a guideline

Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and

click Arrange > Lock object.

Unlock a guideline

Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and

click Arrange > Unlock object.

Delete a guideline

Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and

press Delete.

Delete a preset guideline

Click Tools > Options. In the Document,

Guidelines list of categories, click Presets.
Disable the check box beside the preset
guideline you want to delete.

You can also lock or unlock a guideline by right-clicking the guideline, and
then clicking Lock object or Unlock object.
You can access the guidelines setup directly by right-clicking a ruler, and then
clicking Guidelines setup.

Setting the drawing scale

You can choose a preset or custom drawing scale to relate distances in a drawing to realworld distances. For example, you can specify that one inch in the drawing corresponds
to one meter in reality. A preset drawing scale lets you set a typical scale, such as 1:2 or
1:10, while a custom drawing scale lets you set any distance on the page equal to a realworld distance. For example, you can set a more accurate, precise scale that includes
decimal numbers, such as 4.5 to 10.6.
242

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Drawing scales are particularly useful if you are creating a technical or architectural
drawing with dimension lines. For information about dimension lines, see Drawing
dimension lines on page 66.

To choose a preset drawing scale

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.
3 Click Edit scale.
4 Choose a drawing scale from the Typical scales list box.

To create a custom drawing scale

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.
3 Click Edit scale.
4 Choose Custom from the Typical scales list box.
5 Specify the settings you want.
The Edit scale button does not display if the rulers unit of measure is pixels.
If the drawing scale is set to anything other than 1:1, the vertical rulers units
will always be the same as the horizontal rulers units.

Working with pages and layout tools

243

Adding and formatting text

The Corel DESIGNER application lets you use text to create documents or annotate
drawings.
In this section, youll learn about
adding and selecting text
encoding text
changing the appearance of text
finding, editing, and converting text
aligning and spacing text
shifting and rotating text
moving text
fitting text to a path
formatting paragraph text
combining and linking paragraph text frames
wrapping paragraph text around objects and text
embedding graphics and adding special characters
inserting special characters and spaces
displaying nonprinting characters

Adding and selecting text

There are two types of text you can add to drawings artistic text and paragraph text.
Artistic text can be used to add short lines of text to which you can apply a wide range
of effects, such as drop shadows. Paragraph text can be used for larger bodies of text that
have greater formatting requirements. You can add both paragraph and artistic text
directly in the drawing window.

Adding and formatting text

245

You can add artistic text along an open or closed path. You can also fit existing artistic
and paragraph text to a path. For more information, see Fitting text to a path on
page 259.
When adding paragraph text, you must first create a text frame. By default, paragraph
text frames remain the same size regardless of how much text they contain. Any text
that continues past the bottom-right border of the text frame is hidden until you either
enlarge the text frame or link it to another text frame. You can fit text to a frame, which
automatically adjusts the point size of text so that the text fits perfectly in the frame.
For information about fitting text to a frame, see To fit text to a paragraph text frame
on page 261. You can also have paragraph text frames automatically expand and shrink
as you type, so that the text fits perfectly in the frame.
You can insert a paragraph text frame inside a graphic object. This lets you use objects
as containers for text so that you can use different shapes for text frames. You can also
separate text from an object. When you do, the text retains its shape, and you can move
or modify the text and the object independently.
When you import or paste text, you have the option of maintaining formatting,
maintaining fonts and formatting, or discarding fonts and formatting. Maintaining
fonts ensures that imported and pasted text retains its original font type. Maintaining
formatting ensures that formatting information such as bullets, columns, and bold or
italic formatting is preserved. If you choose to discard fonts and formatting, the
imported or pasted text takes on the properties of the selected text object, or if none is
selected, the default font and formatting properties. For more information about
importing files, see Importing files on page 365. For more information about pasting,
see To paste an object into a drawing on page 101.
To modify text, you must first select it. You can select entire text objects or specific
characters.

To add artistic text

Click anywhere in the drawing window using the Text tool

246

, and type.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To add paragraph text

To

Do the following

Add paragraph text

Click the Text tool . Drag in the drawing

window to size the paragraph text frame,
and type.

Add paragraph text inside an object

Click the Text tool. Move the pointer over

the objects outline, and click the object
when the pointer changes to an Insert in
object pointer. Type inside the frame.

Separate a paragraph text frame from an

object

Select the object using the Pick tool , and

click Arrange > Break paragraph text
inside a path apart.

Enabling the Expand and shrink paragraph text frames to fit text check
box on the Paragraph page of the Options dialog box affects only new text
frames. Existing paragraph text frames remain fixed in size.
You can adjust the size of a paragraph text frame by clicking the text frame
using the Pick tool, and dragging any selection handle.

To set options for importing and pasting text

1 Import or paste the text.
2 In the Importing / pasting text dialog box, enable one of the following options:
Maintain fonts and formatting
Maintain formatting only
Discard fonts and formatting
If you want to use the same formatting options whenever you import or paste text,
enable the Dont show this warning again check box.
Clicking Cancel cancels the import or paste operation.
If you choose to maintain fonts, and a required font is not installed on your
computer, the PANOSE font matching system substitutes the font for you. For
more information, see Substituting unavailable fonts on page 277.
Adding and formatting text

247

To select text
To select

Do the following

An entire text object

Click the text object while using the Pick

tool .

Specific characters

Drag across the text while using the Text

tool .

You can select multiple text objects by holding down Shift and clicking each
text object while using the Pick tool.

Encoding text
After opening or importing a drawing that contains text in a language different from
the language of your operating system, you may find that text does not display correctly.
To display text correctly, you can change the encoding. Encoding determines the
character set of text.
Encoding settings do not help display correctly text outside the drawing window, such
as keywords, file names, and text entries in the Object manager and Object data
manager dockers. You have to use code page settings in the Open or Import dialog
boxes to set the proper characters for such text. For information about using code page
settings, see Starting and opening drawings on page 27 and Importing files on
page 365.

To display text correctly in any language

1 Click Text > Encode.
2 In the Text encoding dialog box, choose the Other encoding option.
3 From the Other encoding list box, choose an encoding setting that makes the text
readable.
The preview window displays the text with the selected encoding setting.

248

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Changing the appearance of text

You can change the default text style, so that all new artistic or paragraph text you
create has the same properties. You can enhance artistic text and paragraph text by
modifying their character properties. For example, you can change the font type and size
or make the text bold or italic. You can also change the position of text to subscript or
superscript, which is useful if a drawing contains scientific notation. You can add
underlines, strikethrough lines, and overlines to text. You can change the thickness of
these lines, as well as the distance between the lines and the text. You can also change
the color of text.
You can change the case of text to lowercase or uppercase without deleting or replacing
letters. You can increase or decrease font size by a specified increment amount. By
default, the unit of measure is points. You can change this setting for the active drawing
and all subsequent drawings you create.
Greeking text lets you increase the redraw speed by representing text under a certain
size with lines. This is useful when showing prototypes of documents or drawings. You
can make text readable again by reducing the greeking value or by zooming in on the
text.

To change the default text style

1 Click a blank space in the drawing window using the Pick tool

2 Click Text > Format text.

3 Click the Character tab.
4 Specify the properties you want.
Following each property change you make, by default you must specify whether
the changes are applied to artistic text, paragraph text, or both. You can override
this default by disabling the Auto apply button next to Apply.
To have changes to the default text style apply to future documents, click
Tools > Save settings as default.

To change character properties

1 Select the text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Character tab.
Adding and formatting text

249

4 Specify the character attributes you want.

You can also make selected text bold, italic, or underlined by clicking the Bold
button , Italic button , or Underline button on the property bar.

To change the color of text

1 Select the text using the Text tool

2 Click a color on the color palette.

You can change the color of an entire text object by selecting it with the Pick
tool
and dragging a color swatch from the color palette to the text object.

To change text case

1 Select the text.
2 Click Text > Change case.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Sentence case capitalizes the initial letter of the first word in each sentence
Lowercase makes all text lowercase
Uppercase makes all text uppercase
Title case capitalizes the initial letter of each word
Toggle case reverses the case; all uppercase letters become lowercase and all
lowercase letters become uppercase

To resize text
To

Do the following

Increase the size of text

Select the text using the Text tool , hold

down Ctrl, and press 8 on the number pad.

Decrease the size of text

Select the text using the Text tool, hold

down Ctrl, and press 2 on the number pad.

250

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Specify the amount by which to resize text

Click Tools > Options. In the list of

categories, click Text, and type a value in the
Keyboard text increment box.
If you want to change the default unit of
measure, choose a unit from the Default
text units list box.

You must be in Num lock mode to increase or decrease the size of text.

To greek text
1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, click Text.
3 Type a value in the Greek text below box.

Finding, editing, and converting text

You can find text in a drawing and replace it automatically. You can edit text directly in
the drawing window or in a dialog box.
Corel DESIGNER lets you convert artistic text to paragraph text if you require more
formatting options, and paragraph text to artistic text if youd like to apply special
effects.
You can also convert both paragraph and artistic text to curves. This transforms
characters into single line and curve objects, letting you add, delete, or move the nodes
of individual characters to alter their shape. For more information, see Working with
curve objects on page 119. When you convert text to curves, the appearance of the text
is preserved, including font, style, character position and rotation, spacing, and any
other text settings and effects. Any linked text objects are also converted to curves. If
you convert paragraph text in a fixed-sized frame to curves, any text that overflows the
frame is deleted. For information about fitting text to a frame, see Formatting
paragraph text on page 261.

To find text
1 Click Edit > Find and replace > Find text.
Adding and formatting text

251

2 Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.
If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case
check box.
3 Click Find next.

To find and replace text

1 Click Edit > Find and replace > Replace text.
2 Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.
If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case
check box.
3 Type the replacement text in the Replace with box.
4 Click one of the following buttons:
Find next finds the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find what
box
Replace replaces the selected occurrence of the text specified in the Find
what box. If no occurrence is selected, Replace finds the next occurrence.
Replace all replaces every occurrence of the text specified in the Find what
box

To edit text
1 Select the text.
2 Make changes to the text in the Edit text dialog box.
You can also
Edit text in the drawing window

Select the text using the Text tool

edit it.

, and

You cannot edit text that has been converted to curves.

252

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To convert text
To convert

Do the following

Paragraph text to artistic text

Select the text using the Pick tool , and

click Text > Convert to artistic text.

Artistic text to paragraph text

Select the text using the Pick tool, and click

Text > Convert to paragraph text.

Artistic or paragraph text to curves

Select the text using the Pick tool, and click

Arrange > Convert to curves.

You cannot convert paragraph text to artistic text when the paragraph text is
linked to another frame, has special effects applied to it, or overflows its frame.
You can also convert text to curves by right-clicking the text using the Pick
tool and clicking Convert to curves.

Aligning and spacing text

You can align both paragraph and artistic text horizontally. Aligning paragraph text
lines up text relative to the paragraph text frame. You can horizontally align all
paragraphs or only selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame. You can vertically
align all paragraphs in a paragraph text frame. You can also align text to another object.

Adding and formatting text

253

You can align a text object to other objects using the first line baseline, last line
baseline, or the edge of the text bounding box.

Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text,
the entire text object aligns in relation to the bounding box. If characters have not been
shifted horizontally, applying no alignment produces the same result as applying left
alignment.

Artistic text is aligned within the bounding box, which is indicated by eight
selection handles (black squares). The text at the top is left-aligned; the text
at the bottom is right-aligned.
254

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can change character and word spacing in selected paragraphs, or in an entire
paragraph text frame or artistic text object. Changing character spacing between
selected or specific text is also referred to as tracking; changing character spacing in an
entire block of text is also called kerning. You can change the line spacing of text, which
is also referred to as leading. Changing the leading for artistic text applies the spacing
to lines of text separated by a carriage return. For paragraph text, leading applies only
to lines of text within the same paragraph. You can also change the spacing before and
after paragraphs in paragraph text, and you can kern selected characters. Kerning
balances the optical space between letters.

To align text horizontally

1 Select the text object using the Pick tool

2 Click Text > Format text.

3 Click the Paragraph tab.
4 Choose an item from the Alignment list box.
You can also align text horizontally by clicking the Horizontal alignment
button on the property bar and choosing an alignment style from the list
box. The property bar displays the alignment icon corresponding with the
current alignment style.
To align selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame, select them using the
Text tool .

To align paragraph text vertically in a text frame

1 Select the paragraph text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Columns tab.
4 Choose an alignment option from the Vertical justification list box.

To align text to an object

1 Hold down Shift, select the text, and then select the object.
2 Click Arrange > Align and distribute > Align and distribute.
3 Choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box:
Adding and formatting text

255

 First line baseline aligns the text using the baseline of the first line of text
Last line baseline aligns the text using the baseline of the last line of text
Bounding box aligns the text using its bounding box
4 Enable one of the following horizontal alignment check boxes:
Left
Right
Center
5 Enable one of the following vertical alignment check boxes:
Top
Bottom
Center
6 Click Apply.
The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edges is determined by
the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects
before you align them, the last object created will be used. If you select the
objects one at a time the last object selected will be the reference point for
aligning the others. If youve applied a linear transformation, such as rotation,
to the text and are aligning with a baseline, the objects align using the baseline
point of the starting edge of the text object.
If you are aligning text objects to each other and have elected to align with the
first line baseline or last line baseline, the vertical and horizontal alignment
check boxes are grayed. The baseline points of the text objects are aligned to
each other.
You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and
distribute button on the property bar.

To change the spacing of text

1 Select the text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Paragraph tab.
4 In the Spacing area, type values in any of the boxes.

256

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Character and word spacing can only be applied to entire paragraphs, or to an

entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. For information about
adjusting character and word spacing for selected characters, see To apply
range kerning to selected characters on page 257.
Values represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values
range from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000
percent.
You can also change the spacing between words and characters proportionately
by selecting the text object using the Shape tool and dragging the
Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the bottom-right corner of the text
object. Drag the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the bottom-left corner
of the text object to change the line spacing proportionately.

To apply range kerning to selected characters

1 Select two or more characters using the Text tool

2 Click Text > Format text.

3 Click the Character tab.
4 Type a value in the Range kerning box.

Shifting and rotating text

Shifting artistic and paragraph text vertically and horizontally can create an interesting
effect. You can also rotate characters. Straightening text pulls the text into its original
position. You can return vertically shifted characters to the baseline without affecting
their rotation angle.

To shift or rotate a character

1 Select the character or characters using the Text tool

2 Click Text > Format text.

3 Click the Character tab.
4 In the Shift area, type a value in one of the following boxes:

Adding and formatting text

257

 Horizontal a positive number moves characters to the right, and a

negative number moves characters to the left
Vertical a positive number moves characters up, and a negative number
moves characters down
Rotate a positive number rotates characters counterclockwise, and a
negative number rotates characters clockwise
You can also shift or rotate characters whose nodes you select using the Shape
tool by typing values in the Horizontal shift box, Vertical shift box, or
Angle of rotation box on the property bar.

To straighten a shifted or rotated character

1 Select the text.
2 Click Text > Straighten text.

To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline

1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select the text object, and select the node to the left of the character.
3 Click Text > Align to baseline.

Moving text
Corel DESIGNER lets you move paragraph text between frames, and artistic text
between artistic text objects. You can also move paragraph text to an artistic text object,
and artistic text to a paragraph text frame.

To move text
1 Select the text using the Text tool

2 Drag the text to another paragraph text frame or artistic text object.
You can also
Move text within the same frame or object

258

Select the text, and drag it to a new position.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Move or copy selected text to a new text
object

Right-click and drag the text to a new

position, and click Copy here or Move here.

Fitting text to a path

You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed
object (for example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Artistic text can
be fitted to an open or closed path. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only.
After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the texts position relative to that path. For
example, you can place the text on the opposite side of the path, or you can adjust the
distance between the text and the path.
When you separate text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the
object to which it was fitted. Straightening the text reverts it to its original appearance.

To add text along a path

1 Select a path using the Pick tool

2 Click Text > Fit text to path.

3 Point to the path, and click when the pointer changes to the Fit to path pointer
.
4 Type along the path.
If the text is fitted to a closed path, the text is centered along the path. If the
text is fitted to an open path, the text flows from the point of insertion.
You cant fit text to the path of another text object.
You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool
and pointing to a
path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want
the text to begin, and type.

To fit text to a path

1 Select a text object using the Pick tool
Adding and formatting text

.
259

2 Click Text > Fit text to path.

The pointer changes to a thick, black arrow.
3 Click a path.
Artistic text can be fitted to open or closed paths. Paragraph text can be fitted
to open paths only.

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

1 Using the Pick tool

, select the text fitted to a path.

2 Choose a setting from any of the following list boxes on the property bar:
Text orientation the angle at which the text sits on the path
Vertical placement the vertical alignment of the text relative to the path
Distance from path the distance between the text and the path to which it is
fit
Text placement the side of the path on which the text is fitted
Horizontal offset the horizontal position of the text along the path
You can also change the horizontal position of fitted text by selecting it with
the Shape tool and dragging the character nodes you want to reposition.
Using the Pick tool, you can move text along the path by dragging the small
red node that displays beside the text.

To separate text from a path

1 Select the path and the fitted text by using the Pick tool

2 Click Arrange > Break text apart.

To straighten text
1 Select the fitted text using the Pick tool

2 Click Arrange > Break text apart.

3 Click Text > Straighten text.

260

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Formatting paragraph text

Corel DESIGNER offers various formatting options for paragraph text. For example,
you can fit text to a paragraph text frame. Fitting text to a frame increases or decreases
the point size of text so that it fits the text frame exactly. You can use columns to lay out
text-intensive projects. You can create columns of equal or varying widths and gutters.
Applying drop caps to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter and insets it into the body
of text. You can customize a drop cap by changing its settings. For example, you can
change the distance between the drop cap and the body of text, or specify the number
of lines of text you want to appear beside the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap at
any point, without deleting the letter.
You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can have text wrap around bullets,
or you can offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. Corel DESIGNER lets
you customize bullets by changing their size, position, and distance from text. After you
add a bullet, you can remove it without deleting the text.
You can add tabs to indent paragraph text. You can also remove tabs and change tab
alignment. Setting trailing leader tabs automatically creates dots that precede the tab.
Indenting changes the space between a paragraph text frame and the text that it
contains. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, all but the
first line of a paragraph (a hanging indent), or from the right side of the frame. You can
also remove an indent without deleting or retyping text.
Hyphenating splits words between lines when the whole word does not fit on one line.
You can have Corel DESIGNER hyphenate automatically. You can specify hyphenation
settings such as the minimum number of letters before and after a hyphen, and the hot
zone.
Paragraph text frame formatting can be applied to selected frames only, selected frames
and frames they are currently linked to, or to all selected and subsequently linked
frames. For information about setting these options, see To choose paragraph text
frame formatting options on page 266.

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

1 Select a paragraph text frame.
2 Click Text > Fit text to frame.

Adding and formatting text

261

If you fit text to linked paragraph text frames, the application adjusts the size
of text in all of the linked text frames. For more information about linking
frames, see Combining and linking paragraph text frames on page 264.

To add columns to paragraph text frames

1 Select a paragraph text frame.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Columns tab.
4 Type a value in the Number of columns box.
5 Specify the settings and options you want.

To add a drop cap

1 Select the paragraph text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Effects tab.
4 Choose Drop cap from the Effect type list box.
5 Click one of the following icons:
Dropped wraps text around the drop cap
Hanging indent offsets the drop cap from the body of text
You can also
Specify the number of lines beside a drop cap

Type a value in the Dropped lines box.

Specify the distance between the drop cap

and the body of text

Type a value in the Distance from text box.

Remove drop caps

Choose None from the Effect type list box.

To add bullets
1 Select the paragraph text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Effects tab.
4 Choose Bullet from the Effect type list box.
262

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

5 Choose a font from the Font list box.

6 Open the Symbol picker, and click a symbol.
7 Click one of the following icons:
Bulleted wraps text around the bullet
Hanging indent adds a bullet with a hanging indent. Type a value in the
Position box to specify the distance the bullet is indented from the paragraph
text frame.
You can also
Change the bullet size

Type a value in the Size box.

Raise or lower a bullet

Type a value in the Baseline shift box.

Change the bullet symbol

Type the bullets ASCII number in the

Symbol # box.

Remove bullets

Choose None from the Effect type list box.

Change the amount of space between the

bullet and text

Click the Paragraph tab and type the same

value in the First line and Left boxes.

Bullets are inserted at the beginning of each new line that is preceded by a
return.

To add a tab
1 Select the paragraph text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Tabs tab.
4 Click the Plus (+) button.
5 Click the new cell in the Tabs column, and type a value.
You can also add, move, or delete tabs on the horizontal ruler at the top of the
drawing window. Click to add a tab, drag a tab marker to move it, and drag a
tab marker off the ruler to delete it. For information about rulers, see Using
the rulers on page 237.

Adding and formatting text

263

To indent paragraph text

1 Select the paragraph text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Paragraph tab.
4 Type values in the following boxes in the Indents area:
First line indents the first line of paragraph text
Left creates a hanging indent in which all but the first line of text is indented
Right indents the right side of paragraph text
You can remove indents by typing 0 in the First Line, Left, and Right boxes.
You can indent an entire paragraph by typing the same value in the First line
and Left boxes.

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically

1 Select the paragraph text frame or a paragraph.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Paragraph tab.
4 Click Hyphenation settings, and enable the Automatic hyphenation check box.
5 Specify the settings you want.
Hyphenation can be used for any of the writing tool languages you have
installed. For more information about language modules, see Working with
languages in the Help.

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

You can combine paragraph text frames. You can also break paragraph text frames apart
into subcomponents columns, paragraphs, bullets, lines, words, and characters.
Every time you break apart a text frame, the subcomponents are placed into separate
paragraph text frames.
Linking paragraph text frames directs the flow of text from one text frame to another if
the amount of text exceeds the size of the first text frame. If you shrink or enlarge a
linked paragraph text frame, or change the size of the text, the amount of text in the
264

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

next text frame is automatically adjusted. You can link paragraph text frames before or
after you type text.
You cannot link artistic text. However, you can link a paragraph text frame to an open
or closed object. When you link a paragraph text frame to an open object (for example,
a line), the text flows along the path of the line. Linking a text frame to a closed object
(for example, a rectangle) inserts a paragraph text frame and directs the flow of text
inside the object. If text exceeds the open or closed path, you can link the text to another
text frame or object.
After linking paragraph text frames, you can redirect the flow from one object or text
frame to another. When you select the text frame or object, a blue arrow indicates the
direction of the text flow. You can hide or display these arrows.
You can remove links between multiple paragraph text frames, and between paragraph
text frames and objects. When you have only two linked paragraph text frames and you
remove the link, the text flows into the remaining paragraph text frame. Removing a
link between paragraph text frames with a series of links redirects the flow of text into
the next paragraph text frame or object.
By default, Corel DESIGNER applies paragraph formatting such as columns, drop
caps, and bullets to only the selected paragraph text frames; however, you can change
your settings so that formatting is applied to all linked frames, or all selected and
subsequently linked frames. For example, if you apply columns to the text in one text
frame, you can choose whether you want all of the linked frames to also be formatted
in columns. For information about paragraph formatting, see Formatting paragraph
text on page 261.

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

1 Select a text frame.
If you are combining text frames, hold down Shift, and select subsequent text
frames using the Pick tool .
2 Click Arrange, and click one of the following:
Combine
Break paragraph text apart
Text frames with envelopes, text fitted to a path, and linked frames cannot be
combined.

Adding and formatting text

265

If you select a text frame with columns first, the combined text frame will have
columns.

To link paragraph text frames and objects

1 Select the starting text frame using the Text tool

2 Click the Text flow tab at the bottom of the text frame or object.
If the frame cannot hold all the text, the tab contains an arrow .
3 When the pointer changes to a Link to pointer
which you want to continue the text flow.

, click the frame or object into

If a text frame is linked, the Text flow tab changes , and a blue arrow
indicates the direction of text flow. To hide or display these indicators, see To
choose paragraph text frame formatting options on page 266.
To link paragraph text frames successfully, the text frames cannot be
automatically sized. For information, see Adding and selecting text on
page 245.

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

1 Using the Pick tool , click the Text flow tab at the bottom of the text frame
or object from which you want to change the link.
2 Select the new text frame or object into which you want the text flow to continue.

To remove links between text frames or objects

1 Click the text frame to which another text frame is linked.
2 Click Arrange > Break paragraph text apart.
The linked text frames can be on different pages.

To choose paragraph text frame formatting options

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph.
If you want to hide or display the text flow indicators, disable or enable the Show
linking of text frames check box.
266

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

3 Enable one of the following options:

To all linked frames applies paragraph formatting to selected frames and all
frames linked to them
To selected frames only applies paragraph formatting to only the selected
frames
To selected and subsequent frames applies paragraph formatting to
selected frames and any frames later linked to these frames

Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

You can change the shape of text by wrapping paragraph text around an object, artistic
text, or a paragraph text frame. You can wrap text using contour or square wrapping
styles. The contour wrapping styles follow the curve of the object. The square wrapping
styles follow the bounding box of the object. You can also adjust the amount of space
between paragraph text and the object or text, as well as remove any wrapping style
you apply.

To wrap paragraph text around an object or text

1 Select the object or text around which you want to wrap text.
2 Click Window > Property manager.
3 In the Property manager docker, click the General tab.
4 Choose a wrapping style from the Wrap paragraph text list box.
If you want to change the amount of space between wrapped text and the object or
text, change the value in the Text wrap offset box.
5 Click the Text tool
text.

, and drag to create a paragraph text frame over the object or

6 Type text in the paragraph text frame.

You can wrap existing paragraph text around a selected object by applying a
wrapping style to the object and dragging the paragraph text frame over the
object.

To remove a wrapping style

1 Select the wrapped text or the object it wraps.

Adding and formatting text

267

2 Click Window > Property manager.

3 Choose None from the Wrap paragraph text list box.

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

You can embed a graphic object or bitmap in text. The graphic object or bitmap is
treated as a text character. As a result, you can apply formatting options according to
the type of text in which you embed the graphic object. You can also remove an
embedded object from text, after which the object returns to its original state.
You can add special characters to text as text objects or as graphic objects. When you
add special characters as text, you can format the characters as you do the text. When
you add special characters as graphic objects, the characters are curves. Consequently,
you can edit them as you would other graphic objects.

To embed a graphic object in text

1 Select a graphic object.
2 Click Edit, and click one of the following:
Cut
Copy
3 Using the Text tool

, click where you want to embed the graphic object.

4 Click Edit > Paste.

To remove an embedded object from text

1 Select an embedded object using the Text tool

2 Click Edit > Cut.

3 Click the Pick tool

, and click outside the text object.

4 Click Edit > Paste.

To add a special character as a text object

1 Using the Text tool

, click where you want to add the special character.

2 Click Text > Insert character.

3 Choose a font from the Font list box.
4 Double-click a character in the list.
268

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

The size of the character is determined by the font size of the text.

To add a special character as a graphic object

1 Click Text > Insert character.
2 Choose a font from the Font list box.
3 Type a value in the Character size box.
4 Drag a special character from the list to the drawing page.
The special character is inserted with the default graphic style.

Inserting special characters and spaces

You can insert special characters and spaces using the Insert formatting codes docker.
This docker ensures that you always have access to specific characters and spaces such
as em dashes and nonbreaking spaces. The following special characters and spaces are
available in the Insert formatting codes docker:
em dash

en space

optional hyphen

en dash

1/4 em space

nonbreaking space

em space

nonbreaking hyphen column/frame break

To insert other special characters, use the Insert character docker. For more
information, see Embedding graphics and adding special characters on page 268.

To insert a special character or space

1 Using the Text tool
character or space.

, click to place your cursor where you want to insert a

2 Click Text > Insert formatting codes.

3 In the Insert formatting codes docker, choose a character or space from the Code
list.
4 Click Insert.

Adding and formatting text

269

The Insert formatting codes docker is disabled when the Text tool is not
active. When the Text tool is activated, the Keystroke list in the docker is
updated to reflect the latest shortcut keys.
All shortcut keys in the Insert formatting codes docker are customizable. For
information about customizing shortcut keys, see To assign a keyboard
shortcut to a command on page 376. Special characters and spaces can be
found in the Text commands category.
You can insert special characters not listed in the Insert formatting codes
docker by clicking Text > Insert character and clicking the character you
want to insert in the Insert character docker.
You can also insert a special character or space from the Insert formatting
codes docker by double-clicking the character or space you want from the
Code list.

Displaying nonprinting characters

You can specify which nonprinting characters, such as spaces and tabs, are displayed.
For example, if you choose to display nonprinting characters, each space you add
appears as a tiny black dot. When enabled, nonprinting characters are displayed only
when you add or edit text.

To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, click Text.
3 In the Non-printing character display list, enable the check boxes you want.

To display nonprinting characters

Click Text > Show Nonprinting characters.
You can also display or hide nonprinting characters in the drawing window by
clicking the Text tool , and clicking the Nonprinting characters button
on the property bar.
270

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also display nonprinting characters in the Edit text dialog box by
clicking the Nonprinting characters button .

Adding and formatting text

271

Working with Asian text

If you are running Corel DESIGNER on an Asian operating system, or if you have
Asian language support installed on another operating system, you can take advantage
of the Asian text formatting capabilities available with Corel DESIGNER.
In this section, youll learn about
formatting Asian text
using Asian line-breaking rules

Formatting Asian text

Asian character input is only supported in Corel DESIGNER when using an Asian
operating system or when language support is installed on a non-Asian operating
system. You can choose a default font and text orientation (either horizontal or vertical)
when typing text on an operating system that has Asian language support. When you
type artistic or paragraph text, the program uses a default artistic or paragraph text
style.
You can also mix Asian text and other scripts in one text object and set the spacing
between the two. You can change the font properties of one or both languages in a block
of Latin or Asian text.

To choose a default font for Asian text

1 Click the Text tool

2 Choose an input method from the Input Method Editor (IME) on the status bar.
3 Choose a font from the Font list list box on the property bar.

Working with Asian text

273

To choose a text orientation

To

Do the following

Choose a default text orientation

Click a blank space in the drawing window,

click Text > Format text, click the
Paragraph tab, and choose either
Horizontal or Vertical from the
Orientation list box.

Change the text orientation

Using the Pick tool, select the text and click

Text > Format text. Click the Paragraph
tab, and choose either Horizontal or
Vertical from the Orientation list box.

The default orientation for Asian text is horizontal.

When you change the text orientation from horizontal to vertical, underlines
become left lines and overlines become right lines.
If you have Asian text support installed with your operating system, you can
also change text orientation on the Text tool property bar.

To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text

1 Click Text > Format text.
2 Click the Paragraph tab.
3 Type a value in the Language box.
The inter-language spacing is based on the percentage of a standard space. For
example, two spaces are represented by typing a value of 200.

To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text

1 Select the text.
2 Click Text > Format text.
3 Click the Character tab, and choose one of the following from the Script list box:
Latin
Asian
274

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

4 Change any font properties.

The text orientation setting applies to the entire text object. You cannot mix
orientations in one text object.

Using Asian line-breaking rules

Corel DESIGNER includes line-breaking rules for use with Asian text when you have
an Asian operating system. For most Asian languages, a line of text can break between
any two characters, with a few exceptions. Some characters cannot appear at the end of
a line. These characters are referred to as leading characters. Other characters
referred to as following characters cannot appear at the beginning of a line. The
line breaks either after the following character or before the character that precedes the
following character. Still others referred to as overflow characters are not
wrapped but are, instead, allowed to extend beyond the right or bottom margin.
To enforce one or more of the line-breaking rules, you can enable any of the rules. To
customize the rules, you can add or remove characters. You can also reset the rules to
the default.

To disable or enable line-breaking rules

1 Click Text > Format text.
2 Click the Rules tab.
3 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Leading characters ensures that a line does not break after any of the
characters in the list
Following characters ensures that a line does not break before any of the
characters in the list
Overflow characters ensures that the characters in the list are allowed to
extend beyond the margin of the line
You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system and have
paragraph text selected to view the Rules tab.

To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule

1 Click Text > Format text.
Working with Asian text

275

2 Click the Rules tab.

3 Type or remove the characters in the appropriate box.
You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system and have
paragraph text selected to view the Rules tab.

To reset a line-breaking rule to the default

1 Click Text > Format text.
2 Click the Rules tab.
3 Click the Default button beside a rule.
You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system and have
paragraph text selected to view the Rules tab.

276

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Managing fonts
Corel DESIGNER allows you to substitute fonts.
In this section, youll learn about
substituting unavailable fonts

Substituting unavailable fonts

You can use PANOSE font matching to access a list of fonts that can be used as
substitutes for fonts used in a drawing but not installed on your computer.
You can set font matching options. You can use font matching in text only, in both text
and text styles, or you can turn off font matching. With font matching, you can accept
the default substitute font, or you can choose another font to substitute for the missing
font. You can apply the substitution temporarily or permanently to the active drawing.
You can build a list of exceptions to font substitutions. Exceptions override default font
substitutions. You can also specify font equivalents. This is useful when sharing
drawings across the two platforms because sometimes the same font has a different
spelling for its name on each platform.

To set font matching options

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.
3 Click PANOSE font matching.
4 In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, enable one of the
following options:
Never use font matching applies default font substitutions for both text in
the document and text styles
Use font matching for text lets you select font substitutions for text in the
document and applies default font substitutions for text styles
Managing fonts

277

 Use font matching for text and styles lets you select font substitutions for
both text in the document and text styles

To substitute a missing font

1 Open a drawing.
2 Enable one of the following options:
Show fonts in the same code page displays only missing fonts that support
the code page of the active drawing
Show all fonts displays all missing fonts
3 In the Font matching results dialog box, choose a missing font.
If you want to override the default substitution, choose a font from the bottom list
box.
4 Enable one of the following options:
Temporary replaces the missing font with the substitution, but only in the
current session of the drawing
Permanent permanently makes the font substitution in the document. When
you save the file and reopen it, the new font automatically displays.
In order for the Font matching results dialog box to display, the drawing that
you open must contain fonts that arent installed on your computer.

To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.
3 Click PANOSE font matching.
4 In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, click Exceptions.
5 In the PANOSE font matching exceptions dialog box, click Add.
6 In the Add matching exception dialog box, type the name of the font you want to
replace in the Missing font box.
7 Choose a font that is installed on your computer from the Substituted font list.

To match more Windows and Macintosh fonts

1 Click Tools > Options.
278

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.

3 Click PANOSE font matching.
4 In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, click Spellings.
5 Click Add.
6 Choose a Windows font name from the Windows name list box.
7 Type the Macintosh spelling for the font in the Macintosh name list box.

Managing fonts

279

Working with bitmaps

You can convert a vector graphic to a bitmap. Also, you can import and crop bitmaps.
You can also add color masks, special effects, and change the color and tone of the
images.
In this section, youll learn about
converting vector graphics to bitmaps
adding bitmaps
cropping and editing bitmaps
working with colors in bitmaps
applying special effects to bitmaps
applying color and tone effects
transforming color and tone effects
removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps

Converting vector graphics to bitmaps

When you convert a vector graphic to a bitmap, you can apply special effects in the
Corel DESIGNER application that are unavailable to vector graphics or objects.
As you convert the vector graphic, you can select the color mode of the bitmap. A color
mode determines the number and kind of colors that make up the bitmap, so that file
size is also affected.
You can also determine settings such as the aliasing, background transparency, and color
profile, as you convert a vector graphic to a bitmap.
For more information about color modes, see Changing the color mode of bitmaps on
page 293.

Working with bitmaps

281

To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap

1 Select an object.
2 Click Bitmaps > Convert to bitmap.
3 Choose a color mode from the Color list box.
4 Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box.
5 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Anti-aliasing smooths the edges of the bitmap
Transparent background makes the background of the bitmap transparent
Apply ICC profile applies the International Color Consortium profiles to
standardize colors across devices and color spaces
Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a
background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background.

Adding bitmaps
You can import a bitmap into a drawing either directly or by linking it to an external
file.

To import a bitmap
1 Click File > Import.
2 Choose the folder where the bitmap is stored.
3 Select the file.
If you want to link the image to the drawing, enable the Link bitmap externally
check box.
4 Click Import.
5 Click where you want to place the bitmap.
If you want to center the image on the drawing page, press Enter.
Ensure that All file formats is chosen from the Files of type list box when you
import an image.
The status bar provides information about the bitmap, including color mode,
size, and resolution after it has been placed on the page.
282

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can import a bitmap in its original size by pressing Spacebar when you
click the Import button.
Linking to a bitmap results in a smaller file size than importing the bitmap
directly.

Cropping and editing bitmaps

After you add a bitmap to a drawing, you can crop, resample, and resize the bitmap.
Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. When you resample a bitmap, you can
change the image size, the resolution, or both by adding or removing pixels. For
example, if you make an image larger without resampling, you can lose details because
the images pixels are spread over a greater area. By resampling, you can add pixels to
preserve more detail from the original image. Resizing an image maintains the same
number of pixels in a smaller or larger area. For example, you can lose details when you
make an image larger without resampling because the images pixels are spread over a
greater area. Upsampling adds pixels to maintain some of the originals details.

To crop a bitmap
1 Click the Shape tool

2 Select a bitmap.
3 Drag the bitmaps corner nodes to the shape you want.
If you want to add a node, double-click the node boundary by using the Shape tool
where you want the node to display.
4 Click Bitmaps > Crop bitmap.
You cannot crop a bitmap comprised of more than one object.
You can also crop a selected bitmap after you drag the bitmaps corner nodes
by clicking the Crop bitmap button on the property bar.

To resample a bitmap
1 Select a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Resample.
Working with bitmaps

283

3 In the Resolution area, type values in any of the following boxes:

Horizontal
Vertical
If you want to maintain the proportions of the bitmap, enable the Maintain aspect
ratio check box.
If you want to maintain the file size, enable the Maintain original size check box.
You can also resample a selected bitmap by clicking the Resample button
on the property bar.
Enable the Anti-alias check box to minimize the jagged appearance of curves.

To resize a bitmap
1 Select a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Resample.
3 Choose a unit of measure from the list box beside the Width and Height boxes.
4 Type values in any of the following boxes:
Width
Height
If you want to minimize the jagged appearance of curves, enable the Anti-alias
check box.
You can maintain the proportions of the bitmap by enabling the Maintain
aspect ratio check box and typing a value in either the Width or Height box.
You can also resample the bitmap as a percentage of its original size by typing
values in the % boxes.

Working with colors in bitmaps

Corel DESIGNER lets you change colors in monochrome images, hide and show colors,
and mask colors.
Monochrome bitmaps have two colors: black and white. You can replace the black and
white pixels with any color on a color palette.

284

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can hide and display selected colors by masking them. Hiding colors in a bitmap
lets objects or backgrounds show through the image. Hiding a color can also alter the
apparent shape of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap shows a person on a black
background, you can hide the background so that the bitmap appears to take on the
shape of the person rather than a rectangular shape. Also, hiding colors in bitmaps can
increase the speed at which objects are rendered on the screen. You can also display
certain colors in a bitmap to change the image's appearance or see where a particular
color has been applied. You can mask as many as 10 colors in a bitmap.
Color masking also lets you change selected colors without altering the other colors in
an image. You can also save a bitmap color mask to a file and open the file for future use.

To color a monochrome bitmap

1 Select a bitmap using the Pick tool

2 Right-click a color on the color palette to change the color of the foreground
(black) pixels.
3 Click a color on the color palette to change the color of the background (white)
pixels.

To hide or display a color in a bitmap

1 Select the bitmap using the Pick tool

2 Click Bitmaps > Bitmap color mask.

3 Enable one of the following options:
Hide colors
Show colors
4 Enable the check box next to the channel that you want to hide or display.
5 Move the Tolerance slider to set the color tolerance for the color.
6 Click the Color selector button

7 Click the bitmap, and click the color that you want to hide or display.
8 Click Apply.
Higher tolerance levels target a broader range of colors around the color you
select. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance,
Corel DESIGNER hides or displays pastel blue, electric blue, and so on.

Working with bitmaps

285

To open a bitmap color mask

1 Click Bitmaps > Bitmap color mask.
2 Click the Open mask button

3 Choose the folder where the color mask file is stored.

4 From the Files of type list box, choose a file type.
5 Double-click the file.
Files containing bitmap color mask have the filename extension .ini.

To change a masked color

1 Click Bitmaps > Bitmap color mask.
2 Choose a color from the list of masked colors.
3 Click the Edit color button

4 Use the controls in the Select color dialog box to edit the color.
You can also
Save a bitmap color mask

Click the Save mask button . Choose the

folder where you want to save the current
color mask. Type a name for the file in the
File name list box. Click Save.

You can also change a masked color by clicking the Color selector button
selecting another color from the bitmap, and clicking Apply.

Applying special effects to bitmaps

You can apply a wide range of special effects to bitmaps, such as three-dimensional (3D)
and artistic effects.
Special effect type

Description

3D

Lets you create the illusion of threedimensional depth. These effects include
embossing, page curl, and perspective.

286

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Special effect type

Description

Art strokes

Lets you apply hand-painted techniques.

The art stroke media and styles include
crayon, impressionist, pastels, watercolor,
and pen and ink.

Blur

Lets you blur an image to simulate gradual

change, movement, or speckling. These
effects include Gaussian blur, motion blur,
and zoom.

Camera

Lets you simulate the effect produced by

diffusion filters of a diffusion lens

Color transform

Lets you create photographic illusions by

using color reduction and replacements.
These effects include halftones, psychedelic,
and solarizing.

Contour

Lets you highlight and enhance the edges of

an image. The contour effects include edge
tracing and highlighting.

Creative

Lets you apply various textures and shapes to

an image. The creative effects include fabric,
glass block, crystal fragments, vortex, and
stained glass.

Distort

Lets you distort image surfaces. These effects

include ripples, blocks, swirl, and tile.

Noise

Lets you modify the graininess of an image.

The noise effects include adding noise,
applying dust and scratch, and diffusing to
change an images granularity.

Sharpen

Lets you create a sharpening effect to focus

and enhance edges. The sharpen effects
include accentuating edge detail and
sharpening smooth areas.

Working with bitmaps

287

Special effect type

Description

Plug-ins

Lets you apply effects from a third-party

filter to bitmaps in Corel DESIGNER. An
installed plug-in appears at the bottom of
the Bitmaps menu.

Adding plug-in filters to Corel DESIGNER provides additional features and effects that
you can use to edit images. You can add plug-in filters, and you can remove them when
you no longer need them.
Corel DESIGNER automatically inflates a bitmap to make a special effect cover the
entire image. You can disable the automatic inflate and manually specify how much you
want to inflate the bitmap.

To apply a special effect

1 Select a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps, choose a special effect type, and click an effect.
3 Adjust any special effect settings.

To add a plug-in filter

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Plug-ins.
3 Click Add.
4 Choose a folder containing a plug-in.
To remove a plug-in filter, click a plug-in folder from the Plug-in folders list,
and click Remove.

To inflate a bitmap manually

1 Select a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Inflate bitmap > Manually inflate bitmap.
3 Type a number representing the pixel amount to inflate to in the Width and
Height boxes or a percentage amount to inflate the bitmap in the Percentage
boxes. Use the original bitmap size as reference.
288

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

4 Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box to inflate the bitmap proportionally.
To automatically inflate the bitmap to cover the entire image, enable the Auto
inflate bitmap check box.

Applying color and tone effects

Corel DESIGNER lets you apply color and tone to a bitmap. For example, you can
replace colors, shift them between different color modes and adjust the brightness,
lightness, and intensity of colors.
By applying color and tone effects, you can restore detail lost in shadows or highlights,
remove color casts, correct underexposure or overexposure, and generally improve the
quality of the bitmaps.
You can apply the following color and tone effects.
Effect

Description

Contrast enhancement

Lets you adjust the tone, color, and contrast

of a bitmap while preserving shadow and
highlight detail. An interactive histogram
lets you shift or compress brightness values
to printable limits. The histogram can also
be adjusted by sampling values from the
bitmap.

Local equalization

Lets you enhance contrast near edges to

reveal detail in both light and dark regions.
You can set the height and width around the
region to accentuate contrast.

Sample/Target balance

Lets you adjust color values in a bitmap with

sample colors taken from the image. You can
choose sample colors from the dark,
midtone, and light ranges of an image and
apply target colors to each of the sample
colors.

Working with bitmaps

289

Effect

Description

Tone curve

Lets you perform color corrections precisely,

by controlling individual pixel values. By
changing pixel brightness values, you can
make changes to shadows, midtones, and
highlights.

Auto equalize

Performs a flat equalization of the shadows,

midtones, and highlights in an image by
automatically redistributing the significant
pixel values throughout the tonal range

Brightness-contrast-intensity

Lets you adjust the brightness of all colors

and the difference between light and dark
areas

Color balance

Lets you add cyan or red, magenta or green,

and yellow or blue to selected tones in a
bitmap

Gamma

Lets you accentuate detail in low contrast

areas without affecting shadows or
highlights

Hue-Saturation-Lightness

Lets you adjust the color channels in a

bitmap and change the position of colors in
the spectrum. This effect allows you to
change colors and their richness, as well as
the percentage of white in an image.

Selective color

Lets you change color by changing the

percentage of spectrum CMYK process
colors from the red, yellow, green, cyan,
blue, and magenta color spectrums in a
bitmap. For example, decreasing the
percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum
results in a color shift toward yellow.

290

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Effect

Description

Replace colors

Lets you replace one bitmap color with

another color. A color mask is created to
define the color to be replaced. Depending
on the range you set, you can replace one
color or shift an entire bitmap from one color
range to another. You can set the hue,
saturation, and lightness for the new color.

Desaturate

Lets you reduce the saturation of each color

in a bitmap to zero, remove the hue
component, and convert each color to its
grayscale equivalent. This creates a grayscale
image without changing the color mode.

Channel mixer

Lets you mix color channels to balance the

colors of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap
has too much red, you can adjust the red
channel in an RGB bitmap to improve image
quality.

To apply a color or tone effect

1 Select a bitmap.
2 Click Effects > Adjust, and click a color or tone effect.
3 Specify any settings.

Transforming color and tone effects

You can transform the color and tone of an object to produce a special effect. For
example, you can create an image that looks like a photographic negative or flatten the
appearance of an image.
The color and tone transform effects are
Deinterlace lets you remove lines from scanned or interlaced images
Invert lets you reverse the colors of an object. Inverting an object creates the
appearance of a photographic negative.
Posterize lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an image. Posterize
removes gradations and creates larger areas of flat color.
Working with bitmaps

291

To transform a color and tone effect

1 Select a bitmap.
2 Click Effects > Transform.
3 Click a transform effect:
Deinterlace sets the effect level
Invert inverts the color and tone automatically
Posterize sets the effect level

Removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps

You can quickly improve the appearance of a bitmap by removing dust and scratch
marks. The dust and scratch filter works by eliminating the contrast between pixels that
exceed the contrast threshold you set. You can set a radius to determine how many
pixels are affected by the changes. The settings you choose depend on the size of the
blemish and the area surrounding it. For example, if you have a white scratch that is 1
or 2 pixels wide on a dark background, you can set a radius of 2 or 3 pixels and set the
contrast threshold higher than if the same scratch was on a light background.

To remove dust and scratch marks from a bitmap

1 Click Effects > Correction > Dust and scratch.
2 Move the following sliders:
Radius lets you set the range of pixels used to produce the effect. Set the
radius as low as possible to retain image detail.
Threshold lets you set the amount of noise reduction. Set the threshold as
high as possible to retain image detail.

292

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Changing the color mode of

bitmaps
Changing an image to another color mode, such as RGB, CMYK or Grayscale,
changes a bitmaps color structure.
In this section, youll learn about
changing the color mode of bitmaps
changing bitmaps to black-and-white images
changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode
changing bitmaps to duotones

Changing the color mode of bitmaps

The colors of the images that you work with in Corel DESIGNER are based on color
modes. Color modes define the color characteristics of images and are described by their
component colors. The CMYK color mode is composed of cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black values; the RGB color mode is composed of red, green, and blue values.
Although you may not be able to see the difference between an image in the CMYK
color mode and an image in the RGB color mode on screen, the images are quite
different. For the same image dimensions, an RGB image has a smaller file size than a
CMYK image and the RGB color space, or gamut, can display more colors. Therefore,
images intended for the Web or desktop printers, which require accurate color fidelity,
are generally in RGB mode. Where accurate print reproduction is needed, such as on a
commercial printing press, images are generally created in CMYK mode. Paletted color
images attempt to preserve color fidelity while reducing the file size, making them ideal
for on-screen uses.
Each time you convert an image, you may lose color information. For this reason, you
should save an edited image before you change it to a different color mode. For more
information about color modes, see Working with color on page 175.
Corel DESIGNER supports the following color modes:
Black and White (1-bit)
Changing the color mode of bitmaps

293

Duotone (8-bit)
Grayscale (8-bit)
Paletted (8-bit)
RGB Color (24-bit)
Lab Color (24-bit)
CMYK Color (32-bit)

To change the color mode of a bitmap

1 Click a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Mode, and click a color mode.
The current mode of the selected bitmap is not available in the menu.

Changing bitmaps to black-and-white images

You can change any image to a black-and-white image. In addition to conversion
settings such as threshold, screen type, and intensity, there are seven conversion options
that affect how the converted images will look.
Conversion
Line art

Produces a high-contrast, black-and-white

image. Colors with a grayscale value lower
than the threshold value that you set change
to black, while colors with a grayscale value
higher than the threshold value change to
white.

Ordered

Organizes the gray levels into repeating

geometric patterns of black and white pixels.
Solid colors are emphasized and image edges
are hard. This option is best suited for
uniform colors.

294

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Conversion
Halftone

Creates different shades of gray by varying

the pattern of black and white pixels in an
image. You can choose the screen type, angle
for the halftone, lines per unit, and the unit
of measure.

Cardinality-Distribution

Creates a textured look by applying a

calculation and distributing the result to the
screen.

Jarvis

Applies the Jarvis algorithm to the screen.

This form of error diffusion is suitable for
photographic images.

Stucki

Applies the Stucki algorithm to the screen.

This form of error diffusion is suitable for
photographic images.

Floyd-Steinberg

Applies the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to

the screen. This form of error diffusion is
suitable for photographic images.

To change a bitmap to a black-and-white image

1 Click a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Mode > Black-and-white (1-bit).
3 Choose an option from the Conversion list box.
4 Move the Intensity slider.
If you want to view different parts of the image, you can drag the image in the
Preview window.
The Intensity slider is not available for the Halftone conversion option.

Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

The paletted color mode, also called indexed color mode, is sometimes used for images
on the World Wide Web. When you convert an image to the paletted color mode, a
Changing the color mode of bitmaps

295

fixed color value is assigned to each pixel. These values are stored in a compact color
table, or palette containing up to 256 colors. As a result, the paletted color mode image
contains less data than a 24 bit color mode image, and it has a smaller file size.
Conversion to paletted color mode works best on images that have a limited range of
colors.
Choosing, editing, and saving a color palette
When you change an image to the paletted color mode, you can use a predefined
palette, or you can customize a color palette by replacing individual colors.
Saving conversion settings
After you choose a color palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for changing
an image to the paletted color mode, you can save the settings as a conversion preset
that you can use with other images. You can add as many conversion presets as you
want.
The color palette you use is called the processed color palette. It can be saved for use
with other images.
For more information about the predefined color palettes available for the paletted color
mode, see Palette types on page 297. For more information about creating and
opening custom color palettes, see Creating custom color palettes on page 180.
Dithering
Changing images to the paletted color mode lets you use dithering to enhance color
information. Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels
of a specific color. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates the
appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the color palette.
You can use two types of dithering: ordered dithering and error diffusion. Ordered
dithering approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are
emphasized and edges appear harder. Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making
edges and colors softer. Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg are conversion options that
provide error diffusion.
The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than the error diffusion options
(Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg) but is less accurate.

296

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Specifying a range-sensitivity color

You can change an image to the paletted color mode and specify a focus color and a
range sensitivity for the focus color, so that the focus color and colors that fall within
the range settings are included in the processed color palette. You can also specify how
much emphasis to place on the range sensitivity. Because the palette has a maximum of
256 colors, emphasizing a focus color reduces the number of colors that fall outside the
range sensitivity.

Palette types
The table below outlines available palette types.
Palette type

Description

Uniform

Provides a range of 256 colors with equal

parts of red, green, and blue

Standard VGA

Provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette

Adaptive

Provides colors original to the image and

preserves the individual colors (the entire
color spectrum) in the image

Optimized

Creates a color palette based on the highest

percentage of colors in the image. You can
also specify a range-sensitivity color for the
color palette. This is the most common color
palette for photographic images.

Black Body

Contains colors that are based on

temperature. For example, black may
represent cold temperatures, while red,
orange, yellow, and white may represent hot
temperatures.

Grayscale

Provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from

black to white

System

Provides the predefined palette of colors used

by the operating system

Changing the color mode of bitmaps

297

Palette type

Description

Web-safe

Provides a predefined palette of 216 nondithered colors that will display the same on
the Microsoft Internet Explorer and
Netscape Navigator browsers. This palette
is not recommended for use with
photographs and only benefits users with
older computers.

Custom

Lets you add colors to create a customized

color palette

To change an image to the paletted color mode

1 Click a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Mode > Paletted (8-bit).
3 Click the Options tab.
4 Choose a color palette type from the Palette list box.
5 Choose an option from the Dithering list box.
6 Move the Dithering intensity slider.
If you want to save the conversion settings as a preset, click the Add preset button,
and type a name in the Save preset box.
You can achieve better color fidelity by choosing the palette you want to use
when you change an image to a paletted bitmap or when you export a GIF or
PNG. For example, the standard color palette provides more colors than
necessary for an image with a limited range of colors, but you can choose an
optimized palette to ensure that color representation is accurate.
You can choose a custom color palette by clicking Open, locating the color
palette file you want, and double-clicking the filename.
You can load preset conversion settings by choosing a preset from the Preset
list box.

298

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To create a custom processed color palette

1 Click a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Mode > Paletted (8-bit).
3 Click the Processed palette tab.
4 Click a color, and click the Edit button.
5 In the Color table, specify the color you want, and click Edit color.
6 Edit the color, and click OK.
7 Click the Save palette as button

to save a new palette.

8 Choose the disk and folder where you want to store the color palette.
9 Type a name in the Name box, and click Save.

To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity

1 Click a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Mode > Paletted (8-bit).
3 Click the Options tab.
4 Choose Optimized from the Palette list box.
5 Enable the Color range sensitivity to check box.
6 Click the Eyedropper tool

, and click a color in the image.

7 Click the Range sensitivity tab.

8 Move the range sensitivity sliders.
If you want to preview the color palette, click the Processed palette tab.

Changing bitmaps to duotones

To convert an image to a duotone, you change a bitmap to the grayscale color mode and
enhance it using one to four additional colors, giving the image greater tonal depth.
The following four variations of the color mode correspond to the number of additional
inks:
Monotone a grayscale image colored with a single tone
Duotone a grayscale image colored with two tones. In most cases, one is black
and the other is colored.

Changing the color mode of bitmaps

299

 Tritone a grayscale image colored with three tones. In most cases, one is black
and the other two are colored.
Quadtone a grayscale image colored with four tones. In most cases, one is black
and the other three are colored.
Adjusting tone curves
When you change an image to a duotone, a tone curve grid that represents the dynamic
tone curves that are used throughout the conversion is displayed. The horizontal plane
(x-axis) displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is
white). The vertical plane (y-axis) indicates the intensity of a color (from 0 to 100
percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values. For example, a grayscale
pixel with a color value of 25 is printed with a 25-percent tint of the color. By adjusting
the tone curves, you can control the color and intensity of the tone that is added to an
image.
Saving and loading inks
You can save an adjusted duotone tone curve and ink settings and then load them for
use with other bitmaps.
Specifying how overprint colors display
When you change an image to a duotone, you can specify the colors to overprint when
you print an image. Overprint colors are used to preserve color integrity when inks
overlap. When you display the image, each color is applied on the screen in sequence,
creating a layered effect.
You can view all instances in which the colors you choose for the duotone conversion
overlap. Associated with each instance is the color that is produced by the overlap. You
can also choose new overprint colors to see how they overlap.
Duotones hold their color ink information when you save to EPS, PDF,
Corel DESIGNER (DES), and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file formats. Other file
formats dont support duotone images.

To change an image to a duotone

1 Click a bitmap.
2 Click Bitmaps > Mode > Duotone (8-bit).
3 Click the Curves tab.
4 Choose a duotone type from the Type list box.
300

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

5 Double-click an ink color in the Type window.

6 In the Select color dialog box, choose a color, and click OK.
If you want to adjust the colors tone curve, click the ink tone curve on the grid to
add a node, and drag the node to adjust the percentage of color at that point on the
curve.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each ink color you want to use.
You can also
Display all the ink tone curves on the grid.

Enable the Show all check box.

Save the ink settings

Click Save. Choose the disk and folder where

you want to save the file, and type a filename
in the Name box.

Specify how overprint colors display

Click the Overprint tab, and enable the Use

overprint check box. Double-click the color
you want to edit, and choose a new color.

You can load preset ink colors by clicking Load, locating the file in which the
ink settings are stored, and double-clicking the filename.

Changing the color mode of bitmaps

301

Creating Web-enabled objects

Corel DESIGNER lets you create Web-enabled objects for optimum viewing in
browsers. You can convert text to a Web-compatible format so that it can be edited in
a browser, and create interactive rollovers from objects.
In this section, youll learn about
optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web
creating rollovers
creating Web-compatible text
working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web

You can save objects and optimize them for the World Wide Web. When you optimize
an image for the Web, you can export to a GIF, JPEG, PNG 8-bit, and PNG 24-bit file
type, choose a Web preset, and compare the previewed results. The Web presets are
optimized for color, dithering, compression, and smoothing, depending on the file type
you choose. You can compare up to four file types by viewing their download speed,
image quality, file size, color range, and compression size as well as by panning and
zooming in the image. You can also add and delete Web presets of your own.

To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format

1 Click File > Publish to the Web > Web image optimizer.
2 Choose a speed from the Connection speed list box.
3 Choose one of the following pane display options:
Single pane
Double-vertical panes
Double-horizontal panes
Four panes

Creating Web-enabled objects

303

4 Keep one pane as the original image. In one or more of the other panes, choose
from the following list boxes below the preview window:
File type
Web preset
If no objects are selected, all of the active pages content is exported.
You can also
Edit preset settings for a single preview area

Click Advanced. In the Export dialog box,

customize the preset options. If you select
GIF or PNG8 file formats, you can modify
the color palette and settings in the Convert
to paletted dialog box.

Save the current configuration of settings for

a preview area

Click the Save settings button

for each
area where you want to save the settings.

Save a custom preset

Click Add

Delete a preset

Click Delete

Display file information below each preview

window

Click Preview.

Pan to another section of the image

Drag in the preview window of the original

image.

Zoom in the preview window

Choose a magnification from the Zoom

level list box.

.
.

You can compare file types with the original image by choosing Original from
the File type list box in one of the panes.

Creating rollovers
Rollovers are interactive objects that change in appearance when you click or point to
them. You can create rollovers using objects.
To create a rollover, you add the following rollover states:

304

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Normal the default state of a button when no mouse activity is associated with
the button
Over the state of a button when the pointer passes over it
Down the state of a clicked button
To edit the rollover states, you can view the rollover states and their properties.

Rollovers showing Normal (left), Over (center), and Down (right) states

To publish a rollover to the Internet, you must save the rollover to a Web-compatible
file format by publishing to HTML or to the Macromedia Flash (SWF) format. For
information on publishing to the Web, see Publishing to the Web on page 311. For
more information about creating and editing objects such as rollovers, see Working
with objects on page 97.

To create a rollover object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > Rollover > Create rollover.

To edit a rollover object

1 Select an object.
2 Click Effects > Rollover > Edit rollover.
3 Specify the attributes of each state.
4 Click Effects > Rollover > Finish editing rollover.

Creating Web-enabled objects

305

You cannot close a drawing in which you are editing a rollover. You must finish
editing first.
You can also edit a rollover object by clicking the Edit rollover button on the
Internet toolbar.

To view the rollover states

1 Click View > Toolbars > Internet.
If the Internet command is not available, click Tools > Options, click Command
bars in the Workspace, Customization list of categories, and ensure the Internet
check box is enabled.
2 On the Internet toolbar, choose between the Normal, Over, and Down states
from the Active rollover state list box.
You can preview a rollover objects states in the drawing page by clicking View
> Enable rollover. To quit previewing the rollover so that you can edit it,
click View > Enable rollover. You cannot undo while previewing a rollover.

To view rollover properties

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Click the page and layer where the rollover resides.
3 Click the rollover name, and expand the Normal, Over, and Down states.

Creating Web-compatible text

When you convert paragraph text to Web-compatible text, you can edit the text of the
published document in an HTML editor. If you are publishing a drawing to the Web as
HTML, you can change text font characteristics, including the font type, size, and style.
The Web-compatible text sizes, numbered 1 through 7, correspond to particular point
sizes between the 10-point and 48-point range. For more information about formatting
text, see Formatting paragraph text on page 261.
The default Web font style is used automatically unless you override it with another
font. If you choose to override it, the default font is used when visitors to your Web site
306

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

dont have the same font installed on their computers. The bold, italic, and underline
text styles are also available. You can apply uniform fills, but not outlines, to Webcompatible text.
Any non-Web-compatible text in your drawing is converted to bitmaps when you
publish your drawing to the World Wide Web as HTML.

To make text Web-compatible

To

Do the following

Change paragraph text to Web-compatible

text

Select the paragraph text. Click Text >

Make text Web compatible.

Make new text Web-compatible

Click Tools > Options. In the list of

categories, double-click Workspace, Text,
and click Paragraph. Enable the Make all
new paragraph text frames Web
compatible check box.

Ensure that the Web-compatible text does not intersect or overlap other
objects or extend beyond the boundaries of the drawing page; otherwise the
text will be converted to a bitmap, and it will lose its Internet properties.
Artistic text cannot be converted to Web-compatible text and is always treated
as a bitmap. However, you can convert it to paragraph text and then make it
Web compatible. For information on converting text, see Finding, editing,
and converting text on page 251.

Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

Corel DESIGNER lets you create bookmarks and hyperlinks in your Web document.
You can apply these to rollovers, bitmaps, and other objects.
Bookmarks
To create an internal link in an HTML file, you can assign a bookmark to text or to an
object. You can then assign a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to an object that links
to the bookmark. The object containing a URL has a hotspot, an area that activates a
hyperlink when clicked in a browser.

Creating Web-enabled objects

307

Hyperlinks
Within a document, hyperlinks connect to any object that has been assigned a
bookmark, or the hyperlink can connect to any document on the World Wide Web by
using that documents URL. You can also set a hotspot that follows the outline of the
object, or fills the objects bounding box.
Corel DESIGNER applies a crosshatch pattern to an object containing a hyperlink. You
can change the color of the crosshatch pattern as well as its background fill.
After you create hyperlinks, you can display and verify them.
Hyperlinks are maintained when you export files to CGM Version 4 profiles. For
information about exporting CGM files, see Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) in
the Help.

To assign a bookmark
1 Right-click an object, and click Properties.
2 Click the Internet tab

3 Choose Bookmark from the Behavior list box.

4 Type the name of the bookmark.

To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

1 Right-click an object, and click Properties.
2 Click the Internet tab

3 Choose URL from the Behavior list box.

4 Type a URL address.
You can also
Specify what frame will display when the
rollover is clicked

Choose a target frame from the Target

list box.

Add a description of the object for text-only

browsers

Type the text in the Alt comments text box.

Define the hotspot area

Choose Object shape or Objects

bounding box from the Define hotspot
using list box.

308

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

URLs to external Web sites must contain the http:// prefix. Other supported
protocols include mailto:, ftp:, and file:.
You can rename a bookmark and create a hyperlinked bookmarked object from
a document object by using the Internet bookmark manager docker.

To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

1 Click Window > Property manager.
2 Click the Internet tab

3 Open the Cross-hatch color picker

, and click a color.

4 Open the Background color picker

, and click a color.

If you choose a hyperlinked object first and then change the crosshatch and
background hotspot colors, the change applies to the selected object only. If
you change the hotspot colors with no object selected, the default colors are
changed for this drawing and for future sessions of the program.

To display hyperlinked objects

1 Click View > Toolbars > Internet.
If the Internet command is not available, click Tools > Options, click Command
bars in the Workspace, Customization list of categories, and ensure the Internet
check box is enabled.
2 On the Internet toolbar, enable the Show hotspots button .
All objects to which youve assigned URLs display in the crosshatch and
background hotspot colors.

To verify links in a Web document

1 Click Window > Link manager.
2 In the list, verify that all URL links display a green check mark.
3 Click the Refresh button

Creating Web-enabled objects

to verify any broken links.

309

You can also verify a single link in the Link manager by right-clicking it and
clicking Verify link.
If you want to test a link by opening a URL in a Web browser, right-click the
object, and click Jump to hyperlink in browser.

310

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Publishing to the Web

You can ensure that your Corel DESIGNER files and objects publish to HTML
successfully by setting document elements to be Web-compatible, selecting the
settings you want, and checking Preflight issues. You can then publish to HTML. The
resulting HTML code and images can be used in HTML authoring software for
creating a Web site or page.
In this section, youll learn about
preparing files and objects for Web publishing
publishing to HTML

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

You can prepare your files and objects for the Web by setting preferences and verifying
the objects before you export them.
The Corel DESIGNER application provides options for publishing your document to
the World Wide Web. You can determine layout options, set link colors, and select
HTML text preferences. Among the text export options, you can export Webcompatible text as plain text so that users can copy and reuse the text, or you can export
all text as images so that the text will always display as you designed it.
You can export your graphics to preset JPEG, GIF, or PNG formats. You can also
publish your document as a single image, from which the application creates an image
map. An image map is a hypergraphic whose hotspots link to different URLs
including pages, locations, and images when you view the HTML document with a
browser. Note that large image maps might cause slow downloads for those with a slow
Internet connection.
You can check the download times of your Web page objects through a browser preview.

To change text export preferences

1 Click Tools > Options.
Publishing to the Web

311

2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to Web, and click Text.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Export HTML compatible text as text exports the Web-compatible text as
text
Export all text as images exports the text as images and ensures
compatibility for all browsers
Exporting all text as images can increase download times because of the larger
file sizes.

To change link export preferences

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to the Web, and click
Links.
3 Enable the Underline check box.
4 Enable the following check boxes, and select a color for each:
Normal link
Active link
Visited link
The link colors set in the Options dialog box are exported with the file,
eliminating any conflict between link color and your documents page
background color.

To change image export preferences

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to the Web, and click
Image.
3 In the Export image using area, enable one of the following image format options:
JPEG
GIF
PNG
4 Set any bitmap options.

312

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Apply anti-aliasing

Enable the Anti-alias check box.

Create a Client-side image map

Enable the Client check box.

Create a Server-side image map

Enable the Server check box, and choose a

format.

To change HTML layout export preferences

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Publish to the Web.
3 Type values in the following boxes:
Position tolerance lets you specify the number of pixels text can be
automatically nudged to avoid introducing rows or columns that are only a few
pixels in size
Image white space lets you specify the number of pixels that can occur in an
empty cell before its merged with an adjacent cell. This lets you avoid splitting a
single graphic that spans adjacent cells. Cells or tables are used to position
Internet objects in your Web document when you choose the HTML Tables
layout method
Position white space lets you specify the amount of white space allowed in
an image

To preview a Web page

1 Click File > Publish to the Web > HTML.
2 Click the General tab.
3 Click Browser preview.

To set Web preflight options

1 Click File > Publish to the Web > HTML.
2 Click the Issues tab.
3 Click Settings.
4 In the Issues to check for list, expand the Publishing to Web tree.
5 Deselect the issues you do not want to check.
Publishing to the Web

313

Publishing to HTML
When publishing a document or selection to the World Wide Web, you can choose
several options, such as image format, HTML layout, export range, and file transfer
protocol (FTP) site parameters.

To publish to the Web

1 Click File > Publish to the Web > HTML.
2 Set the following options in the Publish to the Web dialog box:
General contains options for HTML layout, folders for HTML file and
images, and FTP site and export range. You can also select, add, and remove
presets.
Details contains details of HTML files produced, and allows you to change
the page name and file name
Images lists all images for the current HTML export. You can set individual
objects to JPEG, GIF, and PNG formats. Click Options to select presets for each
image type.
Advanced provides options for generating JavaScript for rollovers and
cascading style sheets and for maintaining links to external files
Summary shows statistics for files according to various download speeds
Issues displays a list of potential issues, including explanations, suggestions,
and tips
Corel DESIGNER assigns the extension .htm to documents you publish in the
HTML format. By default, HTML files share the same name as the
Corel DESIGNER (DES) source file and are saved in the last folder you used to
store exported Web documents.

314

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Working with object data

The Object Data Manager is an advanced hotspotting feature that is particularly
useful as a project management tool when you create or supervise a large project. You
can enter many types of project data about individual objects or groups of objects.
In this section, youll learn about
setting up the project database
managing object data
applying CGM data to objects

Setting up the project database

Before you assign project data to objects in a drawing, you need to know what
information you want to display. By default, Corel DESIGNER creates three data fields:
Name, Cost, and Comments. These fields can be edited or deleted as required.
Corel DESIGNER also provides common ActiveCGM and WebCGM fields. When you
import or export CGM files, the object data is maintained. For more information on
importing and exporting CGM files, see Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) in the
Help.
Object data is also maintained when you import or export SVG files. For more
information on importing and exporting SVG files, see Scalable Vector Graphics
(SVG) in the Help.
You can create and assign as many data fields as you want, as long as they use permitted
format variables. For more information about assigning data fields, see Managing
object data on page 317.
At any time, you can change the setting, such as the name or format, of a data field.
If you require custom fields, you can define their formats using four basic field formats:
General, Date/time, Linear/angular, and Numeric. Each of these formats provides a
series of common settings. If the preset formats in Corel DESIGNER dont provide the
information you want in your data summary, you can create your own custom formats
using the variables available for the format type youre using. The field format you select
is used for all objects in the active drawing.
When you delete a field, you also delete all data entered for that field in the active
document.
Working with object data

315

To add a data field

1 Click Window > Object Data Manager.
2 In the Object data docker, click the Open field editor button

3 In the Object data field editor dialog box, click Create new field.
4 Double-click the Name cell in the new field. Type a name for the field, and press
Enter.
If you want to change the fields value, double-click the Default value cell, type a
new value, and press Enter.
If you want to change the fields constraint, double-click the Constraint cell, type
a constraint, and press Enter.
5 Double-click the Type cell in the new field, and choose one of the following format
types from the list box:
String
Number
Event
Action
6 Double-click the Target cell in the new field, and choose one of the following
targets from the list box:
General
ActiveCGM
WebCGM
7 In the Add field to area, enable one or both of the following check boxes:
Application defaults stores the new field in the application
Document defaults stores the new field in the current document
You can also use this procedure to change the settings of an existing data field.
You can also
Change the format of a data field

316

Select the data field, and click Change in the

Format area.
In the Format definition dialog box, enable
the option beside the format type you want
to use, and choose a format from the Format
type list.

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Create a custom format for a data field

Select the data field, and click Change in the

Format area.
In the Format definition dialog box, enable
the option beside the format type you want
to create.
Type the format in the Create box, and press
Enter.

Delete a data field

Choose the name of the data field from the

list. To choose multiple fields, hold down
Ctrl, and click the names in the list.
Click Delete field(s).

Managing object data

After creating all the data fields you want for a drawing, you can create a database from
a template. The database stores all the data you apply to the objects in your drawing.
You can choose from three different templates; because each template saves to an
external, tagged XML file, you can store the data for different workflows
simultaneously.
The Object Data Manager provides all the commands and features you need to add,
edit, and delete object data even behaviors that were applied using the Internet
toolbar.
You can use one objects data entries to update another objects data entries. This
function does not replace an objects data entries; rather, it appends fields and data
where appropriate.
Corel DESIGNER also provides common ActiveCGM and WebCGM fields. When you
import or export CGM files, the object data is maintained. For more information on
importing and exporting CGM files, see Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) in the
Help.
Object data is also maintained when you import or export SVG files. For more
information on importing and exporting SVG files, see Scalable Vector Graphics
(SVG) in the Help.

Working with object data

317

To choose a database template

1 Click Window > Object Data Manager.
2 From the list box, choose one of the following templates:
General
ActiveCGM
WebCGM
You can also view all existing database entries by choosing All from the list
box.

To add or edit data for an object

1 Select the object using the Pick tool

2 Click Window > Object Data Manager.

3 Select a data field.
A check mark indicates whether that field is applied to the selected object.
An icon indicates the field type:
Text
Number
Action
Event
4 Type text in the Value column for the field, and press Enter.
5 Type text in the Constraint column for the field, and press Enter.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to add data to other fields.
You can also
Display or hide behaviors

Click the Show/hide behaviors button

Display or hide data

Click the Show/hide data button

Display active fields only

Click the Show active fields only button

.

Copy data from another object to the

selected object

Click the Copy data from button , and

click the object from which you want to copy
data.

318

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also

Clear all fields

Click the Clear all fields button

Applying CGM data to objects

This section provides information on the CGM data that you can apply to objects. It is
divided into two parts:
WebCGM commands
ActiveCGM commands
When you choose an action as the type, any of the following can function as
the value:
one or more ActiveCGM commands
BasicScript subroutine name
operating system command
external application
When you choose an event as the type, only one or more Active CGM
commands can function as the value.
WebCGM commands
button1press

Type: event
Description: Triggers when you click any of the members of the group.
Value: WebCGM_button1press, or any of the WebCGM actions
Constraint: none

content

Type: text
Description: Allows you to declare the first priority when searching the text
content of a para APS.
Value: none
Constraint: none
cursorenter

Type: event
Working with object data

319

 Description: Triggers when the pointer moves within two pixels of any of the
members of the group.
Value: WebCGM_cursorenter, or any of the WebCGM actions
Constraint: none
cursorexit

Type: event
Description: Triggers when the pointer moves off all members of the group.
Value: WebCGM_cursorexit, or any of the WebCGM actions.
Constraint: none

hover

Type: event
Description: Triggers when the pointer moves over any member of the group.
Value: any of the WebCGM actions
Constraint: none

linkuri

Type: action
Description: Loads a file in the target window as specified by the URI.
Value: either one or three strings entered by user input
If it is one string, it will represent the URI.
Example: http://www.corel.com
If it is three strings, the first string is the URI, the second is the empty string,
and the third is the target frame.
Example: http://www.corel.com _blank
The target frames are as follows:
_blank viewer loads the content in new window
_self viewer loads the content in the same window
_parent viewer loads the content in the immediate frameset parent
of the active window
_top viewer loads the content in the full original window
Constraint: none
name

Type: text
Description: Names the group.
Value: entered by user input
Example: Corel Designer Group
320

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Constraint: none
region

Type: text
Description: Provides an optional spatial region, associated with a graphical
object, allowing the user to pick operations for the object. Simple regions of type
rectangle, ellipse, polygon, and continuous polybezier can be defined.
For a rectangle, two corner points of the viewport are provided, as in (x1,y1)
(x2,y2).
Example: -820084 215104 342822 867138
For an ellipse, three points are provided. The first point specifies the center of the
ellipse, while the remaining two points specify the CDP points, as in (x1,y1)
(x2,y2) (x3,y3).
Example: -275602 514233 -786474 514233 -275602 282324
For a polygon, points are provided where n is the number of vertices in the
polygon using the formula n*(x.y).
For a polybezier, points are provided where n is the number of contiguous cubic
segments using the formula 3n+1(x,y).
Example (polybezier with three vertices): 235270 712532 -235270
712532
87386
235270

342822 87386 342822 87386

-235270 87386 -235270
712532

342822 87386 -235270

87386 -235270 712532 -

Value: none
Constraint: none
screentip

Type: text
Value: entered by user input as a single string that is associated with a graphical
object or a group
Example: This is a screentip
Constraint: none
Description: Causes the value to be displayed as a screen-tip when the pointer is
positioned over the group.
viewcontext

Type: number
Description: Lets the user specify the initial view of an object, when the user
positions the pointer over the graphical object that contains this attribute.
The value of the viewcontext specifies the two corner points of the viewport
rectangle as (x1,y1) (x2,y2), where x1, y1 is the top-right point of the viewport
Working with object data

321

rectangle and x2, y2 is the bottom-left point of the viewport rectangle.

Example: -925688030 586990613 -799207691 509452731
Value: entered by user input
Constraint: none
WebCGM_button1press

Type: action
Description: Erases all usertip message boxes in the target window.
Example: eraseusertip;execute -extension linkuri
Value: eraseusertip;execute -ext
Constraint: none
WebCGM_cursorenter

Type: action
Description: Displays the specified usertip.
Example: displayusertip -tip <This is a screentip>
Value: displayusertip -tip
Constraint: none
WebCGM_cursorexit

Type: action
Value: eraseusertip
Constraint: none
Description: Erases all usertip message boxes in the target window.

ActiveCGM commands
@ML_button1press

Type: event
Description: Makes the group visible.
Value: @ML_ToVisible
Constraint: none

@ML_button1release

Type: event
Description: Makes the group invisible.
Value: @ML_ToInvisible
Constraint: none

@ML_cursorenter

Type: event
322

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Description: Changes the group color to red.

Value: @ML_ToRed
Constraint: none
@ML_cursorexit

Type: event
Description: Changes the group color to its original color.
Value: @ML_ToNative
Constraint: none

@ML_ToInvisible

Type: action
Description: Makes the group invisible.
Value: changegroup -vis off
Constraint: fixed

@ML_ToNative

Type: action
Value: changegroup -co native
Constraint: fixed
Description: Changes the group color to its original color.

@ML_ToRed

Type: action
Value: changegroup -co red
Constraint: fixed
Description: Changes the group color to red.

@ML_ToVisible

Type: action
Value: changegroup -vis on
Constraint: fixed
Description: Makes the group visible.

age

Type: number
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: entered by user input
Example: 50.0

Working with object data

323

 Constraint: range
A range constraint specifies that the value should be within the given range. For
example, range 20.0 100.0 specifies that the value is greater than 20.0 but
less than 100.0.
Example: range 20 120
button1press

Type: event
Description: Triggers when you click any of the members of the group.
Value: PressButton1, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions
Constraint: none

button1release

Type: event
Description: Triggers when you release the left mouse button while the pointer is
positioned over any of the members of the group.
Value: ReleaseButton1, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions
Constraint: none
cursorenter

Type: event
Description: Triggers when the pointer moves within two pixels of any of the
members of the group.
Value: ToRed, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions
Constraint: none
cursorexit

Type: event
Description: Triggers when the pointer moves off all members of the group.
Value: ToNative, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions
Constraint: none

description

Type: text
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: entered by user input
Example: product description
Constraint: fixed
email address

Type: text
324

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Description: Starts an e-mail client when the user clicks the group.
Value: entered by user input
Example: [email protected]
Constraint: none
InStock

Type: text
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: entered by user input
Constraint: set
A set constraint specifies that the value should be one of the elements from the
given set. For example, set Yes No specifies that the value can be one of either
Yes or No.

name

Type: text
Value: entered by user input
Example: GroupNAME
Constraint: none
Description: This behavior provides the name defined by the user.
part number

Type: text
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: entered by user input
Example: 1
Constraint: none
phone number

Type: text
Value: entered by user input
Example: 613-274-0500
Constraint: none
Description: This behavior is undefined.
pressaction

Type: action
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: one or more ActiveCGM commands; BasicScript subroutine name;
operating system command; external application
Working with object data

325

 Constraint: none
pressaction1

Type: action
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: one or more ActiveCGM commands; BasicScript subroutine name;
operating system command; external application
Constraint: none
PressButton1

Type: action
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: one or more ActiveCGM commands; BasicScript subroutine name;
operating system command; external application
Constraint: none
price

Type: number
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: entered by user input
Example: 99.99
Constraint: range
A range constraint specifies that the value should be with in the given range. For
example, range 0.01 999.99 specifies that the value is greater than 0.0 but less
than 1000.0.
ReleaseButton1

Type: action
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: one or more ActiveCGM commands; BasicScript subroutine name;
operating system command; external application
Constraint: none
Sleep

Type: action
Description: Activates the time delay for one second.
Value: timer -p 1; or, one or more ActiveCGM commands, a BasicScript
subroutine name, an operating system command, or an external application
Constraint: none
street address

326

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Type: text
Description: This behavior is undefined.
Value: entered by user input
Constraint: none

ToInvisible

Type: action
Description: Makes the group invisible.
Value: changegroup -vis off; or, one or more ActiveCGM commands, a
BasicScript subroutine name, an operating system command, or an external
application
Constraint: fixed
ToNative

Type: action
Description: Changes the group color to its original color.
Value: changegroup -co native; or, one or more ActiveCGM commands, a
BasicScript subroutine name, an operating system command, or an external
application
The value for an ActiveCGM action can contain more than one ActiveCGM
commands separated with semicolons.
Example: changegroup -vis on ; changegroup -co native
Constraint: fixed
ToRed

Type: action
Description: Changes the group color to red.
Value: changegroup -co red
The value for an ActiveCGM action can contain more than one ActiveCGM
commands separated with semicolons.
Example: changegroup -vis on ; changegroup -co blue
Constraint: fixed
ToVisible

Type: action
Description: Makes the group visible.
Value: changegroup -vis on
Constraint: fixed

Working with object data

327

Printing
In this section, you'll learn about
printing your work
laying out print jobs
previewing print jobs
applying print styles
fine-tuning print jobs
printing colors accurately
printing to a PostScript printer

Printing your work

You can print one or more copies of the same drawing. You can specify what to print, as
well as which parts of a drawing to print; for example, you can print selected vectors,
bitmaps, text, or layers.
Before printing a drawing, you can specify printer properties, including paper size and
device options.

To set printer properties

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the General tab.
3 Click Properties.
4 Set any properties in the dialog box.

To print your work

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the General tab.
Printing

329

3 Choose a printer from the Name list box.

4 Type a value in the Number of copies box.
If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box.
5 Enable one of the following options:
Current document prints the active drawing
Current page prints the active page
Pages prints the pages that you specify
Documents prints the documents that you specify
Selection prints the objects that you have selected
You must select objects before printing a selection.
The Collate check box is available only for documents with more than one
page.

To print selected vectors, bitmaps, or text

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 In the Proofing options area, enable any of the following check boxes:
Print vectors
Print bitmaps
Print text
You can print graphics in full color, monochrome, or grayscale, by enabling the
corresponding check boxes in the Bitmap downsampling area.
You can print all text in black by enabling the Print all text in black check
box.

To print selected layers

1 Click Window > Object manager.
2 Click the printer icon that corresponds to a layer.
If the icon appears grayed, the layer will not print.
3 Click File > Print.

330

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

In the Print dialog box, check the preview pane to see if the correct layer is
selected.

To print to a file
1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the General tab.
3 Enable the Print to file check box.
4 Click the flyout arrow, and click one of the following commands:
For Mac saves the drawing to be readable on a Macintosh computer
Single file prints pages to a single file
Pages to separate files prints pages to separate files
5 Click Print.
6 Choose the folder where you want to save the file.
7 Type a filename in the File name box.

Laying out print jobs

You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job
prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one
sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper.
If the orientation of a print job differs from the orientation specified in the printer
properties, a message prompts you to adjust the paper orientation of the printing
device. You can disable this prompt, so that the printer adjusts paper orientation
automatically.

To specify the size and position of a print job

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Layout tab.
3 Enable one of the following options:
As in document maintains the image size, as it is in the document
Fit to page sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page
Reposition images to lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position
from the list box
Printing

331

Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and
scale in the corresponding boxes.

To tile a print job

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Layout tab.
3 Enable the Print tiled pages check box.
4 Type values in the following boxes:
Tile overlap lets you specify the number of inches by which to overlap tiles
% of page width lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles
will occupy
Enable the Tiling marks check box to include tiling alignment marks.

To change the page orientation prompt

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.
3 Choose Page orientation prompt from the Option list.
4 Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:
Off always match orientation
On ask if orientations differ
Off don't change orientation

Previewing print jobs

You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear
on paper. Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job
to find potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job
for print errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues.

To preview a print job

Click File > Print.
The Print dialog box opens with the preview pane on the right.
332

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To view a summary of issues for a print job

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Issues tab.
If you don't want Preflight to check for certain issues, click Settings, double-click
Printing, and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you want
overlooked.
You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button
typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

and

Applying print styles

A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This
lets you move a print style from one computer to another, back up a print style, and
keep document-specific styles in the same directory as the document file.
You can select an existing print style, create a new print style, or edit a print style and
save the changes.

To choose a print style

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the General tab.
3 Choose one of the following from the Print Style list box:
Corel DESIGNER defaults
Browse

To create a print style

1 Click File > Print.
2 Set any printing options.
3 Click the General tab.
4 Click Save as.
5 Choose the folder where you want to save the print style.
6 Type a name for the style in the File name box.

Printing

333

When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called
Settings to include. The settings in this section correspond to the printing
options you have already selected. You can also specify which settings to
include in a print style in this dialog box.

To edit a print style

1 Click File > Print.
2 Choose a print style from the Print style list box.
3 Modify any of the printing options.
4 Click Save as.
5 Choose the folder where the print style is stored.
6 Click the filename.
7 Click Save.
You should save the modified settings as a print style or apply the changes
before canceling; otherwise, youll lose all of the modified settings.

Fine-tuning print jobs

Problems sometimes occur when you are printing text to a non-PostScript printing
device; for example, lower numbers of fountain steps can result in banding. You can
specify the number of steps in the fountain fills in a print job. A higher value results in
a smoother blend, but the printing time is longer. You can decrease printing time by
specifying driver compatibility for non-PostScript printing devices.
If a printing device has difficulty processing large bitmaps, you can divide a bitmap into
smaller, more manageable chunks by setting an output threshold. If any lines appear
when the printing device prints the chunks, you can set an overlap value to produce a
seamless image.
When printing color print jobs to a black-and-white printing device, you can specify
whether to print in black or grayscale.
You can rasterize a page of a print job. Rasterizing a page converts it to a bitmap and
improves the print speed when printing to non-PostScript printing devices.

334

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To reduce file size, you can downsample bitmaps. Because bitmaps are made up of
pixels, when you downsample a bitmap, the number of pixels per line decreases, which
decreases the file size.

To specify fountain steps in a print job

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 Type a value in the Fountain steps box.
Specifying the number of fountain steps in the Fountain fill dialog box will
override the settings you specify on the Misc page. For information about
specifying the number of fountain steps in the Fountain fill dialog box, see To
change the fountain fill print and display quality on page 160.

To specify driver compatibility settings

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, Printing, and click Driver
compatibility.
3 Choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box.
4 Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the settings you want to specify.

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.
3 From the Option list, choose one of the following:
Bitmap output threshold (K)
Bitmap chunk overlap pixels
4 Choose a value from the Setting list box.

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 Enable one of the following options:
Printing

335

 All colors as black

All colors as grayscale

To rasterize a page
1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 Enable the Rasterize entire page check box, and type a number in the box to set
the resolution.

To downsample bitmaps
1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 From the Bitmap downsampling area, enable any of the following check boxes
and type a value in the corresponding box:
Color
Grayscale
Monochrome
Downsampling bitmaps affects them only when their resolution is higher than
the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area.

Printing colors accurately

To print colors accurately, you can apply an International Color Consortium (ICC) color
profile.
Using color management also helps you ensure accurate color reproduction. You can
output color bitmaps as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. For more information on color
management, see Managing color for display, input, and output on page 187.

To apply an ICC color profile

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 Enable the Apply ICC profile check box.
336

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Applying an ICC color profile on the Misc page will use the settings that you
specified for separations printer profiles in the Color management dialog box,
when printing separations, and it will use the composite printer profiles when
printing composites. For information about applying an ICC color profile in the
Color management dialog box, see To choose a color profile on page 190.

To output color bitmaps

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Misc tab.
3 Choose one of the following from the Output color bitmaps as list box:
CMYK
RGB
Grayscale
The CMYK option is available only for PostScript devices.

Printing to a PostScript printer

PostScript is a page-description language that sends printing instructions to a PostScript
device. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by
lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document. For
improved compatibility you can choose a device independent PostScript device. You can
also select a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. A PostScript Printer Description
file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer and is available from
your printer's manufacturer.
You can print to a PostScript printing device. To ensure that a print job prints properly
on a PostScript Level 1 device, you can test for potential issues such as complex graphics
and banding in fountain fills.
You can automatically increase the fountain steps in a fountain fill to decrease banding.
To ensure that your print jobs print properly, you can reduce curve complexity by
increasing flatness. Curve flatness determines how smooth a curve appears when
printed.
By default, the printing device driver downloads Type 1 fonts to the printing device.
You can disable the Download Type 1 Fonts option, so that fonts are printed as graphics
Printing

337

(either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful when the file contains many fonts that
would take an unacceptably long time to download or would fail to download because
of their file size. Bitmap versions of TrueType fonts look better in small print and print
faster than regular fonts. You can choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts that a
print job can contain.

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the General tab.
3 Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box.
4 Enable the Use PPD check box.
5 Choose the folder where the file is stored.
6 Double-click the filename.

To print to a PostScript device

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the General tab.
3 Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box.
4 Click the PostScript tab.
5 From the list box in the Compatibility area, choose the PostScript level that
corresponds to the printer.
If you want to compress bitmaps when printing, enable the Use JPEG
compression check box in the Bitmaps area, and move the Quality factor slider.
Bitmap compression settings can be saved in PostScript Interpreted (PS or
PRN) files when you print to a file using a PostScript driver. For information
about printing to a file, see To print to a file on page 331.

To test for complex graphics

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Issues tab.
3 Click Settings.

338

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

4 Double-click Printing.
5 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Text with texture fills (PS Level1 Only)
Bitmaps in complex clipping paths (PS Level1 only)
Texture fills in complex objects (PS Level1 only)
Complex clipping regions (PS Level1 only)
Objects with outline having many nodes (PS Level1 only)
Objects with outline and fill having many nodes (PS Level1 only)

To test fountain fills for banding

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Issues tab.
3 Click Settings.
4 Double-click Printing.
5 Enable the Banded fountain fills check box.
If you want to optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity, enable the Optimize
fountain fills check box under the PostScript tab.
Testing fountain fills for banding applies only to linear fountain fills.

To automatically increase fountain steps

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the PostScript tab.
3 Enable the Auto increase fountain steps check box.
Enabling the Auto increase fountain steps check box increases the number
of steps used to render fountain fills, which may increase printing time.

To reduce curve complexity

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the PostScript tab.
3 Type a value in the Maximum points per curve box.

Printing

339

4 Type a value in the Set flatness to box.

5 Enable the Auto increase flatness check box.
Reducing curve complexity can help alleviate printing problems caused by
curves that have too many points on each curve, but it results in increased
printing time.
As the flatness increases, curves begin to appear as connected straight lines.
When the Auto increase flatness check box is enabled, the maximum
allowable flatness value, specified in the Set flatness to box, increases by a
value of 10. If a curve is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds this
limit, the printing device skips the problematic curve. If the printing device
skips a curve, it does not appear in the final output. For this reason, it is
important to inspect proofs before you publish the work.
If you are having problems printing complex objects, type 10 in the Set
flatness to box. If this does not achieve the required results, continue to
increase the flatness value by increments of two, and evaluate the results.

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the PostScript tab.
3 Disable the Download Type1 fonts check box.
Type 1 fonts can be downloaded only for PostScript devices.
When the Download Type1 fonts check box is enabled, the Convert
TrueType to Type1 check box is enabled by default. This ensures that
TrueType fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded.
Disable the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box only if the output device
has difficulty interpreting Type 1 fonts.

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

340

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

3 Choose Bitmap font limit (PS) from the Option list.

4 Choose a value from the Settings list box.
If you want to set a maximum bitmap font size, choose a font size from the Bitmap
font size threshold (PS) list box.

Printing

341

Commercial printing
With Corel DESIGNER, you can prepare a print job for commercial printing.
In this section, youll learn about
working with imposition layouts
printing printers marks
maintaining OPI links
using Preflight

Working with imposition layouts

Working with imposition layouts lets you print more than one page of a document on
each sheet of paper. You can choose a preset imposition layout to create documents such
as magazines and books to print on a commercial printing press; produce documents
that involve cutting or folding, such as mailing labels, business cards, pamphlets, or
greeting cards; or print multiple thumbnails of a document on one page. You can also
edit a preset imposition layout to create your own layout.

To choose a preset imposition layout

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Layout tab.
3 Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box.
The layout you choose does not affect the original document, only the way it is
printed.

To edit an imposition layout

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Layout tab.
Commercial printing

343

3 Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box.

4 Click Edit.
5 Edit any imposition layout settings.
6 Click Save layout on the property bar.
7 Type a name for the imposition layout in the Save as box.
When editing an imposition layout, you should save it with a new name;
otherwise the settings for a preset imposition layout will be overwritten.

Printing printers marks

Printing printer's marks lets you display information on a page about how a work
should be printed.The available printer's marks are as follows:
Crop/fold marks represent the size of the paper and print at the corners of the
page. You can print crop/fold marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you print
multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns), you can choose
to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop/fold
marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks
around each row and column. Crop/fold marks ensure that marks appear on each
plate of a separated CMYK file.
Bleed limit determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks.
When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set
a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the
size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge
of the final paper size.
Registration marks are required to line up film for proofing or printing plates
on a color press. They print on each sheet of a color separation.
Color calibration bars are color scales that print on each sheet of a color
separation and ensure accurate color reproduction. To see calibration bars, the page
size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing.
Densitometer scale is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These
boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the
densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray
that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

344

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Page numbers helps you collate pages of an image that do not include any
page numbers or do not contain page numbers that correspond to the actual
number of pages
File information prints file information, such as, the color profile; halftone
settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name

To print crop and fold marks

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Prepress tab.
3 Enable the Crop/fold marks check box.
If you want to print only the exterior crop/fold marks, enable the Exterior only
check box.
To print crop and fold marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches
larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

To print composite crop/fold marks

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.
3 Choose Composite crop marks from the Option list.
4 Choose Output on all plates from the Setting list box.

To set a bleed limit

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Layout tab.
3 Enable the Bleed limit check box.
4 Type a value in the Bleed limit box.
Usually, a bleed limit of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending
beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print
multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

Commercial printing

345

To print registration marks

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Prepress tab.
3 Enable the Print registration marks check box.
4 Choose a registration mark style from the Style list box.
To print registration marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches
larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Prepress tab.
3 In the Calibration bars area, enable any of the following check boxes:
Color calibration bar
Densitometer scales
If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares,
choose a number from the Densities list (lower values represent lighter squares),
and type a new density for that square.

To print page numbers

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Prepress tab.
3 Enable the Print page numbers check box.
If you want to position the page number inside the page, enable the Position
within page check box.

To print file information

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the Prepress tab.
3 Enable the Print file information check box.
4 Type a job name in the Job name/slug line box.

346

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If you want to position the file information inside the page, enable the Position
within page check box.

Maintaining OPI links

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the
high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a service bureau receives
your file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution
placeholders.

To maintain OPI links

1 Click File > Print.
2 Click the PostScript tab.
3 Enable the Maintain OPI links check box.
The Maintain OPI links option is available for PostScript devices only.
You can reduce your work time by using OPI and print management server
solutions, such as Creo Color Central. Low-resolution samples are
automatically created from the high-resolution originals and are placed in
Corel DESIGNER. These files contain their own OPI comments, which the
Creo Color Central server recognizes when it receives the job and then
substitutes the high-resolution version of the file for the low-resolution version.
When you import the low-resolution images into your document, they must
be flagged as OPI images using third-party software.

Using Preflight
Preflight checks the status of your file before you decide to output it. A summary of
issues and potential problems, and suggestions for resolving them is provided. You can
specify which issues Preflight checks for. You can also save Preflight settings. For more
information about specific Preflight settings, see any of the following:
To check for issues relating to printing a file, see To view a summary of issues for a
print job on page 333.
To check for issues relating to publishing a PDF file, see To view the Preflight
summary for a PDF file on page 358.
Commercial printing

347

 To check for issues relating to publishing to the Web, see To set Web preflight
options on page 313.
To check for issues relating to exporting a SWF file, see To view the issues
summary for a Macromedia Flash file in the Help.
To check for issues relating to exporting an SVG file, see Scalable Vector Graphics
(SVG) in the Help.

348

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Publishing to PDF
PDF is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an
original application file.
In this section, youll learn about
saving documents as PDF files
including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files
reducing PDF file size
working with fonts in PDF files
specifying the encoding format for PDF files
setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files
choosing an EPS file format
outputting objects in PDF files
preparing PDF files for a service bureau
viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files
optimizing PDF files

Saving documents as PDF files

A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform provided that users have
Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Acrobat Reader, or a PDF-compatible reader
installed on their computers. A PDF file can also be uploaded to an intranet or the
World Wide Web. You can also export an individual selection or an entire document to
a PDF file.
When you save a document as a PDF file, you can choose from several preset PDF
styles, which apply settings that are specific to that particular PDF style. For example,
with the PDF for the Web style, the resolution of the images in the PDF file will be
optimized for the World Wide Web. You can also create a new PDF style or edit any
preset style.

Publishing to PDF

349

If you have used symbols in a document, they will be supported in the PDF file. For
more information on symbols, see Working with symbols on page 145.

To save a document as a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 From the PDF style list box, choose one of the following:
PDF for document distribution creates a PDF file that can be printed on a
laser or desktop printer and is suitable for general document delivery. This style
enables JPEG bitmap image compression and can include bookmarks and
hyperlinks.
PDF for editing creates a high-quality PDF file intended to be sent to a
printer or digital copier. This style enables LZW compression, embeds fonts, and
includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all
the fonts, with all of the images at full resolution, and with hyperlinks, so that
you can edit the file at a later date.
PDF for the Web creates a PDF file intended for online viewing, such as a
PDF file to be distributed by email or published on the World Wide Web. This
style enables JPEG bitmap image compression, compresses text, and includes
hyperlinks.
3 Locate the folder where you want to save the file.
4 Type a filename in the File name box.

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the General tab.
4 Enable the Documents option.
5 Enable the check box for each document you want to save.

To create a PDF style

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 In the Publish to PDF dialog box, specify any settings.
4 Click the General tab.
350

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

5 Click the Add PDF style button

beside the PDF style list box.

6 Type a name for the style in the Save PDF style as list box.
If you want to delete a PDF style, select the style and click the Delete PDF
style button beside the PDF style list box.

To edit a PDF style

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 In the Publish to PDF dialog box, specify any settings.
4 Click the General tab.
5 Click the Add PDF style button

beside the PDF style list box.

6 Choose a style from the Save PDF style as list box.

If you save changes you make to preset style settings, the original settings will
be overwritten. To avoid this, save any changes to preset style settings with a
new name.

Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files

You can include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file. Hyperlinks are
useful for adding jumps to Web pages or to Internet URLs. Bookmarks allow you to
link to specific areas in a PDF file. You can specify whether bookmarks or thumbnails
are displayed when the PDF file is first opened in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.
For information about assigning hyperlinks and bookmarks, see Working with
bookmarks and hyperlinks on page 307.

To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file

1 Choose File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Document tab.
4 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Include hyperlinks
Publishing to PDF

351

 Generate bookmarks
Generate thumbnails
If you want to display bookmarks or thumbnails on startup, enable the
Bookmarks or Thumbnails button in the On start, display area.

Reducing PDF file size

You can compress bitmap images, text, and line art to reduce the size of a PDF file.
Bitmap image compression options include JPEG, LZW, or ZIP. Bitmap images using
JPEG compression have a quality scale ranging from 2 (high) to 255 (low). The higher
the image quality, the larger the file size.
You can also reduce the size of a PDF file by downsampling color, grayscale, or
monochrome bitmap images or converting complex fills to bitmaps.

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Choose one of the following from the Compression type list box:
None
LZW
JPEG
ZIP
If you choose JPEG compression, you can specify the compression quality by
moving the Quality factor slider.

To compress text and line art in a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Enable the Compress text and line art check box.

352

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Enable any of the following check boxes, and type a value in the corresponding
box:
Color
Grayscale
Monochrome
Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images is effective
only when the resolution of the bitmap image is higher than the resolution
specified in the Bitmap downsampling area.

To render complex fills as bitmaps

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Enable the Render complex fills as bitmaps check box.

Working with fonts in PDF files

You can embed fonts in a PDF file, including PostScript base 14 fonts. Embedding
increases the file size but makes a PDF file more portable, since the fonts do not have
to reside on other systems. When you embed base 14 fonts, the fonts are added to your
PDF file, thus eliminating font variances on different systems. The base 14 fonts are
resident on all PostScript devices.
You can also convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts, which can increase file size if there
are many fonts in a file. When you convert fonts, you can reduce file size by subsetting
Type 1 fonts if you use only a smaller number of characters (for example, English
characters A to E). You can also include a percentage of fonts used. For example, you
can create a subset of 50 percent of fonts. If the number of characters used in the
document exceeds 50 percent, the whole set of characters is embedded. If the number

Publishing to PDF

353

of characters used in the document is less than 50 percent, only the characters used are
embedded.
You can also eliminate font variances on different computers by exporting text as curves.
For example, if you are using unusual text characters, you can export the text as curves.
Exporting text as curves increases the complexity of the file and can increase file size.
For general document publication, embed fonts in a document rather than convert text
to curves.

To embed fonts in a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Enable the Embed fonts in document check box.
If you want to install the basic fonts to your PDF file, enable the Embed base 14
fonts check box.
Enabling the Embed base 14 fonts check box increases file size, and,
therefore, it is not recommended for publishing to the World Wide Web.

To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Enable the Convert TrueType to Type 1 check box.
If you want to reduce file size, you can create a subset of Type 1 fonts by enabling
the Subset fonts check box and typing a percentage of fonts used in the Under%
of charset box.
If you create a subset of Type 1 fonts, you should not edit or correct the PDF
file using Adobe Acrobat, since the characters you add when editing may not
be present in the file.

354

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To export text as curves

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Enable the Export all text as curves check box.

Specifying the encoding format for PDF files

ASCII and binary are encoding formats. When you publish a file to PDF, you can choose
between exporting ASCII or binary files. ASCII creates files that are fully portable to all
platforms. Binary creates smaller files that are less portable, since some platforms
cannot handle the file format.

To specify an encoding format for a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Objects tab.
4 Enable one of the following options:
ASCII 85
Binary

Setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files

You can increase or decrease the number of steps for fountain fills. A low number of
steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may be rather coarse. The number
of fountain steps can be set between 1 and 256.

To set the number of steps for fountain fills in a PDF file

1 Choose File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Type a value in the Fountain steps box.

Publishing to PDF

355

Choosing an EPS file format

EPS files are PostScript files that are embedded in a document. You can choose how
encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are viewed in a PDF document. The PostScript
option includes high-resolution images in the PDF document but does not let you view
them. The Preview option includes high-resolution images in the PDF file and displays
their low-resolution bitmap representation.

To choose an EPS file format

1 Choose File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Choose one of the following from the EPS files list box:
PostScript includes high-resolution images in the PDF document but does
not let you view them
Preview includes high-resolution images in the PDF file and displays their
low-resolution bitmap representation

Outputting objects in PDF files

You can output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale. If you choose to
output objects as CMYK, you can apply a generic ICC profile to define the CMYK color
space of your printer. For more information on ICC color profiles, seeWorking with
color profiles on page 189.

To output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Choose one of the following from the Output all objects as list box:
RGB
CMYK
Grayscale
Native

356

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If you want to use ICC color profiles to define the CMYK color space of your
printer, enable the Apply ICC profile check box, and enable a printer profile from
the list.
The ICC color profile option is only available for CMYK.

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the
high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a service bureau receives
your file, the OPI server substitutes the low-resolution images for the high-resolution
images.
Document settings can be preserved to maintain how a PDF file looks. You can preserve
document overprints, halftone screen information, and spot colors.

To maintain OPI links in a PDF file

1 Choose File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Enable the Maintain OPI links check box.
Don't use OPI links if you are not sure whether your PDF file is destined for an
OPI server.

To preserve document settings in a PDF file

1 Choose File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Enable any of the following check boxes:
Preserve document overprints retains the overprint settings of objects in a
document
Preserve halftone screen information useful for color separation screening
Preserve spot colors instead of converting to RGB, CMYK, or grayscale
Publishing to PDF

357

Viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files

Before saving a document as a PDF file, you can use Preflight to find potential
problems. Preflight checks and displays a summary of errors, possible problems, and
suggestions for resolving issues. By default, Preflight checks for many PDF issues, but
you can disable the issues that you do not want Preflight to check.

To view the Preflight summary for a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Preflight tab.
If there are issues that you don't want Preflight to check, click the Settings button,
double-click Publishing to PDF, and disable the check boxes that correspond to
the issues that you want Preflight to overlook.
You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button
typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

and

Optimizing PDF files

You can optimize PDF files for different versions of Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.
You can select a compatibility depending upon what kind of viewer the recipients have.
You can select one of four compatibilities: Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, or
Acrobat 6.0. Different compatibilities have different options; for example, the bleed
option is not available for Acrobat 3.0.
To optimize viewing of a PDF document on the Web, you can linearize a PDF file.
Linearizing a file speeds up processing time by loading one page at a time.

To select a compatibility
1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the General tab.
4 From the Compatibility list box, choose one of the following:
Acrobat 3.0
Acrobat 4.0
358

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

 Acrobat 5.0
Acrobat 6.0
If you want to preserve layers and layer properties in the published PDF file,
you should choose the Acrobat 6.0 option. Note that master layers will not be
preserved.

To linearize a PDF file

1 Click File > Publish to PDF.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
4 Enable the Optimize for Web check box.

Publishing to PDF

359

Object linking and embedding

Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a method of exchanging information between
applications. Using OLE, you can take selected objects or entire files from one
application, called the source application, and place them into another application,
called the destination application. Objects that are placed into an application using
OLE are called OLE objects. You can freely move objects and files between applications
as long as all the applications involved support OLE.
Corel DESIGNER lets you create and edit OLE objects, as well as insert objects and files
created in other applications.
Linking results in a larger file size but is useful when you want to use an object or file
in multiple files. To change every instance of the object or the file, you only need to
change the object in the source application. Linking is also useful when the destination
application does not directly support files created in the source application. Embedding
is useful when you want to include all objects in one file.
In this section, youll learn about
inserting linked or embedded objects
editing linked or embedded objects

Inserting linked or embedded objects

You can insert a linked or embedded object. A linked object remains connected to its
source file; whereas an embedded object is not linked to its source file but is integrated
into the new file. You can insert an embedded object or create an embedded object. You
can also insert a linked or embedded object by copying it from the source application
and pasting it to the destination application.

To insert a linked object

1 In the source application, select an object.
2 Click Edit > Copy.
Object linking and embedding

361

3 In Corel DESIGNER, click Edit > Paste special.

4 Enable the Paste link option.
The file from which you copy the object in the source application must be saved
before you insert the object in Corel DESIGNER.

To insert an embedded object

1 Click Edit > Insert new object.
2 Enable the Create from file option.
3 Click the Browse button.
4 Click a filename.
You can also create an embedded object by enabling the Create new option in
the Insert new object dialog box, and choosing the application in which you
want to create the object from the Object type list box.
You can also insert an embedded object by selecting an object in the source
application, and dragging it to the application window of Corel DESIGNER.

Editing linked or embedded objects

You can edit a linked or embedded object. You can edit a linked object by editing its
source file. Any changes you make to the source file are automatically applied to the
linked object. You can also modify a linked object; for example, you can update a linked
object, substitute the source file of a linked object for another, or break a link between
a linked object and its source file.

To edit a linked or embedded object

1 Double-click the linked or embedded object to start the source application.
2 Edit the object in the source application.
3 Save the changes in the source application.
4 Close the source application.
5 Return to the active application window to review the edits.

362

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

In most cases, you can edit OLE objects only in the source application. If you
try to change an OLE object using Corel DESIGNER, note the following
limitations. Depending on the source of the OLE object, you might not be able
to rotate, skew, clone, trim, weld, intersect, use as symbols, or combine OLE
objects. Also, you might not be able to apply any of the effects in the Effects
menu to OLE objects, except for PowerClip objects. You can only size, move,
and copy OLE objects and place them into PowerClip containers.
You can also edit linked or embedded objects by starting the source application
and opening the file directly.

To modify a linked object

1 Select a linked object using the Pick tool

2 Click Edit > Links.

3 Click one of the following buttons:
Update now updates the linked object to reflect changes made in the source
file
Open source opens the object in the source application
Change source redirects the link to another file
Break link disconnects the link so that the object is embedded in the file

Object linking and embedding

363

Importing and exporting files

Your application provides filters that convert files from one format to another when
you import or export files.
In this section, you will learn about
importing files
exporting files

Importing files
Your application lets you import files created in other applications. For example, you can
import a Portable Document Format (PDF), JPEG, or Adobe Illustrator (AI) file.
You can import a file and place it in the active application window as an object. You can
also resize and center a file as you import it. The imported file becomes part of the active
file. While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to reduce the file size or crop it to
eliminate unused areas of the photo. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact
area and size of the image you want to import.

To import a file into an active drawing

1 Click File > Import.
2 Choose the folder where the file is stored.
3 Choose a file format from the Files of type list box.
4 Click the filename.
5 Click Options>>.
If the file contains text in a language different from that of your operating system,
choose the corresponding option from the Code page list box to ensure that object
names, keywords, and notes are displayed correctly.
6 Enable any of the following check boxes that are available:

Importing and exporting files

365

 Link bitmap externally lets you link a bitmap externally instead of

embedding it in a file
Combine multi-layer bitmap automatically merges the layers within a
bitmap
Extract embedded ICC profile lets you save the embedded International
Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is
installed
Check for watermark lets you check the image for a watermark and any
information it contains, such as copyright
Do not show filter dialog lets you use the filters default settings without
opening its dialog box
Maintain layers and pages lets you preserve layers and pages when
importing files. If you disable the check box, all layers are combined into a single
layer.
Link to high resolution file for output using OPI lets you insert a lowresolution version of a TIFF or Scitex Continuous Tone (CT) file into a document.
The low-resolution version is linked with the high-resolution image, which
resides on an Open Prepress Interface (OPI) server.
7 Click Import, and do one of the following:
Click the drawing page to maintain original file and position top-left corner
where you click.
Click and drag on the drawing page to resize the file. The import cursor displays
the dimensions of the resized file as you drag on the drawing page.
Press Enter to center the file on the drawing page.
Active snapping options are applied to the imported file.
Not all importing options are available for all file formats.
Multi-layered bitmaps can be imported by default.
You can import multiple files. Hold down Shift + click to select consecutive
files in a list. Hold down Ctrl + click to select non-consecutive files.

To resample a bitmap while importing

1 Click File > Import.
2 Choose the folder where the image is stored.
3 Choose a file format from the Files of type list box.
366

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

4 Click the filename.

5 Click Options, and enable any of the following check boxes:
Link bitmap externally lets you link a bitmap externally instead of
embedding it in a file
Combine multi-layer bitmap automatically merges the layers within a
bitmap
Extract embedded ICC profile lets you save the embedded International
Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is
installed
Check for watermark lets you check the image for a watermark and any
information it contains such as copyright
Do not show filter dialog lets you use the filters default settings without
opening its dialog box
Maintain layers and pages lets you maintain layers and pages when
importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single
layer
6 Choose Resample from the list box, and click Import.
7 In the Resample image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes:
Width specifies the width of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or
as a percentage of its original width
Height specifies the height of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or
as a percentage of its original height
8 In the Resolution area, type values in the following boxes:
Horizontal lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the graphic in pixels
or dots per inch (dpi)
Vertical lets you specify the vertical resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots
per inch (dpi)
9 Click the drawing page.
You can also
Maintain the width-to-height ratio of the
image

Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check

box.

Change the units of measurement

Choose a unit type from the Units list box.

Maintain equal horizontal and vertical

resolution values automatically

Enable the Identical values check box.

Importing and exporting files

367

If a dialog box for the import format opens, specify the options you want. For
detailed information about file formats, see File formats in the
Corel DESIGNER Help.
Not all importing options are available for all file formats.

To crop a bitmap while importing

1 Click File > Import.
2 Choose the folder where the image is stored.
3 Choose a file format from the Files of type list box.
4 Click the filename.
5 Click Options, and enable any of the following active check boxes:
Link bitmap externally lets you link a bitmap externally instead of
embedding it in a file
Combine multi-layer bitmap automatically merges the layers within a
bitmap
Extract embedded ICC profile lets you save the embedded International
Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is
installed
Check for watermark lets you check the image for a watermark and any
information it contains such as copyright
Do not show filter dialog lets you use the filters default settings without
opening its dialog box
Maintain layers and pages lets you maintain layers and pages when
importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single
layer
6 Choose Crop from the list box, and click Import.
7 In the Crop image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes:
Top specifies the area to remove from the top of the graphic
Left specifies the area to remove from the left edge of the graphic
Width specifies the width of the graphic you want to keep
Height specifies the height of the graphic you want to keep
8 Click the drawing page.

368

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

You can also resize a graphic by dragging the selection handles in the preview
window.
You can change the units of measurement by choosing a unit type from the
Units list box in the Crop image dialog box.

Exporting files
You can export and save images to a variety of file formats that can be used in other
applications. For example, you can export a file to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) or GIF
format. You can also export a file so that it is optimized for use with a suite of office
productivity applications, such as Microsoft Word.
You can export a file to a selected file format. You can also export a file by saving the
open file under a different name or to a different file format while leaving the open file
in its existing format.

To export a file
1 Click File > Export.
2 Choose the folder where you want to save the file.
3 Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.
4 Type a filename in the File name list box.
5 Click Options, and enable any of the following active check boxes:
Export this page only exports only the current page in a multipage file
Selected only saves only the objects selected in the active drawing
Web_safe_filenames replaces the white space in a filename with an
underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based
filenames.
Do not show filter dialog suppresses dialog boxes that provide other options
when exporting
6 Click Export.
If a dialog box for the export format opens, specify the options you want. For
detailed information about file formats, see File formats in the
Corel DESIGNER Help.

Importing and exporting files

369

You can also

Compress a file on export

Choose a compression type from the

Compression type list box.

Specify information about a file

Type any comments you want in the Notes

box.

Not all of the options or the compression types in the Export dialog box are
available for all file formats.

To export to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office

1 Click File > Export for Office.
2 From the Export to list box, choose one of the following:
Microsoft Office lets you set options to optimize the file for different output
requirements
WordPerfect Office automatically optimizes the image for WordPerfect
Office by converting it to a WordPerfect Graphics file (WPG)
3 From the Graphic should be best suited for list box, choose one of the following:
Compatibility lets you save the drawing as a bitmap in the Portable Network
Graphic (PNG) file format. This preserves the appearance of the drawing when
you import it into an office application.
Editing lets you retain most of the editable elements in vector drawings by
saving the drawing in the Extended Metafile Format (EMF)
4 From the Optimized for list box, choose one of the following options:
Presentation lets you optimize the file for outputs such as slide shows or
online documents (96 dpi)
Desktop printing lets you maintain good image quality for desktop printing
(150 dpi)
Commercial printing lets you optimize the file for high-quality printing
(300 dpi)
An estimated file size appears in the lower-left corner of the dialog box.
5 Click OK.
6 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file.
7 Type a filename in the Filename list box.
370

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

8 Click Save.
You can also
Zoom in and out in the preview window

Using the Zoom in

or Zoom out
tool, click in the preview window.

Pan to view another area of the drawing

Using the Pan tool , drag in the preview

window until the area you want to see
becomes visible.

Only the options that apply to your output are available. For example, the
Optimized for options are available only if you choose the Microsoft Office
and Compatibility options.
Layers in a drawing are flattened when exported to Microsoft Office or
WordPerfect Office.

To save a file to a different format

1 Click File > Save as.
2 Choose the folder where you want to save the file.
3 Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.
4 Type a filename in the File name list box.
5 Click Options, and enable any of the following active check boxes:
Selected only saves only the objects selected in the active drawing
Web_safe_filenames replaces the white space in a filename with an
underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based
filenames.
Save with embedded VBA project lets you save, with the file, macros you
have created in the VBA editor
6 Click Save.
You can also
Specify information about a file

Importing and exporting files

Type any comments you want in the Notes

box.

371

You can also

Add keywords

Type any keywords you want in the

Keywords box.

Not all of the options or the compression types in the Save drawing dialog box
are available for all file formats.

372

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Customizing your application

You can customize your application by arranging command bars and commands to suit
your needs. Command bars include menus, toolbars, the property bar, and the status
bar.
Help topics are based on the applications default settings. When you customize
command bars, commands, and buttons, the Help topics associated with them do not
reflect your changes.
In this section, youll learn about
saving defaults
using multiple workspaces
customizing keyboard shortcuts
customizing menus
customizing toolbars
customizing the property bar
customizing the status bar
customizing feedback sounds
customizing filters
customizing file associations

Saving defaults
Many application settings apply to the active drawing only. These include page layout
options, grid and ruler settings, guideline settings, style options, save options, some tool
settings, and Web publishing options. Saving the current settings as defaults lets you
use the settings of the active drawing for all new drawings you create. You can also
choose to save only specific settings as defaults.

Customizing your application

373

To save current settings as defaults

Click Tools > Save settings as default.

To save specific settings as defaults

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, click Document.
3 Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box.
4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the options you want to save.

Using multiple workspaces

A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars,
commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. You can create,
choose, and delete workspaces. You can also reset the current workspace to the default
settings.
You can export and import workspaces to and from other computers that use the same
application. For example, you can customize a workspace and share it with a group of
users.

To create a workspace
1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the list of categories, click Workspace.
3 Click New.
4 Type the name of the workspace in the Name of new workspace box.
5 From the Base new workspace on list box, choose an existing workspace on
which to base the new workspace.
If you want to include a description of the workspace, type a description in the
Description of new workspace box.
Custom workspaces are saved as XML files and exported as XML-based
Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT) files.

374

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To choose a workspace
1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the list of categories, click Workspace.
3 Enable the check box beside a workspace in the Workspace list.
If you want to be able to choose a workspace as you start the application, make sure
that the Select workspace at startup check box is enabled.

To delete a workspace
1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the list of categories, click Workspace.
3 Choose a workspace from the Workspace list.
4 Click Delete.
You cannot delete the default workspace.

To reset the current workspace

Hold down F8 while the application is starting.

To import a workspace
1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the list of categories, click Workspace.
3 Click Import.
4 In the Import workspace dialog box, click Browse.
5 Choose the folder where the file is stored.
6 Double-click the file.
7 Follow the instructions on screen.

To export a workspace
1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the list of categories, click Workspace.
3 Click Export.
Customizing your application

375

4 Enable the check boxes beside the workspace items you want to export.
5 Click Save.
6 Choose the folder where you want to save the file.
7 Type a filename in the File name box.
8 Click Save.
9 Click Close.
The workspace items available for export are dockers, toolbars (including the
property bar and toolbox), menus, status bar, and shortcut keys.
Custom workspaces are exported as XML-based Extensible Stylesheet
Language Transformations (XSLT) files. You can use a workspace saved to the
XSLT format when you set up or deploy custom workspaces.
You can send a workspace as an e-mail attachment by clicking Email in the
Export workspace dialog box.

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Although your application has preset keyboard shortcuts, you can change them, or add
your own shortcuts, to suit your working style. You can assign keyboard shortcuts to
the commands you use the most, and you can delete any keyboard shortcuts that you
dont use.
You can print a list of keyboard shortcuts. You can also export a list of keyboard
shortcuts to the CSV file format a comma delimited format that is easily opened by
word processors and spreadsheet applications.
When you change keyboard shortcuts, the changes are saved in a file called an
accelerator table. Your application comes with two accelerator tables which can be
customized to suit your work habits:
Main table contains all non-text-related shortcut keys
Text editing table contains all text-related shortcut keys

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

1 Click Tools > Customization.
376

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3 Click the Shortcut keys tab.
4 Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.
5 Choose a command category from the top list box.
6 Click a command in the Commands list.
The shortcut keys currently assigned to the selected command are displayed in the
Current shortcut keys box.
7 Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination.
If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is
listed in the Currently assigned to box.
8 Click Assign.
If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the
second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict
on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose
shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut.
You can reset all keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all.
You can view all of the existing keyboard shortcuts by clicking View all.

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Click the Shortcut keys tab.
4 Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.
5 Choose Apply styles from the top list box.
6 Choose a text style from the list.
The shortcut keys currently assigned to applying the selected style are displayed in
the Current shortcut keys box.
7 Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination.
If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is
listed in the Currently assigned to box.
Customizing your application

377

8 Click Assign.
If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the
second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict
on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose
shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut.
You can all reset keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all.

To delete a keyboard shortcut

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Click the Shortcut keys tab.
4 Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.
5 Choose a command category from the top list box.
6 Click a command in the Commands list.
7 Click a shortcut key in the Current shortcut keys box.
8 Click Delete.

To print keyboard shortcuts

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Click the Shortcut keys tab.
4 Click View all.
5 Click Print.

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts

1 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
2 Click the Shortcut keys tab.
3 Click View all.
4 Click Export to CSV.
378

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

5 Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

6 Type a filename in the File name box.
7 Click Save.

Customizing menus
Corel customization features let you modify the menu bar and the menus it contains.
You can change the order of menus and menu commands; add, remove, and rename
menus and menu commands; and add and remove menu command separators. You can
search for a menu command if you do not remember the menu in which it belongs. You
can also reset menus to the default setting.
The customization options apply to the menu bar menus as well as to shortcut menus
that you access by right-clicking.
Help topics are based on the applications default settings. When you customize menus
and menu commands, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes.

To change the order of menus and menu commands

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 In the application window, drag a menu on the menu bar to the left or right.
If you want to change the order of a menu command, click a menu on the menu
bar, click a menu command, and drag it up or down.
If you want to change the order of context menu commands, right-click in the
application window to display the context menu, and drag a menu command to a
new position.

To rename a menu or menu command

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Click a menu or command in the list.
A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu.
5 Click the Appearance tab.
Customizing your application

379

6 Type a name in the Caption box.

An ampersand (&) before a letter in the Caption box indicates a shortcut, also
known as a mneumonic accelerator key. Menus are displayed by pressing Alt
+ the letter. Commands are invoked by pressing the letter when the menu is
displayed.
You can reset the name to the default by clicking Restore defaults.

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
If you want to remove an item, drag it off the menu bar.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Drag an item to the menu bar.
A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. All other items
in the list are commands.

To add or remove a command on a menu

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
If you want to remove a command from a menu, click the menu name, and when
the menu displays, drag the command off the menu.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Drag a command to a menu in the application window.

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
If you want to remove a command separator from a menu, click the menu name,
and when the menu displays, drag the command separator off the menu.
3 Choose User menus from the top list box.
380

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

4 Click Separator and drag it onto a menu in the application window.

To find a menu command quickly

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Click the Search button

4 From the Find text dialog box, type the menu command in the Find what box.
5 Click Find next.

To reset menus to the default setting

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.
3 Choose Menu bar from the list.
4 Click Reset.

Customizing toolbars
You can customize toolbar position and display. For example, you can move or resize a
toolbar, and you can choose to hide or display a toolbar.
Toolbars can be either docked or floating. Docking a toolbar attaches it to the edge of
the application window. Undocking a toolbar pulls it away from the edge of the
application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around.
You can create, delete, and rename custom toolbars. You can customize toolbars by
adding, removing, and arranging toolbar items. You can adjust toolbar appearance by
resizing buttons; adjusting the toolbar border; and displaying images, captions, or both.
You can also edit toolbar button images.
When moving, docking, and undocking toolbars, you use the grab area of the toolbar.
For a

The grab area is

Docked toolbar

Identified by a double line at

the top or left edge of the
toolbar

Customizing your application

381

For a

The grab area is

Floating toolbar

The title bar. If the title is

not displayed, the grab area
is identified by a double line
at the top or left edge of the
toolbar.

To customize toolbar position and display

To

Do the following

Move a toolbar

Click the toolbars grab area, and drag the

toolbar to a new position.

Dock a toolbar

Click the toolbars grab area, and drag the

toolbar to any edge of the application
window.

Undock a toolbar

Click the toolbars grab area, and drag the

toolbar away from the edge of the
application window.

Resize a floating toolbar

Point to the edge of the toolbar and, using

the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of
the toolbar.

Hide or display a toolbar

Click Tools > Customization, click

Command bars, and disable or enable the
check box next to the toolbar name.

Reset a toolbar to its default setting

Click Tools > Customization, click

Command bars, click a toolbar, and click
Reset.

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To

Do the following

Add a custom toolbar

Click Tools > Customization, click

Command bars, click New, and type a
name.

382

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To

Do the following

Delete a custom toolbar

Click Tools > Customization, click

Command bars, click a toolbar, and click
Delete.

Rename a custom toolbar

Click Tools > Customization, click

Command bars, click a toolbar name twice,
and type a new name.

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Drag a toolbar item from the list to a toolbar in the application window.
If you want to remove an item from a toolbar, drag the toolbar item off the toolbar.

To arrange toolbar items

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 On the toolbar in the application window, drag the toolbar item to a new position.
If you want to move a toolbar item to another toolbar, drag the toolbar item icon
from one toolbar to the other.
You can copy a toolbar item to another toolbar by holding down Ctrl while
dragging a toolbar item.

To modify toolbar appearance

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.
3 Click a toolbar name in the list.
If you want to choose multiple toolbars, hold down Ctrl, and click the other
toolbar names.
4 Choose a size from the Button list box.
Customizing your application

383

5 In the Border box, click an arrow to specify a value from 1 to 10 pixels for the
toolbar border.
6 From the Default button appearance list box, choose one of the following:
Caption below image
Caption only
Caption to right of image
Default
Image only
If you want to hide the title when the toolbar is floating, disable the Show title
when toolbar is floating check box.
You can reset a built-in toolbar to its default settings by clicking Reset.

To edit a toolbar button image

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Click a toolbar command.
5 Click the Appearance tab.
6 Edit the button image using the options in the Image area.
When you choose either Small or Medium in the Size list box, you edit the
small or medium versions of a particular button image. You cannot edit the
large version of a button image. For information about how to display all
buttons as small, medium, or large, see To modify toolbar appearance on
page 383.
You can reset toolbar button images to the default settings by clicking Restore
defaults.

Customizing the property bar

You have control over the placement and content of the property bar. You can move the
property bar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the application window creates a
384

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

floating property bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the application window docks
it, making it part of the window border.
When moving, docking, or undocking the property bar, you use the grab area of the
property bar, which is the same as the grab area of a toolbar. For more information about
the grab area, see Customizing toolbars on page 381.
You can also set up a custom property bar by adding, removing, and rearranging toolbar
items. This lets you customize what appears on the property bar when you choose
various tools. For example, when the Text tool is active, you can have the property bar
display additional commands for text-related tasks such as increasing or decreasing font
size, or changing case.

To position the property bar

To

Do the following

Move the property bar

Click the property bars grab area, and drag

the property bar to a new position.

Undock the property bar

Click the property bars grab area, and drag

the property bar away from the edge of the
application window.

Dock the property bar

Click the property bars grab area, and drag

the property bar to any edge of the
application window.

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Drag a toolbar item from the list to the property bar.
If you want to remove an item from the property bar, drag the toolbar item icon off
the property bar.
The new item is displayed on the property bar for the active tool or task. When
the property bar content changes, the item is not displayed. The new item is
displayed again when the related tool or task is activated.
Customizing your application

385

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position on the property bar.

Customizing the status bar

The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as color, fill type, and
outline.The status bar also shows the current mouse position and relevant commands.
You can customize the status bar by resizing it. If you want to see more of the
application window, you can hide the status bar.You can also customize the status bar
by adding, removing, and resizing toolbar items.

To resize the status bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.
3 Click Status bar, and enable the check box.
4 Type 1 or 2 in the Number of lines when docked box.

To hide the status bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.
3 Disable the check box beside Status bar.
You can also switch between hiding and displaying the status bar by clicking
View > Toolbars > Status bar.

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.
3 Choose a command category from the top list box.
4 Drag a toolbar item from the list to the status bar.
386

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

If you want to remove a toolbar item from the status bar, drag the item off the
status bar.

To resize toolbar items on the status bar

1 Click Tools > Customization.
2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.
3 Click Status bar, and enable the check box.
4 Choose one of the following options from the Button list box:
Small
Medium
Large
Only toolbar items you have added to the status bar are affected by resizing.
The size of the default icons remains unchanged.

Customizing feedback sounds

Your application supports sounds through the Windows operating system. These
sounds, which provide feedback through audio cues, are associated with certain user
interface events. Though your application registers events available for sound cues, it
does not supply any sounds. You can assign feedback sounds to specific events. Once
assigned, feedback sounds are enabled by default, but you can disable them.

To assign feedback sounds

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar.
2 Click Settings > Control panel.
3 Double-click Sounds.
4 From the Sound events list, choose an event below the application name.
5 Choose a sound from the Name list box.
For more information about feedback sounds, consult your operating systems
Help file.

Customizing your application

387

To assign feedback sounds (Windows XP)

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar.
2 Click Control panel.
3 Click Sounds, speech, and audio devices.
4 Click Sounds and audio devices.
5 In the Sounds and audio properties dialog box, click the Sounds tab.
6 From the Program events list, choose an event below the application name.
7 Choose a sound from the Sounds list box.

To disable feedback sounds

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, click General.
3 Disable the Enable sounds check box.
You must restart the application for the disable command to take effect.

Customizing filters
Filters are used to convert files from one format to another. They are organized into four
types: raster, vector, animation, and text. You can customize filter settings by adding or
removing filters so that only the filters you need are loaded. You can also change the
order of the list of filters and reset filters to the default setting.

To add a filter
1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.
3 Double-click a type of filter in the Available file types list.
4 Click a filter.
5 Click Add.

To remove a filter
1 Click Tools > Options.
388

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3 Click a filter in the List of active filters.
4 Click Remove.

To change the order of the list of filters

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.
3 Click a filter in the List of active filters.
4 Click one of the following:
Move up moves the filter up the list
Move down moves the filter down the list
You can reset the List of active filters to the default setting by clicking Reset.

Customizing file associations

You can associate a number of different file types with Corel applications. When you
double-click a file you have associated with an application, the application starts and the
file opens. When you no longer need a file type association, you can break it.

To associate a file type with Corel DESIGNER

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.
3 Click Associate.
4 In the Associated file extensions with Corel DESIGNER list, enable the check
box of the file type you want to associate.
You can reset file associations by clicking Reset.

To break a Corel DESIGNER file type association

1 Click Tools > Options.
2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.
Customizing your application

389

3 Click Associate.
4 In the Associated file extensions with Corel DESIGNER list, disable the check
box of the file type association you want break.
You can reset file associations by clicking Reset.

390

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Automating application tasks

Tasks can be automated using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA).
In this section, youll learn about:
automating by using VBA
using VBA macros
working in the Visual Basic Editor
installing add-ins

Automating by using VBA

Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is an object-oriented programming language that
lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. You can record a series of operations as
a VBA macro and run it in the drawing window. For example, you can create a VBA
macro that draws a rectangle and fills it with a two-color fountain fill.
VBA is an embedded subset of the Microsoft Visual Basic (VB) development
environment. Even though VBA uses the Visual Basic programming language, it is
considered for applications because it is integrated into another application in order
to customize the functionality of that application.
VBA enables you to build custom solutions within your application that can automate
and extend application functionality, integrate with other applications, and shorten the
development cycle of custom business solutions. It allows you to create solutions that
reuse and extend your application. By incorporating VBA, Corel provides an
international programming language to users.
For more information about working in VBA, see the VBA Help included with the
application. For information on how to access the Corel DESIGNER VBA Help, see To
access the Corel DESIGNER VBA Help on page 393.

Automating application tasks

391

Using VBA macros

VBA allows you to record and run macros that automate a series of tasks within an
application.
You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once you have
saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and access the macro. You
can also access a macro from an open global macro storage (GMS) file. After you have
developed the macro, you should edit it to remove any bugs in the program by stepping
through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to ensure that the macro will
have the desired outcome. You can play the macro before or after debugging it.
For more detailed instruction relating to VBA and its programming environment,
consult the Microsoft Visual Basic Help from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor.

To record a VBA macro

1 Click Tools > Visual Basic > Record.
2 Type a name for the script in the Macro name box.
3 Perform the actions you want to record.
4 Click Tools > Visual Basic > Stop.
Some commands cannot be recorded in a VBA macro.
You can also record a VBA macro by clicking Window > Undo manager,
performing the actions you want to record in the drawing window and clicking
the Save list to a VBA macro button in the Undo manager docker.

To run a VBA macro

1 Click Tools > Visual Basic > Play.
2 Choose the macro you want to play from the list under Macro name.
If the macro you want isnt listed, choose the project where the macro was saved
from the Macros in list box.
3 Click Run.
You can access a macro from either an open global macro storage (GMS) file or
an open document.
392

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

To edit a VBA macro

1 Click Tools > Visual Basic > Play.
2 Choose the macro you want to edit.
3 Click Edit.
4 Use the Visual Basic Editor to edit the macro.

Working in the Visual Basic Editor

When you work in the Visual Basic Editor, you can create a new object, such as a dialog
box, which is known as a form. You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box.
You can set the objects properties in the Properties dialog box. You can also set the
objects properties at run time by programming a method.
Each document that you create with VBA has a corresponding project. In order to
customize your document with VBA coding procedures, you must open the project
window in the Visual Basic Editor.
For more detailed information on constructing code procedures and setting properties,
consult the Microsoft Visual Basic Help from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor.
For descriptions and code samples of properties, methods, and events in the
Corel DESIGNER Object Model, you can access the Corel DESIGNER VBA Help.

To create a project by using Visual Basic Editor

1 Click Tools > Visual Basic > Visual Basic Editor.
2 Use the Visual Basic Editor to create a project.
For more information about working with VBA, consult the Microsoft Visual
Basic Help from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor.

To access the Corel DESIGNER VBA Help

1

Click Tools > Visual Basic > Visual Basic Editor.

Press F2.
The Object browser displays.

Choose CorelDesigner from the Library list box.

Automating application tasks

393

Press F1.

Installing add-ins
You can install add-ins by following the documentation provided by a third party
developer. Add-ins are separate modules that extend the functionality of the
application. Most add-ins automatically load when the application starts up; however,
you can override this specification through the Add-in Manager. If an add-in doesnt
load immediately, double-check the Add-in Manager to make sure it is included in the
list of add-ins.
You can also unload an add-in if you want to temporarily remove it from the user
interface.

To load or unload an add-in

1 Click Tools > Visual Basic > Add-in manager.
2 Enable the Loaded/unloaded check box.
You can view a list of all add-ins in the Add-In manager dialog box.
Depending on the specifications included upon the creation of the add-in, you
may be able to access it directly by clicking Tools > Visual Basic > Add-ins.

394

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

Glossary
A B C D E F G H I JK L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
A
accelerator table
A file that contains a list of shortcut keys. Different tables are active depending on the
task that you are performing.
anchor point
The point that remains stationary when you stretch, scale, mirror, or skew an object.
Anchor points correspond to the eight handles that display when an object is selected,
as well as the center of a selection box marked by an X.
animation file
A file that supports moving images; for example, animated GIF and QuickTime
(MOV).
anti-aliasing
A method of smoothing curved and diagonal edges in images. Intermediate pixels along
edges are filled to smooth the transition between the edges and the surrounding area.
arrow keys
Direction keys that move or nudge selected objects in small increments. You can also
use arrow keys to position the cursor when you type or edit text onscreen or in a dialog
box.
artistic text
A type of text created with the Text tool. Use artistic text to add short lines of text, such
as titles, or to apply graphic effects, such as fitting text to a path, creating extrusions
and blends, and creating all other special effects. An artistic text object can contain up
to 32,000 characters.
aspect ratio
The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For
example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3.
Glossary

395

axonometric
A type of orthographic projection in which three faces of a projected cube are visible.
Dimetric, trimetric, and isometric are types of axonometric projection.
B
base color
The color of the object that appears under a transparency. The base color and the color
of the transparency combine in various ways depending on the merge mode you apply
to the transparency.
Bzier line
A straight or curved line made up of segments connected by nodes. Each node has
control points that allow the shape of the line to be modified.
bit depth
The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap. For
example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be
black or white. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal
to 2 to the power of the bit depth.
bitmap
An image composed of grids of pixels or dots.
See also vector graphic.
black-and-white color mode
A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors - black and white - with no
gradations. This color mode is useful for line art and simple graphics.
bleed
The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the page. The bleed
ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and
trimming.
blend
An effect created by transforming one object into another through a progression of
shapes and colors.

396

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

bookmark
An indicator for marking an address on the Internet.
bounding box
The invisible box indicated by the eight selection handles surrounding a selected object.
brightness
The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color
mode, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. For example, a
brightness value of 0 produces black, and a brightness value of 255 produces white.
C
cascading style sheet (CSS)
An extension to HTML that allows styles such as color, font, and size to be specified for
parts of a hypertext document. Style information can be shared by multiple HTML files.
See also HTML.
center of rotation
The point around which an object rotates.
CGI script
An external application that is executed by an HTTP server in response to an action you
perform in a Web browser, such as clicking a link, image, or another interactive element
of a Web page
character
A letter, number, punctuation mark, or other symbol.
child color
A color style created as a shade of another color style. For most of the available color
models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent, but have different
saturation and brightness levels.
See also parent color.
choke
In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object
into the foreground object.
Glossary

397

clipart
Ready-made images that can be imported into Corel applications and edited if required.
Clipboard
An area that is used to temporarily store cut or copied information. The information is
stored until new information is cut or copied to the Clipboard, replacing the old.
clone
A copy of an object or an area of an image that is linked to a master object or image
area. Most changes made to the master are automatically applied to its clones.
See also symbol.
closed object
An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are connected.
closed path
A path whose start point and end point are connected.
CMYK
A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). CMYK
printing produces true blacks and a wide tonal range. In the CMYK color mode, color
values are expressed as percentages; therefore, a value of 100 for an ink means that the
ink is applied at full saturation.
code page
A code page is a table in the DOS or Windows operating system that defines which
ASCII or ANSI character set is used for displaying text. Different character sets are used
for different languages.
collection
A group of symbol library files.
color channel
An 8-bit grayscale version of an image. Each channel represents one level of color in the
image; for example, RGB has three color channels, while CMYK has four. When all the
channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image.
See also RGB and CMYK.

398

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

color gamut
The range of colors that can be reproduced or perceived by any device. For example, a
monitor displays a different color gamut than a printer, making it necessary to manage
colors from original images to final output.
color mode
A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up an image. Blackand-white, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and paletted are examples of color modes.
color model
A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB
(red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow,
black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), and CIE
L*a*b (Lab) are examples of color models.
color palette
A collection of solid colors from which you can choose colors for fills and outlines.
color profile
A description of the color-handling capabilities and characteristics of a device.
color separation
In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce
a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image.
In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black) must be made.
color space
In electronic color management, a virtual representation of a device or the color gamut
of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by
color management software.
See also color gamut.
color swatch
A solid-colored patch in a color palette.

Glossary

399

color value
A set of numbers that define a color in a color mode. For example, in the RGB color
mode, color values of 255 for red (R) and zero for both green (G) and blue (B) result in
the color red.
combined object
An object created by combining two or more objects and converting them into a single
curve object. A combined object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the last
selected object. Sections where an even number of objects overlapped have no fill.
Sections where an odd number of objects overlapped are filled. The outlines of the
original objects remain visible.
compound blend
A blend created by blending the start or end object of one blend with another object.
concave
Hollowed or rounded inward like the inside of a bowl.
content
The object or objects that appear inside a container object when you apply PowerClip
effects.
constrain key
A key you hold to constrain drawing and editing to a shape or at an angle. The default
key is Ctrl. You can change the default key to Shift, the Windows standard, on the Pick
tool page of the Options dialog box.
contour
An effect created by adding evenly spaced concentric shapes inside or outside the
borders of an object.
contrast
The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast
values indicate greater differences and fewer gradations between dark and light.
control object
The original object used to create effects such as envelopes, extrusions, drop shadows,
contours, and objects created with the Artistic media tool. Changes made to the control
object control the appearance of the effect.
400

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

control points
The points that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape
tool. Control points determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node.
convex
Curved or rounded outwards like the exterior of a sphere or circle.
crop
To cut unwanted areas of an image without affecting the resolution of the part that
remains.
curve object
An object that has nodes and control points, which you can manipulate to change the
object's shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line.
cusp
A point or corner created where two curves meet.
D
desktop
The area in a drawing where you can experiment and create objects for future use. This
area is outside the borders of the drawing page. You can drag objects from the desktop
area to the drawing page when you decide to use them.
DeviceN
A type of color space and device color model. This color space is multi-component,
allowing color to be defined by other than the standard set of three (RGB) and four
(CMYK) color components.
diacritical mark
An accent mark above, below, or through a written character; for example, the acute
() and cedilla () accents.
dimension line
A line that displays the size of objects or the distance or angle between objects.

Glossary

401

dithering
A process used to simulate a greater number of colors when only a limited number of
colors is available.
document navigator
The area at the bottom-left of the application window that contains controls for moving
between pages and adding pages. The document navigator also displays the page
number of the active page and the total number of pages in a drawing.
dpi (dots per inch)
A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print
at 600 dpi. Image setters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities
produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning
resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution.
drawing
A document you create in Corel DESIGNER.
drawing page
The portion of a drawing window enclosed by a rectangle with a shadow effect.
drawing plane
The area bounded by two axes in the drawing profile. The top drawing plane is bounded
by the x and z axes. The front drawing plane is bounded by the x and y axes. The right
drawing plane is bounded by the y and z axes.
drawing profile
A group of settings that determines how three-dimensional objects are represented in
two dimensions.
drawing window
The portion of the application window on which you can create, add, and edit objects.
drop shadow
A three-dimensional shadow effect that gives objects a realistic appearance.

402

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

duotone
An 8-bit color mode that displays images using 256 shades of up to four tones. An
image in the duotone color mode is simply a grayscale image that has been enhanced
with one to four additional colors.
dynamic guides
Temporary guidelines that appear from the following snap points in objects center,
node, quadrant, and text baseline.
E
envelope
A closed shape that can be placed around an object to change the object's shape. An
envelope consists of segments connected by nodes. Once an envelope has been placed
around an object, the nodes can be moved to change the shape of the object.
extrusion
A feature that lets you apply a three-dimensional perspective by projecting lines from
an object to create the illusion of depth.
F
feathering
The level of sharpness along a drop shadow's edges.
fill
A color, bitmap, fountain, or pattern applied to an area of an image.
filter
An application that translates digital information from one form to another.
floating object
A bitmap with no background. Floating objects are also referred to as photo objects or
cutout images.
font
A set of characters with a single style (such as italic), weight (such as bold), and size
(such as 10 point) for a typeface such as Times New Roman.

Glossary

403

fountain fill
A smooth progression of two or more colors applied to an area of an image that follow
a linear, radial, conical, or square path. Two-color fountain fills have a direct progression
from one color to another, while custom fills may have a progression of many colors.
fountain steps
The shades of color that make up the appearance of a fountain fill. The more steps in a
fill, the smoother the transition from the beginning color to the end color.
freehand marquee select
To marquee select objects or nodes by holding down the Alt key while dragging the
Shape tool and controlling the shape of the marquee box enclosure as if you were
drawing a freehand line.
See also marquee select.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A method of moving files between two computers. Many Internet sites have established
repositories of material that can be obtained using FTP.
G
GIF
A graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily exchanged
between computers. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 or fewer
colors to the Internet.
glyph
Diamond-shaped handles that can be dragged to alter the form of a shape.
grab area
The area of a command bar that can be dragged. Dragging the grab area moves the bar,
while dragging any other area of the bar has no effect. The location of the grab area
depends on the operating system you are using, the orientation of the bar, and whether
the bar is docked or undocked. Command bars with grab areas include toolbars, the
toolbox, and the property bar.
gravity candidate
A snap point that attracts the pointer. A box, tool tip, or status bar prompt appears
when the gravity candidate is active and has become a gravity source.
404

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

gravity field
The area around a gravity candidate. If you are within this distance, a box or tool tip
may appear, and a prompt appears on the status bar.
gravity source
An active gravity candidate that is the snap point when you click.
grayscale
A color mode that displays images using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a
value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white).
greeking
A method of representing text using either words that have no meaning or a series of
straight lines.
grid
A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical dots that are used to help draw and
arrange objects.
group
A set of objects that behaves as one unit. Operations you perform on a group apply
equally to each of its objects.
guideline
A horizontal, vertical, or slanted line that can be placed anywhere in the drawing
window to aid in object placement.
gutter
The space between columns of text, also called the alley. In printing, the white space
formed by the inside margins of two facing pages.
H
halftone
An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of
various sizes to represent different tones.

Glossary

405

handles
A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the
object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize or mirror the
object. If you click a selected object, the shape of the handles changes to arrows so that
you can rotate and skew the object.
halo
A mask behind a line that makes it easier to see when the line is on top of another object.
Halos are usually the same color as the page.
hotspot
The area of an object that you can click to jump to the address specified by a URL.
hot zone
The distance from the right margin at which hyphenation begins.
HSB (hue, saturation, brightness)
A color model that defines three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue
determines color (yellow, orange, red, and so on); brightness determines perceived
intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to
intense).
HTML
The World Wide Web authoring standard comprised of markup tags that define the
structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate
resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page.
hue
The property of a color that allows it to be classified by its name. For example, blue,
green, and red are all hues.
hyperlink
An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another
place in that document or to another document.
I
icon
A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other application item.
406

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

image map
A graphic in an HTML document that contains clickable areas that link to locations on
the World Wide Web, to other HTML documents, or to graphics.
image resolution
The number of pixels per inch in a bitmap measured in ppi (pixels per inch) or dpi (dots
per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance to the bitmap; high
resolutions can produce smoother images but result in larger file sizes.
imagesetter
A high-resolution device that creates film or film-based paper output used in the
production of plates for printing presses.
insert
To import and place a photo image, clipart object, or sound file into a drawing.
intensity
Intensity is a measure of the brightness of the light pixels in a bitmap compared with
the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. An increase in intensity increases the vividness of
whites while maintaining true darks.
interlacing
In GIF images, a method that lets you display a Web-based image on the screen at a
low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality improves.
isometric
A type of projection characterized by three axes at right angles. Objects can be
represented as three-dimensional by projecting them. A square becomes one of the faces
of a cube when it is projected. Isometric projections use angles that are increments of
30 degrees.
J
JavaScript
A scripting language used on the World Wide Web to add interactive functions to
HTML pages.

Glossary

407

JPEG
A format for photographic images that offers compression with some loss of image
quality. Because of their compression (up to 20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images
are widely used in Internet publishing.
justify
To modify the spacing between characters and words so that the edges on the left, right,
or both margins of a block of text are even.
K
kerning
The space between characters, and the adjustment of that space. Often, kerning is used
to place two characters closer together than usual, for example WA, AW, TA, or VA.
Kerning increases readability and makes letters appear balanced and proportional,
especially at larger font sizes.
L
Lab
A color model that contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two
chromatic components: a (green to red) and b (blue to yellow).
leader tabs
A row of characters placed between text objects to help the reader follow a line across
white space. Leader tabs are often used in place of tab stops, especially before text that
is flush right such as in a list or table of contents.
leading
The spacing between lines of text. Leading is important for both readability and
appearance.
library
The area in a Corel DESIGNER (DES) file that contains symbol definitions and
information about instances.
lightness
The level of brightness that is shared between a transparency and the object to which it
is applied. For example, if a transparency is applied to an object whose color appears
bright, the transparency color will take on a comparable brightness. The same holds
408

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

true for a transparency that is applied to an object whose color appears darkthe
transparency will take on a comparable darkness.
lossless
A kind of file compression that maintains the quality of an image that has been
compressed and decompressed.
lossy
A kind of file compression that results in noticeable degradation of image quality.
LZW
A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing
time. LZW compression is commonly used on GIF and TIFF files.
M
marquee select
To select objects or nodes by dragging the Pick tool or Shape tool diagonally and
enclosing objects in a marquee box with a dotted outline.
master object
An object that has been cloned. Most changes you make to the master object are
automatically applied to the clone.
master layer
A layer on a master page whose objects appear on every page of a multipage drawing.
A master page can have more than one master layer.
master page
A page that controls the master settings for the Grid, Guideline, and Desktop layers
plus one initial active layer.
mesh fill
A type of fill that lets you add patches of color to the inside of a selected object.
micro nudge
To move an object in small increments.
See also nudge and super nudge.

Glossary

409

miter limit
A value that determines when two lines that meet at a sharp angle switch from a
pointed (mitered) joint to a squared-off (beveled) joint.
moir pattern
The visual effect of radiating curves created by superimposing two regular patterns. For
example, a moir pattern can result by overlapping two halftone screens of different
angles, dot spacing, and dot size. Moir patterns are the undesirable result of
rescreening an image with a different halftone screen or with the same halftone screen
on an angle different from the original.
multiple select
To select multiple objects using the Pick tool or multiple nodes using the Shape tool.
N
nested group
A group of two or more groups that behaves as one object.
nested PowerClip objects
Containers that hold other containers to form complex PowerClip objects.
nested symbol
A symbol definition that contains one or more other definitions.
nodes
The square points at each end of a line or curve segment. You can change the shape of
a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes.
noise
In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a
television screen.
nonprinting characters
Items that appear on the screen but do not print. They include the rulers, guidelines,
table gridlines, hidden text, and formatting symbols, such as spaces, hard returns, tabs,
and indents.

410

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

nudge
To move an object in increments.
See also micro nudge and super nudge.
O
object
A generic term for any item you create or place in a drawing. Objects include lines,
shapes, graphics, and text.
one-point perspective
An effect created by lengthening or shortening one side of an object to create the
impression that the object is receding from view in one direction.
opacity
The quality of an object that makes it difficult to see through. If an object is 100%
opaque, you cannot see through it. Opacity levels under 100% increase the ability to
see through objects.
See also transparency.
open object
An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are not connected.
origin
The point in the drawing window at which the rulers intersect.
orthogonal
A view of an object that is perpendicular to one plane. A cube appears as a square since
only one plane is visible.
output resolution
The number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser
printer, produces.
outline
The line that defines the shape of an object.
overexposure
Excessive light in an image that gives it a washed-out appearance.
Glossary

411

P
paletted color mode
An 8-bit color mode that displays images using up to 256 colors. You can convert a
complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to control the colors
used throughout the conversion process more precisely.
pan
To move the drawing page around in the drawing window. Panning changes the page
view in the same way that scrolling moves the drawing up, down, to the left, or to the
right in the drawing window. When working at high magnification levels where not all
of the drawing is displayed, you can quickly pan to see parts of the drawing that were
previously hidden.
PANOSE font matching
A feature that lets you choose a substitute font if you open a file that contains a font not
installed on your computer. You can make a substitution for the current working
session only, or you can permanently make a substitution so that when you save and
reopen the file, the new font automatically displays.
PANTONE process colors
The colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color System, which is
based on the CMYK color model.
paragraph text
A text type that allows you to apply formatting options and directly edit large blocks
of text.
parent color
An original color style that you can save and apply to objects in a drawing. You can
create child colors from the parent color.
See also child color.
path
The basic component from which objects are constructed. A path can be open (for
example, a line) or closed (for example, a circle), and it can be made up of a single line
or curve segment or many joined segments.

412

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

pattern fill
A fill consisting of a series of repeating vector objects or images.
pixel
A colored dot that is the smallest part of a bitmap.
See also resolution.
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
A graphic file format designed for use in online viewing. This format can import 24-bit
color graphics.
point
A unit of measure used primarily in typesetting to define type sizes. There are
approximately 72 points to an inch and 12 points to a pica.
PostScript fill
A type of texture fill designed using the PostScript language.
PowerClip effect
A way of arranging objects that lets you contain one object inside another.
PowerClip object
An object created by placing objects (contents objects) inside other objects (container
objects). If the contents object is larger than the container object, the contents object is
automatically cropped. Only the contents that fit inside the container object are visible.
process color
In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow,
and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed
individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color).
progressive
In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear on screen in its entirety, at a low,
blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves.

Glossary

413

Q
QuickCorrect
A feature that automatically displays the fully worded form for abbreviations or the
correct form for errors as you type. You can use QuickCorrect to capitalize words or
to correct common spelling and typographic errors automatically; for example,
QuickCorrect can replace asap with as soon as possible and hte with the.
R
radius
As applied to orbits, sets the distance between the center of the brush stroke and the
nibs that travel around the center of the brush stroke when you paint with orbits.
Increasing this value increases the size of the brush stroke.
range sensitivity
A paletted color mode option that lets you specify a focus color for the paletted
conversion. You can adjust the color and specify its importance to guide converting.
rasterized image
An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphics files to
bitmap files, you create rasterized images.
render
To capture a two-dimensional image from a three-dimensional model.
resample
To change the resolution and dimensions of a bitmap. Upsampling increases the size of
the image; downsampling decreases the size of the image. Resampling with fixed
resolution lets you maintain the resolution of the image by adding or subtracting pixels
while varying the image size. Resampling with variable resolution keeps the number of
pixels unchanged while changing the image size, resulting in lower or higher resolution
than that of the original image.
resolution
The amount of detail that an image file contains, or that an input, output, or display
device is capable of producing. Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch) or ppi
(pixels per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance; high resolutions can
produce higher quality images but result in larger file sizes.

414

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

RGB
A color mode in which the three colors of light (red, green, and blue) are combined in
varying intensities to produce all other colors. A value between 0 and 255 is assigned to
each channel of red, green and blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB
to produce or detect color.
rollover
An interactive object or group of objects that changes its appearance when you click or
point to it.
round-tripping
The conversion of a document saved in a file format such as Portable Document Format
(PDF) in another format such as Corel DESIGNER (DES) and then back again.
rotate
To reposition and reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation.
ruler
A horizontal or vertical bar marked off in units that is used to determine the size and
position of objects. By default, the rulers display on the left side and along the top of
the application window, but they can be hidden or moved.
S
saturation
The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has
100% saturation contains no white. A color with 0% saturation is a shade of gray.
scale
To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by a specified
percentage. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1" and a width of 2" that is scaled
by 150% results in a height of 1.5" and a width of 3". The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to
width) is maintained.
segment
The line or curve between nodes in a curve object.

Glossary

415

selection box
An invisible rectangle with eight visible handles that appears around any object you
select using the Pick tool.
simple wireframe view
An outline view of a drawing that hides fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate
blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome.
size
To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by changing
one of the dimension's values. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1" and a width
of 2" can be sized by changing the value of the height to 1.5". A width of 3"
automatically results from the new height value. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to
width) is maintained.
skew
To slant an object vertically, horizontally, or both.
snap
To force an object that is being drawn or moved to align automatically to a point on the
grid, a guideline, or another object.
source object
The object you use to perform a shaping action on another object, such as welding,
trimming, or intersecting. The source object receives the fill and outline attributes of
the target object.
See also target object.
splash screen
The screen that appears when Corel DESIGNER starts. It monitors the progress of the
startup process and provides information about copyright and registration.
split blend
A single blend that is broken into two or more components to create a compound blend.
The object where the blend is split becomes the end object for one component of the
blend and start object for the other.

416

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

spot color
In commercial printing, a solid ink color that prints individually, one plate per spot
color.
spread
In commercial printing, a type of trap that is created by extending the foreground
object into the background object.
style
A set of attributes that controls the appearance of a specific type of object. There are
three style types: graphic styles, text styles (artistic and paragraph), and color styles.
subpaths
Paths that are part of one object.
subpath
A segment which is not joined to the main path.
subscript
Text characters that are positioned below the baseline of the other characters in a line
of text.
subtractive color model
A color model, such as CMYK, that creates color by subtracting wavelengths of light
reflected from an object. For example, a colored ink appears blue if it absorbs all colors
except blue.
super nudge
To move an object in large increments by pressing Shift and an Arrow key. The super
nudge value is multiplied by the nudge value to obtain the distance by which the object
is moved.
See also nudge and micro nudge.
superscript
Text characters that are positioned above the baseline of the other characters in a line
of text.

Glossary

417

swap disk
Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory
available in your computer.
swatch
One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed
booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in
the color palette.
symbol
A reusable object or group of objects. A symbol is defined once and can be referenced
many times in a drawing.
symbol instance
An occurrence of a symbol in a drawing. A symbol instance automatically inherits any
changes made to the symbol. You can also apply unique properties to each instance,
including size, position, and uniform transparency.
T
target object
The object you perform a shaping action on, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting
with another object. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes while
copying these attributes to the source objects used to perform the action.
See also source object.
template
A predefined set of information that sets the page size, orientation, ruler position, and
grid and guideline information. A template may also include graphics and text that can
be modified.
text frame
The rectangle that appears as a series of dashed lines around a block of paragraph text
created using the Text tool.
text style
A set of attributes that controls the appearance of text. There are two text style types:
artistic text styles and paragraph text styles.

418

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

texture fill
A fractally generated fill that, by default, fills an object or image area with one image
instead of with a series of repeating images.
threshold
A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap.
thumbnail
A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration.
tiling
The technique of repeating a small image across a large surface. Tiling is often used to
create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages.
tint
The lighter shade of a spot color.
tone
The variations in a color or the range of grays between black and white.
transparency
The quality of an object that makes it easy to see through. Setting lower levels of
transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or
image.
See also opacity.
tree view
A hierarchical view of folders, sub-folders, and files. In the Symbol manager docker, the
tree shows the current document at the top, then collections and library files.
TrueType fonts
A font specification developed by Apple. TrueType fonts print the way they appear on
the screen and can be resized to any height.
two-point perspective
An effect created by lengthening or shortening two sides of an object to create the
impression that the object is receding from view in two directions.

Glossary

419

U
underexposure
The lack of light in an image that makes it too dark.
uniform fill
A type of fill used to apply one solid color to your image.
See also fill.
Unicode
A character encoding standard that defines character sets for all written languages in
the world by using a 16-bit code set and more than 65, 000 characters. Unicode lets
you handle text effectively regardless of the language of the text, your operating system,
or the application you are using.
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)
A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet.
V
vanishing point
A marker that appears when you select an extrusion or an object to which perspective
has been added. With an extrusion, the vanishing point marker indicates the depth
(parallel extrusion) or the point at which the extruded surfaces would meet if extended
(perspective extrusion). In both cases, the vanishing point is indicated by an X.
vector graphic
An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position,
length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Vector graphics are created as collections
of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels.
See also bitmap.
vector object
A specific object within a drawing that is created as a collection of lines rather than as
patterns of individual dots or pixels. Vector objects are generated from mathematical
descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn.

420

Corel DESIGNER 12 User Guide

W
watermark
A small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the image pixels
which carries information about the image. This information survives normal editing,
printing, and scanning.
weld
To combine two objects into a single curve object with a single outline. A source object
is welded to a target object to create a new object that takes on the fill and outline
attributes of the target object.
white point
The measurement of white on a color monitor that influences how highlights and
contrast display.
Z
zoom
To reduce or magnify the view of a drawing. You can zoom in to see details or zoom out
for a broader view.
ZIP
A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing
time.

Glossary

421

Index
Numerics
3D effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
applying perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
applying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
drawing planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255
converting to curves . . . . . . . . . . . .120
converting to paragraph . . . . . . . . .251
converting to paragraph text . . 251, 253
fitting to a path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

3D images
projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

artistic text (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Asian operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

actions
repeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
undoing and redoing . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
undoing, redoing, and repeating . . . . 32

Asian text
choosing default font . . . . . . . . . . .273
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273274
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
spacing with Latin text . . . . . . . . . .274
using line-breaking rules . . . . . . . . .275

activating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ActiveCGM commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
add-ins
loading and unloading . . . . . . . . . . 394
aligning
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110112
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255
when drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
with precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
with snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
anchor point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 395
animation file (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 395
application tasks
automating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
arcs
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86

arrow keys (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

arrowheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
artistic text

Index

ASCII text
exporting PDF files in . . . . . . . . . . .355

aspect ratio (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

assigning object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
associating a file type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
automating
application tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
axonometric (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

B
backgrounds
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
from bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
solid color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
backing up
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4142
banding
testing fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . .339

423

base color (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

binary format
exporting PDF files in . . . . . . . . . . 355

range sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

rasterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
removing dust and scratches . . . . . . 292
resampling . . . . . . . . . . . 283284, 366
resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 288
splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 291
using as fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

bit depth (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

black-and-white color mode . . . . 294295

bitmap (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

bleed (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

bitmaps
applying lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
applying PowerClip objects . . . . . . 142
as backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
changing to black and white . .294295
changing to paletted color mode 295, 298
checking for watermarks . . . . . . . . 365
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 289, 291
color masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
coloring monochrome bitmaps . . . . 285
combining multi-layer bitmaps . . . 365
converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281282
cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283
cropping while importing . . . . . . . 368
displaying and hiding colors . . . . . 285
downsampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
embedding in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
extracting embedded color profiles . 365
fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . 281282, 365
inflating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
linking externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
maintaining proportions . . . . . . . . 284
optimizing for the Web . . . . . . . . . 303
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

bleed limit
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

beveling
corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133135
edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Bzier curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Bzier line (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

424

blend (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

blends
changing paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
color progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
creating colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
detaching from paths . . . . . . . . . . . 141
distances between objects . . . . . . . . 140
end objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
mapping nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
start objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
bookmark (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
bookmarks
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 351
boundaries
creating new objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
bounding box (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 397
breaking file associations . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Index

brightness (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

child color (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

brush strokes
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7879
linear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

child colors
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
moving between parents . . . . . . . . .201
sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

B-splines
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

choke (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

bullets
adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

circles
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

buttons
creating for Web . . . . . . . . . . 304305

clipart (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

C
calibrating rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
callouts
breaking apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7071
halos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
cascading style sheet (definition) . . . . . 397
center of rotation (definition) . . . . . . . 397
CGI script (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
CGM
ActiveCGM commands . . . . . . . . . 322
applying data to objects . . . . . . . . . 319
Web commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
chamfering
corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133135
character (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
characters
nonprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
returning to baseline . . . . . . . . . . . 257
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Index

Clipboard (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

clone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
cloning
blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
vector extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
closed object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 398
closed path (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
closed shapes
creating from lines . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 65
closing
Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
multiple line segments . . . . . . . . . . .65
shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
CMY color mode (definition) . . . . . . . . 398
CMYK
color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
outputting objects in PDF . . . . . . . .356
CMYK color mode (definition) . . . . . . . 398
collection (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
collections
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

425

color
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
color calibration bars
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 180, 182
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
undocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

color channel (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 398

color profile (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

color gamut (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 399

color profiles
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189190
copying from CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
ICC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
choosing an engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
choosing styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
correcting colors for display . . . . . .
embedding color profiles . . . . . . . .
enabling gamut alarm . . . . . . . . . .
using color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . .

187
192
194
187
194
192
193
189

color mode (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

color model (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 399
color models
CMYK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 417
grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
HSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
subtractive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
color modes
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMYK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
duotone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294
299
293
293
293
293
293

color palette (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 399

color palettes
choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 177
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180183
docking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . 181

426

color separation (definition) . . . . . . . . 399

color space (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
color styles
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197198
child colors and . . . . . . . . . . . 198200
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197198
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
parent colors and . . . . . . . . . . 199200
sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
color swatch (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 399
color value (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
color viewers
choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
colors
assigning hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
bitmap masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
changing in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 177178
contour outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
copying outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
correcting between devices . . . 189, 194
creating blends . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 179
custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . . 180181
displaying and hiding in bitmaps . . 285

Index

effects in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
parent and child . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 200
printing accurately . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
reproducing accurately . . . . . . . . . . 187
setting acceleration rates . . . . . . . . . 140
styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 201
transforming effects . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
using color harmonies . . . . . . . . . . 178
using color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

combined object (definition) . . . . . . . . 400

combining
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
commands
Active CGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
complex fills
rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
compound blend (definition) . . . . . . . . 400
compressing
PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
text and line art in PDF files . . . . . . 352
compression
LZW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
concave (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
constrain key (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 400
constraining
changing keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
using keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
while drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
content (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
contour (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
contours
accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
applying to groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Index

color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
line settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

contrast (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

control object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 400
control points (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 401
converting
artistic and paragraph text . . . . . . . .251
convex (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
copying
blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125126
fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
object properties . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 102
object transformations . . . . . . . . . . .103
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Corel Corporation
corporate solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
corners
beveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133134
filleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
scalloping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
crop (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
crop/fold marks
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
cropping
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
while importing bitmaps . . . . . . . . .368
curve object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

427

curve objects
converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120121
joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 122

defaults
changing property values . . . . . . 5960
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373374
text style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
zooming and panning . . . . . . . . . . . 36

curved lines
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 6263

deleting
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
symbol instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
symbol libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

curves
Bzier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
converting text to . . . . . . . . . . .251, 253
filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

densitometer scales
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
desktop (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

cusp (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

DeviceN (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

cusps
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

diacritical mark (definition) . . . . . . . . . 401

customizing
application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
drawing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
processed color palettes . . . . . . . . . 299
property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Undo settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

dimension line (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 401

dimension lines
angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
changing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
disk
swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

displaying
grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

D
data fields
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

distributing
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 113

databases
adding fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
choosing templates . . . . . . . . . . . .
creating from templates . . . . . . . . .
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dithering (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

428

316
318
317
315

dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
dockers
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
docking
color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Index

property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381382

document navigator (definition) . . . . . . 402

documentation conventions . . . . . . . . . 10
documents
backing up and recovering . . . . . . . . 41
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
viewing facing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
dpi (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
drawing
arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86
callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7071
choosing preset scales . . . . . . . . . . . 243
circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
flow lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
objects with precision . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
predefined shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . 8788
rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . . . . 83
shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86
drawing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
drawing information
accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
drawing page (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Drawing Plane toolbar
hiding or displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
drawing planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
unprojecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
drawing profiles
choosing preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Index

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

drawing scale
custom preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
drawing window
displaying geometric information . .117
drawing window (definition) . . . . . . . . 402
drawings
accessing information . . . . . . . . . . . .42
backing up and recovering . . . . . . . .41
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
inserting graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29
previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3637
quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
saving default settings for . . . . . . . .373
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
starting from templates . . . . . . . . . . .30
using objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
viewing facing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
viewing thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
zooming and panning . . . . . . . . . 3435
drop caps
adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 268
drop shadow (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 402
drop shadows
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
merge mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
separating from objects . . . . . . . . . .212
duotone color mode
changing images to . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
duotone color mode (definition) . . . . . 403
dust and scratches

429

correcting bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

dynamic guides
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
enabling and disabling . . . . . . . . . . .
parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
snapping objects to intersection . . . .
tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56
52
52
52
52
56
55
52

dynamic guides (definition) . . . . . . . . . 403

E
editing
drawing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
embedded objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
linked objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317318
templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
effects
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ellipses
curve objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
embedded objects
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361362

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
mapping modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
shaping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

EPS
embedded in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . 356

erasers
creating holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130
nib settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
erasing
connecting lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130131
portions of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
straight lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130
error diffusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
exporting
embedding color profiles . . . . 191192
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
PDF files in an encoding format . . . 355
text as curves in PDF files . . . . . . . . 355
extracting
paths from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
PowerClip contents . . . . . . . . 142143
extrusion (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
extrusions
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

F
feathering (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

embedding
fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279, 354
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
objects in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

feedback sounds
assigning to events . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

envelope (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

fields
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

envelopes
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

430

file associations
breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Index

customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

files
auto backup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
backing up and recovering . . . . . . . . 41
exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365, 369
exporting to Microsoft Office . . . . . 370
exporting to WordPerfect Office . . . 370
formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
printing information . . . . . . . . . . . 346
printing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
recovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
saving to different formats . . . . . . . 371
Web publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
changing the order . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

finding
menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
flipping
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108109
floating object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 403
floating toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
flow lines
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6566
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6566
focus color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

font (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

filleting
corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

font matching
exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

fills
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
around open curves . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173174
copying properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
copying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
in open curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173174
setting default colors . . . . . . . . . . . 173
texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

filter (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

filters

Index

fonts
Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273274
embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 354
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353354
missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277278
PANOSE system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
specifying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . .249
substituting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277278
Windows and Macintosh equivalents 278
formatting codes
adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
fountain fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
fountain fills
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
display quality . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 160
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 160

431

steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

greeking (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

fountain steps (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 404

grid (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

freehand curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6162

grids
displaying or hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
distance between lines . . . . . . . . . . 239
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

freehand marquee select (definition) . 404

FTP (file transfer protocol) (definition) 404

G
gamut
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
gamut alarm
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
geometric information
accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
GIF (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
glyph (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
grab area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
grab area (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
graphics
embedding in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 420

group (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

grouping
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
groups
adding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
nested (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
removing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
guidelines
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240242
hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 240
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
snapping to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
guides
dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
gutter (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

gravity candidate (definition) . . . . . . . . 404

halftone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

gravity field (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

halo (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

gravity snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 48

setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
turning on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

halos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

gravity source (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 405

grayscale
color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
duotone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
in PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
grayscale (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

432

handles (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

hatch fills
aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 162
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
transforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Index

Help
changing the language . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

image resolution (definition) . . . . . . . . . 407

hot zone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

imagesetter (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

hotspot (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

importing
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
embedding color profiles . . . . . 191192
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

hotspots
changing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
hotspotting
Object Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . 315
HSB
color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

HSB color model (definition) . . . . . . . . 406

HTML
export options . . . . . . . . . . . . 311313
preparing files and objects for . . . . . 311
publishing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 314
setting Preflight options . . . . . 311, 313
HTML (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
hue (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
hyperlink (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
hyperlinks
assigning to rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . 304
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
verifying in a Web document . . . . . 309
hyphenating
paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

I
ICC profiles
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
choosing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
embedding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
icon (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
image map (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Index

images
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
setting Web options . . . . . . . . 312, 314

imposition layouts
choosing preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
indenting
paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
inks
displaying all tone curves on grid . . .300
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299300

insert (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

inserting
embedded objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
installing
add-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
intensity (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
interlacing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
interlanguage spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
internal symbols
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Internet
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
export options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311313
hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
preparing files and objects for . . . . .311
publishing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 314
setting Preflight options . . . . . 311, 314
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306307

433

URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

intersecting
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136137
isometric (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

J
JavaScript (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
joining
curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
JPEG (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
justify (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

K
kerning
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
kerning (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
keyboard shortcuts
assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376377
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

L
Lab (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Lab color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
languages
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
text display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
layers
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 229
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225226
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

434

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
editing objects on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 227
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228229
master pages . . . . . . . . . 225226, 228
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 229
objects on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 230, 330
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
stacking order . . . . . . . . 225, 228229
to organize objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

layouts
imposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 233
styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
leader tabs (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
leading
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
leading (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
lenses
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 223
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 223224
special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
libraries
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
creating new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
editing symbols in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
sharing symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
library (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
lighting
applying to vector extrusions . . . . . . 210

Index

removing from vector extrusions . . . 210

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
source links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

lightness (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

line styles
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
linearizing
PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
line-breaking rules
adding and removing characters . . . 275
enabling and disabling . . . . . . . . . . 275
following characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
leading characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
lines
2-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
adding segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
adding shapes to ends . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Bzier curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
B-splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 65
creating standard patterns . . . . . . . . . 76
curved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 6263
dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6669, 401
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 64
editing standard patterns . . . . . . . . . 76
flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6162
miter limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
multipoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6162
parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6061

linked objects

Index

linking
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 365
externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
links
fixing broken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
setting Web options . . . . . . . . . . . .312
updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

locking
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
lossless (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
lossy (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
LZW (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

M
macros
VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
magnifying
lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
managing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
marquee select (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 409
masking colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
master layer (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
master layers
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
master object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 409
master page (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
master pages
displaying objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
gridlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

435

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

menu commands
finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

nested group (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 410

menus
adding and removing items . . . . . .
changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nested symbol
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

380
379
379
379

merge modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

applying to drop shadows . . . . . . . 212
applying to transparencies . . . .218, 220
types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
mesh fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
mesh fills
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
micro nudge (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Microsoft Office
exporting files to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
mirroring
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
miter limit
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
miter limit (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
moir pattern (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 410
monitors
alerting to nonprinting colors . .191, 193
moving
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104105
precisely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
while drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
multiple select (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 410
multipoint lines
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6162

436

nested PowerClip objects (definition) . 410

nested symbol (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 410

nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 124
adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . 122
aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 122
joining with lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
maintaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
mapping in blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 121
skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
nodes (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
noise (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
nonprinting characters
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
nonprinting characters (definition) . . . 410
nudge (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
nudging
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
setting distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
super nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

O
object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
object data
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
adding fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Index

assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317318
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
customizing fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317318
hotspotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
setting up database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Object Data Manager

adding fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
hotspotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
object properties
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
object sprayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
objects
accessing geometric information . . . 117
aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110112
applying CGM data . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
applying lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
assigning data to . . . . . . . . . . 317318
blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138139
breaking apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
breaking paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
changing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
changing transparency . . . . . . . . . . 215
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
converting outlines to . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
copying data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
copying effects . . . . . . . . . . . . 102103
copying fills to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
copying outline color . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
copying properties . . . . . . . . . 100, 102
copying transformations . . . . . . . . . 103
creating from boundaries . . . . . . . . 137
creating Web-enabled . . . . . . . . . . 303
curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101102
deselecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Index

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
distributing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 113
dividing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
embedding in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130131
extracting subpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 174
flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108109
getting geometric information . 116117
grouping and ungrouping . . . . 114115
intersecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136137
joining subpaths in groups . . . . . . . .65
line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 361
mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104105, 236
nudging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105106
ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113114
pasting into drawings . . . . . . . . . . .101
PowerClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
projecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 93
projecting and unprojecting . 89, 9293
Reflect Nodes mode . . . . . . . . . . . .124
removing outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 99
shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
sizing and scaling . . . . . . . . . . 106107
skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 5355
splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128129
spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131133
Web publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136137

437

wrapping text around . . . . . . . . . . 267

offsetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
sprayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

page numbers
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

OLE objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

pages
adding and deleting . . . . . . . . 235236
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 233
moving objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235236
ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

one-point perspective (definition) . . . . 411

opacity
adjusting for transparencies . . .216217
applying transparencies . . . . . .215216
opacity (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
open object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
open objects
filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
operating systems
Asian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
OPI

paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

maintaining links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

paletted color mode (definition) . . . . . 412

optimizing
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

palettes
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
color types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
creating color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . 181
editing custom color palettes . . . . . . 181
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
opening and closing color palettes . . 181

orientation
Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
origin (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
orthogonal (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
outline (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
outlines
converting to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
copying color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
copying properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
output resolution (definition) . . . . . . . 411
overexposure (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 411
overprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

438

pan (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Pan tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3435
PANOSE (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
PANOSE font matching
preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
substitute font lists . . . . . . . . . 277278
PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM
and color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
PANTONE process colors (definition) 412
paragraph text
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
adjusting frames automatically . . . . 247

Index

aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255

combining frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
converting to artistic text . . . . . 251, 253
fitting to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
hyphenating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
indenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 271
making Web-compatible 306307, 311
placing inside an object . . . . . . . . . 247
separating from an object . . . . . . . . 247
wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

paragraph text (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 412

paragraph text frames
combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
parent color (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
parent colors
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . 199
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
path (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
paths
breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
changing in blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
closing automatically . . . . . . . . . . . 128
detaching from blends . . . . . . . . . . 141
extracting from objects . . . . . . . . . . 130
keeping open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
pattern fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
pattern fills
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165166
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167168
mirroring and rotating . . . . . . . . . . 168
mixing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
tile origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Index

tile size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

two-color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

pattern tiles
sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
PDF
bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
choosing an encoding format . . . . . .355
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
embedded files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353355
generating thumbnails . . . . . . . . . .351
hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
linearizing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
maintaining OPI links . . . . . . . . . .357
optimizing . . . . . . . 352353, 358359
outputting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
preparing for service bureau . . . . . .357
preserving document settings . . . . .357
publishing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
reducing file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
saving files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
setting fountain steps . . . . . . . . . . .355
styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350351
using Preflight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

perspectives
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 206
one-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
removing effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
two-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
vanishing point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
pixel (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
planes
choosing drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
unprojecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
plug-in filters

439

adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . 288

PNG (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
polygons
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
reshaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
PostScript
printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337338
selecting a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
PostScript fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 413
PostScript fills
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
displaying in preview mode . . . . . . . 37
texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PowerClip effect (definition) . . . . . . . . 413
PowerClip object (definition) . . . . . . . 413
PowerClip objects
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 143
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142143
editing contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
extracting contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142143
Preflight
for PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
printing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
previewing
drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3637
full-screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 313
print styles
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
printers
color management settings . . . .191, 193

440

printing
applying ICC profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 336
applying print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
bitmap fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
bitmap output threshold . . . . . . . . . 335
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 337
bleed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344345
changing fill quality . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
choosing print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
chunking bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
color calibration bars . . . . . . . 344, 346
color management settings . . . . . . . 191
colors accurately . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 336
creating print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
crop/fold marks . . . . . . . . . . . 344345
densitometer scales . . . . . . . . . 344, 346
downsampling bitmaps . . . . . . . . . 336
drawing information . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
driver compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
file information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
fine tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335, 339
imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
in black or grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 230, 330
layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
OPI links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
page numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
page orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
page settings for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
positioning print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . 331
PostScript printer . . . . . . . . . . 337338
PPD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Preflight settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
printers marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
rasterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
reducing curve complexity . . . . . . . 339

Index

registration marks . . . . . . . . . 344, 346

setting printer properties . . . . . . . . . 329
sizing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
testing complex graphics . . . . . . . . . 338
testing for banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
tiling print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Type 1 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

process color (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 413

process colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
processed color palettes
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

rearranging items on . . . . . . . . . . . .386

property values
changing defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . 5960
publishing
to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
to the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 314

Q
QuickCorrect (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 414
quitting
application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

product activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

radius (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

profiles
choosing preset drawing . . . . . . . . . . 92
creating drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
customizing drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
deleting drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
editing drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

range sensitivity
colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
setting for bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
range sensitivity (definition) . . . . . . . . . 414

progressive (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

rasterizing
pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

Projected Axes docker

hiding or displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
projected drawing modes
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
using drawing planes . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
using drawing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 89
projects
managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
property bar
adding and removing items . . . . . . 385
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
docking and undocking . . . . . . . . . 385
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Index

raster graphics
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
rasterized image (definition) . . . . . . . . . 414

ratio
aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
recovering
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4142
rectangles
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
rounding corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
reflect nodes
shaping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Reflect Nodes mode
shaping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
registration marks

441

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

render (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

rendering
complex fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
resample (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
resampling
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
while importing bitmaps . . . . . . . . 366
resizing
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
changing in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . 283
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
resolution (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
RGB
color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
outputting objects in PDF . . . . . . . 356
RGB (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
rollover (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
rollovers
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304305
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
viewing states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
rotate (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
rotating
characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
sprayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
rotation
center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

442

rounding
corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ruler (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
rulers
calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

S
saturation (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
saving
default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
drawing information . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
to different formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
scale
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242243
custom preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242243
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
setting drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 242243
scaling
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106107
scalloping
corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 135
scratches
correcting bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
scripts
automating tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
segment (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
segments
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Index

manipulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
selection box (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 416
settings
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
drawing scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242243
dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
saving as defaults . . . . . . . . . . 373374
shapes
adding text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
adding to line ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
creating from lines . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 65
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 88
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
shaping
beveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 125
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
using envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4849
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
objects to other objects . . . . . . . . . . .53
objects when drawing . . . . . . . . . . . .54
to guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

source object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 416

spacing
interlanguage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
special characters
adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
special effects
applying to bitmaps . . . . . . . . 286, 288
lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
plug-in filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
splash screen (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 416
split blend (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
splitting
bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128129
spot color (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

shortcut keys
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

sprayed lines
offsetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

simple wireframe view (definition) . . . 416

spraying objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

size (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

spraylists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
reset to saved settings . . . . . . . . . . . .80
size of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
spacing of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
spray order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

sizing
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
skew (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
skewing
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
snap (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
snapping

Index

spread (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

squares
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
rounding corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

443

stacking
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
starting
application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
status bar
adding and removing items . . . . . . 386
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
hiding or displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
resizing items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
straight lines
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
stretching
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
style (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
styles
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 200201
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
creating and applying . . . . . . . . . . 197
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
subpaths
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
extracting from combined objects . . 116
joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
subpaths (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
subscript (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
substitute fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277278
super nudge (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 417
support
customer feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

444

training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

swap disk (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

swatch (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
symbol (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
symbol instance (definition) . . . . . . . . . 418
symbols
adding to an object spraylist . . . . . . . 82
adding to library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
converting objects to . . . . . . . . 150, 155
copying and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149150, 152
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
editing in a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
exporting libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 147
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
locating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
making internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
modifying instances . . . . . . . . 147, 154
nested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
purging definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
reverting instances to objects . . . . . . 148
sharing between drawings . . . . . . . 153
spraylists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
unsupported object types . . . . . . . . 155
using in drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

T
tabs
adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 263

target object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 418

technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
template (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
templates
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
choosing for databases . . . . . . . . . . 318
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Index

creating databases from . . . . . . . . . 317

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

text
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 88, 245
adding drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
adding special characters . . . . . . . . 268
aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255
artistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 395
Asian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Asian font properties . . . . . . . . . . . 274
breaking apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
changing case . . . . . . . . . . . . 249250
changing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
changing flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
changing spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
character properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
combining text frames . . . . . . . . . . 264
compressing in PDF files . . . . . . . . 352
converting . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 251, 253
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
creating for Web . . . . . . . . . . 306307
default style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251252
embedding graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
embedding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
exporting as curves in PDF files . . . 355
finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
finding and replacing . . . . . . . 251252
fitting to a path . . . . . . . . . . . 259260
font type and size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 261
frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
greeking . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 251, 405
gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
indenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
kerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 257
language display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Index

leading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 257

linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 266
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
orientation of Asian . . . . . . . . . . . .274
paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 247, 249
paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
placing inside objects . . . . . . . . . . .247
resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249250
returning to baseline . . . . . . . . . . . .258
rotating characters . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
separating from a path . . . . . . 259260
setting font attributes . . . . . . . . . . .249
shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
shifting and rotating . . . . . . . . . . . .257
spacing between Asian and Latin . . .274
special characters . . . . . . . . . . 268269
straightening . . . . . 257258, 260261
styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
subscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 417
superscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
TrueType fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
underlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

text frame (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

text frames
adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
automatically sized . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
breaking apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
fixed-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 264
formatting options . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
text style (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
texture fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
texture fills
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169170

445

PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
tile origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

three-dimensional effects
applying perspective . . . . . . . . . . . 205
applying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
three-dimensional images
projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
threshold (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
thumbnail (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
thumbnails
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
tiling (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
tint (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
tone
effects in bitmaps . . . . . . . 289, 291292
transforming effects . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
tone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
tone curves
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299300
displaying all on grid . . . . . . . . . . . 300
toolbars
adding and deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
adding and removing items . . . . . . 383
arranging items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
docking and undocking . . . . . .381382
floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
grab area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . 382
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381382
renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
sizing button images . . . . . . . . . . . 384
toolbox

446

exploring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
transformations
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
transparencies
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 217
applying merge modes to . . . . 218, 220
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 217
editing the colors of . . . . . . . . 217218
fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215217
patterned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
textured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
transparency (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 419
tree view (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
trimming
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131132
overlapping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
TrueType fonts (definition) . . . . . . . . . 419
TrueType Fonts (TTF)
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
two-point perspective (definition) . . . . 419
Type 1 fonts
downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

U
underexposure (definition) . . . . . . . . . 420
Unicode (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
uniform fill (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
uninstalling the application . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
unlocking
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Index

PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

updating
Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
URL (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
zooming and panning . . . . . . . . . . . .34

virtual line segments

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

user interface
changing the language . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Visual Basic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

watermark (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

vanishing point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 420

watermarks
checking while importing . . . . . . . .365

VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 393

automating using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
automation projects . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
editing macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
recording macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
running macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
vector extrusions
cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
light sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
vanishing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
vector graphic (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 420
vector graphics
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Web
creating objects for . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
creating text for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
export options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311313
optimizing bitmaps for . . . . . . . . . .303
Preflight options . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 313
preparing files and objects for . . . . .311
publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 314
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
verifying links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Web objects
creating text for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Web pages
previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 313
WebCGM commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

vector object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 420

wedges
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

View tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

weld (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

viewing modes
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3839
enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3839
refresh time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
simple wireframe . . . . . . . . . . . . 3839

welding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136137

views

Index

white point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

WordPerfect Office
exporting files to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
workspace
application window . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

447

choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 375

customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
importing and exporting . . . . .374375
property bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
restoring default settings . . . . . . . . 375
standard toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1617
toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
using more than one . . . . . . . . . . . 374

workspaces
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
importing and exporting . . . . . . . . 375

Z
ZIP (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
zoom (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 36

448

Index